12-003 Code Vt. R. 12-030-003-X - CHAPTER 21 - WATER SUPPLY RULE

Introduction.

Applicability of This Rule

This rule, known as the Water Supply Rule, applies to all Public water systems in Vermont, which include Public water systems, and bottled water systems. Only portions of this rule apply to each type of water system. The section below, entitled "Types of Water Systems," helps the reader to identify his or her type of water system. There may also be other jurisdictions with regulations affecting water systems. This rule is not intended to, and does not affect, modify or repeal existing orders of the Board of Health.

Purpose of This Rule

This rule is intended to serve a number of purposes. First, and most important, the rule's primary purpose is to regulate water systems in the state so that they provide clean and safe drinking water to Vermont's citizens. The rule also establishes well construction standards (contained in Part 12 of Appendix A).

Second, by implementing this rule, Vermont qualifies to retain "primacy" for the Safe Drinking Water Act from the federal US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Primacy means that the state will administer the federal regulations that apply to all public water systems in the country, instead of EPA. Without state regulations that are at least as strict as the federal ones, Vermont may not administer the federal regulations.

Having primacy represents an advantage to Vermont's water systems. The federal regulations contain some optional provisions that create exceptions to the regulations when mitigating factors make it difficult or impossible to follow the regulation. Also, there are situations where interpretations of the federal regulations can be made by states with primacy that provide some benefit to the public water systems. EPA has stated that, in the event that they have to administer their own rules in a state without primacy, they will not have the resources to provide most of these permitted exceptions to the regulations.

Types of Water Systems

This rule varies in its applicability to the different types of water systems. Due to the comprehensive nature of this rule, and for the convenience of the reader, the water systems have been categorized into groups, and the introduction at the beginning of each subchapter in the rule explains which sections apply to which water systems. Also, when these categories of water systems are referred to in this rule, they are displayed in bold type. The following figure displays the different categories in graphical format, although the reader is cautioned that there are formal definitions for each type of water system contained in the Rule.

Click to view image

Public and Non-Public

All water systems are initially classified as either Public water systems or Non-Public water systems. Classification as a Public water system depends on the number of service connections (15 or more) or people served (25 or more) by the system, as is explained in the definition for Public water systems in Subchapter 21-2.

Community and Non-Community

Public water systems are further subdivided into Public Community water systems and Public NonCommunity water systems. Generally, Public Community water systems are those which serve residents on a year-round basis, while Public Non-Community water systems serve nonresidential groups of people (e.g., restaurants, schools).

Non-Transient and Transient

Public Non-Community water systems are further subdivided into those systems who serve non-residential users who don't change over time (Public Non-Transient Non-Community water system), such as schools and offices, and those non-residential users who do change over time (Public Transient Non-Community water system), such as restaurants and motels.

Bottled water systems are considered to be a special case of Public water systems, and are regulated specifically under Subchapter 21-11. They are not included in the categories addressed here.

In summary, then, there are four categories of water systems referred to throughout this rule and grouped for convenience:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water systems; and
(d) Bottled water systems.

The formal definitions for (a) through (d) above (i.e., the Public water systems) are contained in Subchapter 2, Definitions. Public water systems are also subject to regulation under the federal Safe Drinking Water Act. By enacting this rule, the federal regulations will be administered by the Department of Environmental Conservation when it has "primacy," or primary administrative and enforcement authority.

The design and construction standards for Public Non-community water systems are contained in Appendix A, Part 11. Continued operating requirements, including operating permits, fees, and other requirements, are administered by the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division of the Department of Environmental Conservation.

Organization of the Rule

The complete Water Supply Rule consists of the sixteen subchapters and four appendices. The chapters are divided into Sections (e.g., 2.12) and Subsections (e.g., 2.18(a)(1)). Each subchapter contains a brief introduction which identifies which type(s) of water systems are regulated by that subchapter. These subchapters contain regulatory requirements that water systems must follow.

Appendix A of the rule contains the Vermont Standards for Water System Design, Construction, and Protection. These are technical standards that apply to persons designing, constructing, and operating water systems. This appendix contains twelve Parts, and the introduction at the beginning of the appendix identifies which parts of the appendix apply to which water systems. The numbering in Appendix A is divided into Parts (e.g., 5) and Subparts (e.g., 5.1.2(a)).

Parts 1 through 9 of Appendix A apply to Public Community water systems and Bottled water systems with sources in Vermont. Part 11 contains the technical standards for Public Non-community water systems which are considerably simplified from those for Public Community systems. Finally, Part 12 contains standards for water sources for which permits are required from the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division.

Appendix B contains the requirements for the Long Range Plan, a document required under the. rules, whose purpose is to assist water systems in proper planning for the continued viability of their systems.

Appendix C is a table of the sampling frequencies required for bacteriological monitoring.

Appendix D contains the standards for Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manuals, which are also required under this rule.

Subchapter 21-1 AUTHORITY AND PURPOSE

Introduction

This subchapter applies to all water systems.

1.1 Authority.

This rule is adopted under the authority of 10 V.S.A. Chapter 48, Groundwater Protection; 10 V.S.A. Chapter 56, Public Water Supply; and 18 V.S.A. § 1218. Related statutes include: 3 V.S.A. § 2822 (j), regarding fees; 18 V.S.A. § 501b, regarding certification of laboratories; 18 V.S.A. § 503, regarding use of laboratory by people; and 24 V.S.A. Chapter 120, regarding funding of public water supply planning and construction.

This rule refers to and adopts the authority of the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act: 42 U.S.C. 300 f. et. seq. and except as explicitly provided herein, the rule adopts and incorporates by reference the National Primary Drinking Water Regulations, 40 CFR 141 (July 1, 2009), the National Primary Drinking Water Regulations Implementation, 40 CFR 142 (July 1, 2009),and the National Secondary Drinking Water Regulations, 40 CFR 143 (July 1, 2009), under an agreement with the US Environmental Protection Agency, by which the State of Vermont has primary enforcement authority (primacy) in Vermont for the Safe Drinking Water Act.

Where necessary to protect the public health, but subject to appeal, the Secretary may require additional drinking water permit conditions under this rule.

1.2 Purpose.

The purpose of this rule is to protect the public health by assuring safe, affordable drinking water from Public Water systems, and to implement and enforce the provisions of the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act and Vermont statutes.

The granting of a permit under this rule does not relieve the water supplier of the responsibility for the satisfactory functioning of the water system, nor limit his/her responsibility or liability under other statutes or rules.

Subchapter 21-2

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water systems:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water systems; and
(d) Domestic and Imported Bottled Water systems.

Additional definitions applying only to Non-Community water systems and Non-public water systems requiring permits are contained in Part 11 of Appendix A.

Additional definitions are also contained in 40 CFR, Sections 141.2, 142.2, and 143.2 which are adopted herein. These definitions apply to federal regulations which affect Public water systems (see below for definition of Public water systems).

2.1 General.

The following definitions and abbreviations shall apply in the interpretation and enforcement of this rule.

2.2 Definitions.

ACTION LEVEL means the concentration of a substance in drinking water which clearly provides adequate public health protection, as determined by the Vermont Department of Health.

AGENCY means the Vermont Agency of Natural Resources.

BOTTLED WATER means any non-carbonated, non-flavored water placed in a sealed container for sale or distribution to the public with the express or implied intent of providing water for human consumption.

BOTTLED WATER SYSTEM means a Public water system which bottles drinking water for public distribution and sale. A Domestic Bottled Water System is a Bottled Water System with at least one source located within Vermont. An Imported Bottled Water System is a Bottled Water System with all sources located outside of Vermont.

BULK WATER means drinking water delivered to consumers or water purveyors by means other than pipeline or bottled water.

CAPACITY means that a public water system has the technical, financial, and management capabilities to consistently comply with current performance standards, including the requirements of this rule and the Safe Drinking Water Act, 42 U.S.C. Section 300f et. seq., as amended.

CERTIFIED OPERATOR means any person who has a responsibility for the operation of any water system and holds the class of certification equal to or greater than the class of the water system.

CLEAN COMPLIANCE HISTORY means having no E. coli violations, no monitoring violations under 40 CFR 141 Subpart Y, no coliform Treatment Technique trigger exceedances, or coliform Treatment Technique Violations.

COLIFORM TREATMENT TECHNIQUE VIOLATION means a violation that occurs when a water system exceeds a treatment technique trigger pursuant to 40 CFR 141.859 and fails to conduct the required assessment or corrective actions within the timeframe specified or when a seasonal system fails to complete a state start-up procedure.

COLOR UNIT means the color produced by 1 mg/l platinum in the form of the chloroplatinate ion.

COMMISSIONER means the Commissioner of the Vermont Department of Environmental Conservation or the Commissioner's designee.

CONFINING LAYER means a continuous, extensive geologic unit of low permeability.

CONSECUTIVE WATER SYSTEM means a public water system that is permitted to receive some or all of its finished water from one or more wholesale systems. Delivery may be through a direct connection or through the distribution system of one or more consecutive systems or a non-piped connection via water delivery via tanker truck or trailer.

CROSS CONNECTION means any actual or potential connection between the public water supply and a source of contamination or pollution.

DEPARTMENT means the Vermont Department of Environmental Conservation.

DESIGNATED CERTIFIED OPERATOR means the certified operator designated by the water facility owner to be responsible for quality, quantity, process control, and system integrity decisions involving public health, treatment, storage, distribution, and standards compliance. The Designated Certified Operator shall hold a valid certification equal to or greater than the classification of the treatment facility or distribution system or both. This individual may delegate responsibilities to Certified operators or uncertified on-site personnel. Compliance with the requirements of this rule with respect to any delegated tasks are the ultimate responsibility of the Designated Certified Operator.

DRINKING WATER means non-carbonated, non-flavored water that is intended for human consumption or other consumer uses whether provided by a Public water system or in a container, bottle or package or in bulk, including water used for production of ice, foodstuffs or other products designed for human consumption.

DRINKING WATER FACILITY means a bottled or bulk water facility requiring a permit to operate under this rule.

ENTRY POINT TO THE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM: (also referred to as "entry point") The location at which water enters the distribution system from any applicable source(s), storage tank, pumping facility, treatment plant or other water system facility immediately prior to or at the first location where water can be consumed. This location reflects all applicable source water treatment and disinfection contact time.

EMERGENCY SOURCE means a water source which is not permitted for use by a Public water system. It is identified only as an alternate water source that may be used for a limited duration emergency in the event of an unforeseen circumstance that prevents the water system's permitted sources from supplying either adequate quantity or quality of water.

GROSS BETA ACTIVITY means the total radioactivity due to beta particle emission as inferred from measurements on a dry sample.

GROUNDWATER means water below the land surface in a zone of saturation.

HYDROGEOLOGIST means a person with training or experience in bedrock geology, glacial geology, and groundwater hydrology sufficient to prepare adequately the hydrogeologic analyses required by this rule.

INFILTRATION GALLERY means a subsurface collection system located so as to intercept ambient groundwater or surface water flow and generally designed with roughly horizontal collection pipes.

LABORATORY CERTIFICATION means that a laboratory meets the minimum Vermont Department of Health requirements for specific parameters and that the laboratory is granted approval for analyses of these parameters for a maximum of three (3) years.

LEVEL 1 SITE ASSESSMENT means, as defined in 40 CFR § 141.2, a detailed inspection by the water system's operator or an operator of the same or higher class, that looks for all possible sanitary defects that could allow bacterial contamination into the system and examines sample protocol, methods, and sampling equipment used in collecting coliform samples. This is a form comprised of yes/no answers to assist in the operator's ability to assess the system.

LEVEL 2 SITE ASSESSMENT means an event triggered under the requirements of 40 CFR § 141.859 i-iii. The site assessment is a comprehensive inspection performed by the State or a party approved by the State with specific training necessary to perform these detailed reviews. The question form is complex and involves detailed review of system infrastructure, interviews with system staff, and investigation of protocol, methods, and sampling equipment used in collecting coliform samples. This is a detailed form comprised of specific questions and topics designed to identify possible defects.

MAN-MADE BETA PARTICLE AND PHOTON EMITTERS means all radionuclides emitting beta particles and/or photons listed in Maximum Permissible Body Burdens and Maximum Permissible Concentration of Radionuclides in Air or Water for Occupational Exposure, NBS Handbook 69, except the daughter products of thorium 232, uranium-235 and uranium-238.

MICROSCOPIC PARTICULATE ANALYSIS (MPA) means the analysis described in the US Environmental Protection Agency document, "Consensus Method for determining groundwaters under the direct influence of surface water using microscopic particulate analysis" (EPA document # 910/9-92-029).

MONITORING WELL means any well constructed for the purpose of monitoring groundwater quantity or quality.

OPERATOR means an individual who accepts responsibility for operational activities that will directly affect the quality and/or quantity of drinking water provided to consumers, and who is certified as such by the State of Vermont.

OWNER means the person(s) who owns or has an ownership interest in a Public water system. An OWNER may designate an authorized representative who has the authority to act on the owner's behalf in all matters regarding the Public water system, and is designated to be the contact person in place of the OWNER for all communications from the Secretary regarding the water system.

PERMIT means a written document issued by the Secretary (see below) pursuant to these regulations, giving a designated person approval to operate and/or construct, alter or renovate a specific water system or drinking water facility.

PERSON means an individual, partnership, fire district, association, cooperative, syndicate, company, firm, trust, corporation, government corporation, municipal corporation, institution, state, federal, or municipal government department, division, bureau, agency, or any other entity recognized by law.

POTABLE WATER means water free from impurities in amounts sufficient to cause disease or harmful physiological effects, and having bacteriological, chemical, physical and radiological quality conforming to applicable standards of the Secretary.

POTENTIAL SOURCE OF CONTAMINATION means any activity or condition which may adversely affect water quality.

PRIMARY DRINKING WATER STANDARD means a standard which:

(a) applies to Public water systems and drinking water;
(b) applies to contaminants which may have an adverse effect on the health of persons;
(c) specifies for each such contaminant either:
(1) a maximum contaminant level (MCL), if, in the judgment of the Secretary, it is economically and technologically feasible to ascertain the level of such contaminants in drinking water and Public water systems, or
(2) if, in the judgment of the Secretary, it is not economically or technologically feasible to ascertain the level of such contaminant, each treatment technique known to the Secretary which leads to a reduction of the contaminants identified in Subchapter 21-6; and
(d) contains criteria and procedures to assure a supply of drinking water which dependably complies with such maximum contaminant levels or treatment techniques.

PROTECTED SOURCE means a source that has no outstanding sanitary defects, has a valid source permit or otherwise is acknowledged as predating the permitting program but has been recognized as a source serving the water system, has a valid Groundwater Under the Direct Influence of Surface Water determination and is determined to be groundwater, and for NTNC and Community drinking water system, does not have an outstanding Source Protection Plan or Source Protection Plan Update. This is included for the purpose of compliance with 40 CFR § 141 subpart Y.

PUBLIC WATER SOURCE means any surface water or groundwater intake used, or permitted to be used, as a source of drinking water for a Public water system.

PUBLIC WATER SOURCE PROTECTION AREA means a surface and subsurface area from or through which contaminants are reasonably likely to reach a Public water system source.

PUBLIC WATER SYSTEM means any system(s) or combination of systems owned or controlled by a person, that provides drinking water through pipes or other constructed conveyances to the public and that has at least fifteen (15) service connections or serves an average of at least twenty five (25) individuals daily for at least sixty (60) days out of the year. Such term includes all collection, treatment, storage and distribution facilities under the control of the water supplier and used primarily in connection with such system, and any collection or pretreatment storage facilities not under such control which are used primarily in connection with such system. Public water system shall also mean any part of a system which does not provide drinking water, if use of such a part could affect the quality or quantity of the drinking water supplied by the system. Public water system shall also mean a system which bottles drinking water for public distribution and sale (see also Bottled Water System).

(a) PUBLIC COMMUNITY WATER SYSTEM means a Public water system which serves at least fifteen (15) service connections used by year-round residents or regularly serves at least 25 year-round residents.
(b) PUBLIC NON-COMMUNITY WATER SYSTEM means a Public water system that is not a Public Community water system.
(1) PUBLIC NON-TRANSIENT NON-COMMUNITY WATER SYSTEM (NTNCWS) means a Public water system that is not a Public Community water system and that regularly serves at least 25 of the same persons daily for more than six months per year. Examples: schools, factories, office buildings.
(2) PUBLIC TRANSIENT NON-COMMUNITY WATER SYSTEM (TNCWS) means a Public Non-community water system that is not a Non-transient Non-community system. Examples: restaurants, motels, campgrounds.

PUBLIC WATER SYSTEM CLASS means the grouping of Public water systems based on type of treatment technology and type of Public water system. A Class may, where appropriate, also be grouped according to size of population served by the system.

PUBLIC WATER TREATMENT PLANT means a facility providing for the treatment of water, or the protection of water by treatment, by any one, or any combination of the controlled processes of coagulation, flocculation, sedimentation, adsorption, filtration, disinfection, or other processes which produce potable water.

REPEAT COMPLIANCE PERIOD means any subsequent compliance period after the initial compliance period.

REGIONAL ADMINISTRATOR means the Regional Administrator of the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Region 1, in Boston, Massachusetts.

REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER means an engineer registered with the Vermont Board of Professional Engineering.

RESPONSIBLE CHARGE means the operator(s) in responsible charge is defined as the person(s) designated by the owner to be the certified operator(s) who makes decisions regarding the daily operational activities of a public water system, water treatment facility and/or distribution system that will directly affect the quality and/or quantity of drinking water.

RUNNING ANNUAL AVERAGE means the average of all sample analytical results taken during the previous four calendar quarters.

SANITARY DEFECT means a defect that could provide a pathway of entry for microbial contamination into the water system or that is indicative of a failure or an imminent failure of an existing barrier.

SANITARY SURVEY means an onsite review of the water source, facilities, equipment, operation and maintenance of a public water system for the purpose of evaluating the adequacy of such source, facilities, equipment, operation and maintenance for producing and distributing safe drinking water.

SEASONAL SYSTEM means the only type of system in Vermont to be categorized as a seasonal water system are select TNC systems. These systems must startup and shutdown throughout the year and be closed for an entire calendar quarter (January - March; April - June; July - September; or October -December). If the water system serves water in each calendar quarter of the year, they are considered year-round, even if they close for part or most of the monitoring period. Seasonal systems may or may not completely depressurize during their off- season. It is possible for a water system to have multiple seasonal periods in which they serve public population(s).

SECONDARY DRINKING WATER STANDARD means a standard which is not a primary standard, which applies to Public water systems, and specifies the maximum contaminant levels which, in the judgment of the Secretary, are requisite to protect the public welfare. Such standards may apply to any contaminant in drinking water which may:

(a) adversely affect the odor or appearance of such water and consequently may cause a substantial number of persons served by the Public water system providing such water to discontinue its use, or
(b) otherwise adversely affect the public welfare.

SECRETARY means the Secretary of the Agency of Natural Resources or the Secretary's designee.

SERVICE CONNECTION means each single family home, each living unit within a condominium, single rental unit, mobile home, store, or other commercial, educational, or industrial establishment, or other living unit which obtains water from a water system.

SHALL means that the person or system designated must comply with the associated action verb or be subject to enforcement action (see SHOULD).

SHOULD means that compliance with the associated action verb is recommended, but not required and that no enforcement action will follow (see SHALL).

SOURCE PROTECTION AREA means a PUBLIC WATER SOURCE PROTECTION AREA (see above).

SPRING means a groundwater source entirely dependent on gravity to move water from the source to the distribution system.

SURFACE WATER (for purposes of determining isolation distance from a groundwater source under Subsection 3.5.8) means any body of surface water including rivers, streams, creeks, brooks, reservoirs, natural or artificial ponds, lakes, swamps and marshes which have discernible edges and in which terrestrial vegetation does not grow.

TURBIDITY UNIT (TU) means the unit of measurement of particulate matter in a water sample based upon a comparison of the intensity of light scattered by the sample under defined conditions with intensity of light scattered by a standard reference suspension under the same conditions.

UNCERTIFIED ON-SITE PERSONELL means any person who performs activities or tasks related to water system operation but does not hold a valid certification from the State of Vermont or holds a certification lower than what is required for the subject water system. This individual is performing activities under the direction and certification of the Designated Certified Operator. This person may not make process control/system integrity decisions about water quality and quantity that may affect public health.

VERMONT HEALTH ADVISORY LEVEL means the concentration of a substance in drinking water below which the water does not pose a public health risk, or public health hazard as defined in 18 V.S.A. Chapter 1, and for which there is no Maximum Contaminant Level identified in this rule.

VIRUS means a virus of fecal origin which is infectious to humans by waterborne transmission.

VULNERABLE means a Public water system, or source, which is at risk of contamination by a constituent or constituents because of known conditions in the water system, geologic setting, or land uses in the source protection area.

WATER SUPPLIER means any person who owns or operates a Public water system or who provides or sells bottled or bulk drinking water.

WATER VENDING MACHINE shall mean a water-connected vending machine designed to dispense drinking water, and to reduce or remove turbidity, off-tastes and odors and to provide disinfection. Processes for dissolved solids reduction or removal may also be used.

WELL means any hole drilled, driven, bored, excavated, or created by similar method into the earth to locate, monitor, extract, or recharge groundwater where the water table or potentiometric surface is artificially lowered through pumping.

2.3 Abbreviations.

ANSI means the American National Standards Institute

API means the American Petroleum Institute

ASME means the American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASSE means the American Society of Sanitary Engineering

ASTM means the American Society for Testing Materials

AWWA means the American Water Works Association

BOCA means the Building Officials and Code Administration

CDC means the Center for Disease Control

CEUs means Continuing Education Units

CFR means Code of Federal Regulations

CT means "Concentration X Time" (see definition in 40 C.F.R. Subpart A)

DPD means N,N-diethyl-p-phenylenediamine or ferrous titrimetric

EPA means the Environmental Protection Agency, of the United States

GAC means Granular Activated Carbon

GMPRs means Good Manufacturing Practice Regulations

HAV means Hepatitis A Virus

NIOSH means National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

NSF means the National Sanitary Foundation

NTNC means Non-Transient Non-Community

MPA means Microscopic Particulate Analysis

MCL means Maximum Contaminant Level

MCLG means Maximum Contaminant Level Goal mg/l means milligram per liter

MRDL means Maximum Residual Disinfection Level

NTNCWS means Non-Transient Non-Community Water System

O& M means Operation and Maintenance

OIT means Operator-In-Training

OSHA means the Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PE means Professional Engineer ppm means parts per million

PSI means pounds per square inch.

PSOC means Potential Sources Of Contamination

PVC means Polyvinyl Chloride

ROW means Right Of Way

SMCL means Secondary Maximum Contaminant Level

SPA means Source Protection Area.

SPP means Source Protection Plan

TDS means Total Dissolved Solids

TNC means Transient Non-Community

TNCWS means Transient Non-Community Water System

TU means Turbidity Unit

ug/l means microgram per liter

USC means United State Code

USGS means the United States Geological Survey

UV means Ultraviolet

VOSHA means the Vermont Occupational Safety and Health Administration

VDH means the Vermont Department of Health

VHA means Vermont Health Advisory

VOC means Volatile Organic Chemicals

V.S.A. means Vermont Statute Annotated

Subchapter 21-3 PERMITS - ADMINISTRATION

Introduction

Unless otherwise stated below, this subchapter applies to the following water systems:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water systems; and
(d) Domestic and Imported Bottled water systems.

This subchapter applies to Source Permits, Construction Permits, Operating Permits, and Approvals to Sell Bottled Water in Vermont. Operating Permits consist of Operating Permits.

This subchapter applies to Source Permits for Public Community, Non-Transient Non-Community, and Domestic Bottled water systems.

3.0 Prohibitions.
3.0.1 No person shall modify, construct, or operate a Public water system without first obtaining the appropriate permit from the Secretary.
3.0.2 No person shall modify or construct a new Public Community or Domestic Bottled water system source, change an existing water source into a Public Community or Domestic Bottled water system source, or operate a Public Community or Domestic Bottled water system source without first obtaining a permit from the Secretary.
3.0.3 No person shall use or connect an unpermitted water source, including an emergency source, to a Public Water System, except
(a) following public notice to the water system customers (according to Agency public notification requirements);
(b) providing notice to the Secretary as soon as possible, but no later than within 12 hours of its connection or use; and
(c) in an emergency situation for a limited duration, no more than 90 cumulative days without prior written approval of extension by the Secretary.
3.1 Permits.
3.1.1 The Secretary may issue, renew, deny, suspend, or revoke a Public water system or drinking water facility permit.

For Public Transient Non-Community water systems, Construction Permits and development of new drinking water sources are administered by the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division.

3.1.2 For each application for a new source for a Public Community, Domestic Bottled, or a Public NonTransient Non-Community water system, the Secretary shall provide notice and opportunity for hearing or written comment, or both, in accordance with 10 V.S.A., § 1675.
3.2 Suspension or Revocation of Permit.
3.2.1 Any permit issued under these regulations may be suspended or revoked if the Secretary finds that the Public water system or drinking water facility is maintained or operated in violation of this rule or of any law, rule, order, ordinance or regulation applicable thereto, or is in violation of the conditions stated in the permit, or that the water supplier has submitted false or misleading information to the Secretary.
3.2.2 The Secretary shall comply with 10 V.S.A., § 1675 and 3 V.S.A. § 814 prior to revocation or suspension of a permit.
3.2.3 When a permit has been denied, suspended or revoked, emergency orders to protect the users may be issued and remain in effect until the operating permit is validated.
3.3 Emergency Permits to Construct.
3.3.1 The Secretary may issue an emergency permit to construct for modifications to a water system needed to address an exceedance of a maximum contaminant level pursuant to a Secretary-approved emergency response plan.
3.3.2 Emergency permits to construct shall be limited to authorizing measures identified in a Secretary-approved emergency response plan.
3.3.3 Emergency permits to construct shall be issued for not more than 180 days and may be renewed.
3.3.4 Emergency permits to construct shall follow the process for public notice and involvement established under 10 V.S.A. § 7716 (Type 5).
3.4 Appeals.
3.4.1 Final decisions made by the Secretary regarding permit issuance, renewal, denial, revocation, and suspension, for Public water systems, may be appealed formally as provided by 10 V.S.A., § 1680 (or 10 V.S.A., § 1977 for Non-Public water systems).
3.5 Transfer or Assignment of Permits.
3.5.1 Operating Permits (see Subchapter 21-5), Source Permits, and Public Community, Non-Transient Non-Community, Domestic Bottled and Transient Non-Community Water System Construction Permits are not transferable or assignable and shall automatically become invalid upon a change of ownership or upon suspension or revocation. A new owner shall obtain a new permit prior to operation of the water system.
3.6 Requirements of Other Statutes and Permitting Authorities.

A permit issued under this rule allows specific actions by the permittee. However, it does not relieve the permittee of obligations he or she may have under other statutes, regulations or permitting authorities including but not limited to Act 250, Agency of Natural Resources, Department of Public Safety, Department of Agriculture, Food and Markets, Department of Education, Public Service Board, Agency of Human Services, and Department of Public Service.

3.7 Variances from Technical Standards.
3.7.1 General

A request for approval of alternatives to the requirements of the Vermont Standards for Water System Design, Construction and Protection (Appendix A) shall be filed in writing. The application for a variance shall state the manner in which the proposed system or design varies from the specified criteria of these standards, and a basis for finding that the proposal meets the criteria set forth in Subsection 3.7.2 below. Requests for approval under this section shall be reviewed by the Secretary within 30 days of application.

For Public Transient Non-Community Construction Permits, variances may only be issued under the criterion in Subsection 3.7.2(e), below.

The Secretary shall maintain a file available to the public of all decisions issued under this section.

3.7.2 Variances Criteria

The Secretary may permit an alternative to the requirements of the standards in Appendix A upon finding that:

(a) The proposal is designed to achieve the purpose of the standards as set forth in Section 1.2;
(b) The proposed design is based on established engineering and/or hydrogeologic principles and can be expected to perform at the same level of reliability and health protection as the design criteria and standards included in this rule;
(c) The proposed project will comply with all drinking water quality standards and not create a public health hazard or significant risk;
(d) The public and persons using the water system are protected from health hazards, health risks, pollution and increased costs in the event that the proposed alternative does not meet the purpose of this rule; and
(e) In the case of remediation of existing health hazards, the proposal shall be in compliance, as closely as possible, with Appendix A of this rule, shall not be to accommodate new growth, and shall not violate drinking water quality standards.
3.7.3 Performance Security

The Secretary may require bonding or other security of an appropriate amount to ensure performance or replacement of any alternative in the event that it fails to meet the purpose of this rule. Security or bonding shall be established for a specified time period in each case.

3.7.4 Decision and Notice

The Secretary shall make the decision to allow or deny an alternate proposal in writing and shall state the reasons therefore. A copy of each decision granted or approved under this section shall be posted for at least one month in the offices of the municipalities in which the project is located. Additionally, public notification to the users of the system shall be made in accordance with the provisions of Subchapter 2110.

3.8 Petition for Declaratory Ruling.

On petition of a person who may be affected by a statute or rule administered by the Agency, the Secretary shall issue a declaratory ruling as to the applicability of any statutory provision or any rule as provided for in 3 V.S.A. § 808.

3.9 Compliance with Permits.

The Secretary may issue a permit to the applicant subject to the conditions consistent with the purposes of this rule. No person shall proceed with a construction project except in accordance with the terms and conditions of the permit.

Subchapter 21-4 SOURCE and CONSTRUCTION PERMITS

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water systems:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water systems; and
(d) Domestic Bottled water systems.
4.0 General.

Source permits for Public Community and Domestic Bottled water systems shall be governed by Section 4.1 of this subchapter, and the requirements of Appendix A, Part 3. Source permits for Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems shall be governed by Appendix A Part 11.

Construction permits for, or improvements to, Public Community and Domestic Bottled water systems shall be governed by Section 4.2 of this subchapter, as well as the requirements of Appendix A, Parts 1 through 10, and 12.

Construction permits for Public Non-Transient Non-Community, and Public Transient Non-Community water systems shall be governed by Sections 4.2.4, and 4.2.8 of this subchapter and the requirements of Appendix A, Parts 11 and 12. For Public Non-Transient Non-Community and Public Transient NonCommunity water systems, some provisions of Parts 1-10 apply and are clearly noted in the text of Part 11 of Appendix A.

4.0.1 Prohibitions

No person shall begin construction of, alter, renovate, or convert for use as a Public water system, any system or any portion thereof, except as provided in Section 4.0.2 of this subchapter, without first receiving a Source Permit or Construction Permit from the Secretary.

4.0.2 Exemptions from Source and Construction Permits

No Construction Permit for Public water systems will be required for minor system improvements such as replacement of hydrants on existing distribution line(s), pipe extension projects of less than 500 feet, minor alterations or maintenance of an existing water system, and no source permit will be required for minor maintenance such as replacement of source pump or source structure repair, which would not in and of itself affect the quality or quantity of water service rendered, providing work is done according to the Vermont Standards for Water System Design, Construction and Protection (see Appendix A of this rule). It is recommended that the water supplier contact the Secretary for consultation on plans for minor improvements.

4.0.3 Applicability of Vermont Standards

In addition to meeting the applicable requirements of this rule, all water system changes including construction, alteration, renovation, installation, extension and/or connection after the date this rule become effective shall conform to the Vermont Standards for Water System Design, Construction and Protection in Appendix A.

4.1 Source Permits.
4.1.0.1 Application Requirements
(a) Source Permits are required for new Public water systems and Domestic Bottled water system sources and an increase in approved yield of existing Public and Bottled water system sources, including but not limited to hydrofracturing and deepening of sources and other methods determined by the Secretary to impact quantity or quality of the well.
(b) General procedural requirements for Public Community and Domestic Bottled water system Source Permits are outlined in subsection 4.1.1 below. Technical requirements for surface water are outlined in Appendix A, Subpart 3.2 and for groundwater in Appendix A, Subpart 3.3.
(c) General procedural requirements for Public Non-Transient Non-Community water system Source Permits are outlined in Appendix A Parts 11 and 12.
(d) Any permitted Public Community, Non-Community, or Domestic Bottled water source which has not been connected to the water system for a period of time greater than two years, may at the discretion of the Secretary, be required to obtain a valid Source Permit prior to connection of the source.
4.1.0.2 First-In-Time

For the purpose of determining first-in-time for rights to water source development or groundwater degradation, and to accommodate compatible land uses, the following shall be recognized as initiating a project:

(a) Submittal of a substantially complete application for approval of a drinking water source;
(b) Submittal of a substantially complete application for a building permit or sewage disposal permit for a non-state regulated project;
(c) Submittal of a substantially complete application for a State Permit to dispose, discharge, or use any substance which may affect water quality;
(d) Existing land and groundwater uses; or
(e) Other state and local planning actions as reviewed on a case by case basis.
4.1.1 Water System Source Permit Process And General Requirements

The Secretary uses a step-by-step process culminating in the permitting of a Public Community and Domestic Bottled water source. No Source Permit or Construction Permit will be issued until all of the Secretary's concerns are addressed.

Applicants for a Source Permit shall apply for and receive, as appropriate:

(a) Source Construction approval;
(b) Source Testing approval; and
(c) Source Evaluation Report approval.
4.1.1.1 Step 1. Source Permit Application

Application Form

The purpose of the Source Permit Application is to record information required to determine whether the site at the proposed location is suitable for source construction.

Applications for a Source Permit shall be submitted on forms provided by the Secretary that request information such as maps indicating source locations, nearby land use activities, project plans, and property ownership.

4.1.1.2 Step 2. Site Inspection

A site inspection shall be conducted by the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division, along with the applicant and/or consultants.

4.1.1.3 Step 3. Source Application Public Notice and Source Construction
(a) For site(s) approved by the Secretary, and prior to construction of source, the applicant shall provide the Secretary with certification that all landowners adjoining the parcel containing the proposed source have been notified of the proposed source. Certification shall be provided prior to receiving source construction approval.

The Secretary shall give public notice for each proposed public water source by publication in a newspaper of general circulation for the area containing the proposed system and by posting a notice in the clerk's office for the municipality containing the proposed source. The Secretary shall provide an opportunity for written comment or a public hearing, or both, on the application before ruling on the application.

(b) The Secretary will review his or her findings and write a review letter requesting more information, or one of site approval, conditional approval, or denial of approval for the proposed site.
(c) Source Construction approval shall be valid for two years and may be renewed upon written request by the applicant at the discretion of the Secretary.
(d) The applicant may then construct the proposed source per the Secretary's approved plans.
4.1.1.4 Step 4. Source Testing Application/Source Testing

The purpose of the source testing application is to provide the applicant and Secretary with a review of the information needed to determine that the testing and data to be collected will address the concerns of the Secretary with respect to source yield, quality, site, interference/allocation, source protection area delineation, ground water under the direct influence of surface water, and the risk from potential sources of contamination.

(a) Applications for Source Testing approval shall be submitted on a form provided by the Secretary. The form will request information regarding the source, such as pump test specifications, data collection, and other water uses in the area.
(b) The Secretary will review a completed application and write a letter of approval, conditional approval, or denial.
(c) Source Testing approval shall be valid for two years and may be renewed upon written request of the applicant at the discretion of the Secretary.
4.1.1.5 Step 5. Source Evaluation Report

Source evaluation reports must be prepared under the supervision of a hydrogeologist or engineer, knowledgeable in the field of well hydraulics and contaminant hydrogeology. Each report must consider and comment on the following:

(a) Site isolation zone, ownership and/or easements;
(b) Water Quality Results for the primary and secondary contaminants contained in Table 6-1 and Table 62 (Appendix A Subpart 3.2.4 includes information about additional monitoring that may be required);
(c) Water Quantity (See Appendix A, subparts 3.2.3 and 3.3.3);
(d) Source construction, as built engineering plans shall be included;
(e) Interference with other water supply withdrawals as appropriate;
(f) Source Protection Area and Protection Plan (See Subchapter 21-16);
(g) Agricultural lands in source protection area; and
(h) Additional studies as required by the Secretary.
(i) For pumped groundwater sources the report shall include but not be limited to the following:
(1) A summary of the test design, test method, problems encountered, analysis used, and detailed hydrogeologic setting. Include a drawdown/discharge vs. discharge graph (Sw/Q vs Q) and evaluation of step test data using published methodologies acceptable to the Secretary.
(2) Published analytical method or any preapproved proprietary method proposed by the consultant and approved by the Secretary for safe yield appropriate to the hydrogeologic setting based on data collected from the constant discharge and recovery tests. Rationale for choice of analytical method.
(3) All calculations used in the determination of source yields, source protection areas, and interference with other source withdrawals.
(4) Plots of time drawdown data on log-log or semi-logarithmic paper for source yield tests.
(5) Plot of discharge vs time on the same semi-log plots of time vs drawdown for proposed production and observation wells. Plot of distance vs drawdown (if 2 or more observation wells are available).
(6) Plots of precipitation and temperature conditions occurring before, during, and after the testing, when appropriate.
(7) All raw data including drawdown, discharge, and recovery.
(8) A final source protection area delineated on a USGS topographic map or other base map as approved by the Secretary and include rationale, calculations and information specified in Appendix A, Subpart 3.3.6.2.
(9) Geologic cross sections and groundwater contour maps when data are available.
(10) Hydraulic information as requested on forms provided by the Secretary.
(11) Well Completion Report on Agency form.
(12) Calculations and tables of aquifer coefficients.
(13) Information as necessary to evaluate whether groundwater is under the direct influence of surface water. See Appendix A, Subpart 3.4.
(j) A source protection plan, including a contingency plan, for emergency actions in cases of loss of source use, See Subchapter 21-16.
4.1.1.6 Step 6. Source Protection Area Public Notice and Hearing

The Secretary shall give public notice of each proposed Public water source protection area by publication in a newspaper of general circulation for the area containing the proposed protection area and by causing a notice to be posted in the clerk's office for the municipality containing the proposed area. The Secretary shall also give notice to landowners within the source protection area and all appropriate officials of municipalities and state agencies. The Secretary shall provide an opportunity for written comment or a public hearing, or both, on the proposed area before designating the area.

4.1.1.7 Issuance of Source Permit
(a) Following the public comment period the Secretary will review a completed Source Evaluation Report and write either a Source Permit containing any required permit conditions or a letter of denial.
(b) If the Secretary finds there are agricultural lands in the Source Protection Area which are likely to affect the proposed source but not likely to constitute a public health hazard, the secretary shall require the applicant to certify in the permit that the proposed source will be abandoned, replaced or treated if it becomes contaminated by agricultural activities conducted on the agricultural lands.
(c) A Source Permit shall be valid for a period of two years and may be renewed upon written request of the applicant at the discretion of the Secretary if the source is not connected to the public water system.
(d) Once the permitted source is connected to the water system it shall then become a permitted component of the water system's infrastructure, and shall be referenced in the water system's Permit to Operate.
4.2 Construction Permits.
4.2.1 Application Requirements
(a) An application for a construction permit shall be made on an application form provided by the Secretary, signed by the applicant, and shall be accompanied by, but not limited to, maps and detailed plans and specifications of the Public water system prepared by or under the direction of a Registered Professional Engineer, other than exceptions as provided in Paragraph 4.0.2.
(b) Applications for permits to construct Public Non-Transient Non-Community and Public Transient NonCommunity water systems shall follow the requirements as described in Appendix A, Parts 11 and 12.
4.2.2 Long Range Plan and Engineer's Report

In addition to meeting applicable requirements of this rule, all new Public Community and Non-Transient Non-Community water systems shall submit a long range plan (including but not limited to managerial capacity and financial capacity criteria. See Appendix B) and an Engineer's Report (See Appendix A, Subpart 1.2). This plan and report must be approved by the Secretary and a determination made that the system has demonstrated capacity in accordance with Subchapter 21-15 and other applicable requirements prior to issuance of a construction permit.

4.2.3 Deviation from Approved Plans & Specifications

New water systems and modifications to water systems shall be constructed in accordance with the plans and specifications approved by the Secretary. Proposed deviations from the approved plans or specifications, operating units, the functioning of water treatment processes, or proposed change in the quality of the water to be delivered must be submitted in writing, except for minor field changes, for review and approval. A construction permit shall be obtained or amended by the Secretary before such changes are made.

4.2.4 Suspension and Revocation of Construction Permits

A construction permit may be suspended or revoked in accordance with Section 3.2 of this rule.

4.2.5 Site Restrictions

To the extent practicable, no new or expanded water system, or parts thereof, shall be located at a site which:

(a) is subject to adverse effects from potential sources of contamination;
(b) is subject to adverse effects from natural disasters; or
(c) is located within the floodplain of a 100 year flood (except for sources and water lines).
4.2.6 Permit Conditions

Construction permits issued under this rule may include, but shall not be limited to, conditions which:

(a) limit the duration of the permit;
(b) require construction in accordance with the approved plans;
(c) require observation of construction under the general supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer;
(d) require special studies or testing to evaluate risk of contamination;
(e) state that the permit is not transferable;
(f) require operation and maintenance manual, certified operator, and application for permit to operate before the system and/or its alterations and/or additions is placed in operation; and
(g) require submission of record drawings prior to obtaining an Operating Permit.
4.2.7 Term of Construction Permits

For Public Community, Public Non-Transient Non-Community, and Domestic Bottled water systems, a construction permit shall be valid for two years, and may be renewed at the discretion of the Secretary.

4.2.8 Avoidance of Public Health Hazard or Risk

A construction permit for a Public water system shall not be issued or renewed if the Secretary determines that operation of the system will constitute a public health hazard or public health risk.

4.2.9 Public Service Board

In cases where the Public Service Board has authority over a water system, a condition of any construction permit issued will require that the applicant receive a Certificate of Public Good (CPG) from the Board prior to commencing any construction. In the event that the CPG requires material modifications to the approved plans and specifications, the applicant must receive an amended construction permit from the Secretary before beginning construction.

Water systems under the jurisdiction of the Public Service Board are specified in 30 V.S.A., § 203(3), and are generally any system, not municipally owned, which sells water to one or more users. Applicants are encouraged to contact the clerk of the Public Service Board for additional information.

An applicant for a construction permit under this rule is responsible for timely application to the Public Service Board for its approval of the proposed water system and its rates.

Subchapter 21-5 OPERATING PERMITS

Introduction

This subchapter applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community water systems and
(d) Domestic Bottled water systems.
5.1 Prohibitions.

No person shall conduct, control, manage, operate or maintain a Public water system without first receiving from the Secretary an operating permit.

5.2 Posting of Permit.

The water supplier shall post the current and valid operating permit in a conspicuous place at the Public water system headquarters or Public water system treatment plant.

5.3 Operating Permits.
5.3.1 Application for an operating permit shall be submitted to the Secretary, signed by the owner and shall contain such information as may be requested by the Secretary to enable him or her to determine whether the facility and its operation will comply with this rule.
(a) Application for an operating permit for a Public water system shall be made at least 30 days before the actual operation of the Public water system is to begin.
(b) In the event of an intended change, or an actual change, in the ownership of a Public water system, a written application for an operating permit shall be made by the prospective owner at least 30 days before the proposed change or actual change, and where applicable, notification shall be made to the Public Service Board (see Sections 4.2.9 and 3.6 above).
(c) Applications for new Public water systems shall include appropriate documentation to verify compliance with the construction permit conditions for the water system.
5.3.2 An operating permit shall be valid for the period of time specified in the permit and may be amended by the Secretary to include new standards or requirements.
5.3.3 A Public water system operating permit shall only be issued or renewed upon a finding by the Secretary, included in the permit that operation of the system will comply with this Rule and will not constitute a public health hazard or significant public health risk. Such finding shall be based on a review of the application and other applicable information. The Secretary may exempt Public water systems, or portions of those systems, which were in existence prior to September 24, 1992, and which do not pose a significant public health risk, from Appendix A requirements.
5.3.4 The owner shall be the applicant for an operating permit or a temporary operating permit.
5.4 (Reserved).
5.5 Conditions.

Public water system operating permits issued under this rule may include, but shall not be limited to, conditions which:

(a) Require the construction, installation, operation and maintenance of any purification, disinfection or other water processing or treatment facility in accordance with this rule;
(b) Require notification of the characteristics of the water provided by the system to the public by letter, notice or other means deemed appropriate by the Secretary in accordance with Subchapter 21-10 of this rule;
(c) Limit the number of connections to the system where the water system is not suitable to serve future connections; factors limiting the number of connections to the system may include, but shall not be limited to:
(1) Inadequate water quantity to meet the demand of the water system as determined by the Secretary, in accordance with Appendix A of this rule;
(2) A water system operating without a permitted water source; or
(3) Repeated MCL violations.
(d) Limit maximum and daily output of the system or source.

The maximum daily output and average daily output of the system or source shall be determined by the Secretary during the source permitting process in accordance with Part 3 of Appendix A. Factors limiting the maximum and daily output of the system or source may include, but shall not be limited to:

(1) type of source;
(2) safe yield;
(3) potential or actual sources of contamination;
(4) construction limitations; or
(5) interference problems.
(e) Require the development and submission to the Secretary of a long range plan for expansion, capital improvement and future service area including items contained in Appendix B.
(f) Contain any additional conditions, requirements, schedules, restrictions, monitoring or testing programs which are deemed necessary to assure compliance with this rule, or to prevent risk to public health.
(g) Require the submission of reports on the attainment of milestones established within the permit to the Secretary within fifteen (15) days after the required completion date of the milestone, signifying it has been attained. If the milestone has not been attained, the submission shall document the reasons for nonattainment and shall request in writing that the Secretary amend the permit. The Secretary shall review the permit and reasons given for non-attainment and may amend the permit or proceed with enforcement action against the Public water system.
(h) Require the development, submission to the Secretary, and implementation of a water conservation plan as outlined in Appendix B.
(i) Require the development, submission to the Secretary, and implementation of a Source Protection Plan as outlined in Subchapter 21-16.
(j) Require the payment of permit fees.
Subchapter 21-6 DRINKING WATER QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Introduction

This subchapter applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water systems; and
(d) Domestic and Imported Bottled water systems.
6.1 General Requirements.
6.1.1 Public water systems (except as provided by Subsection 6.1.4) shall comply with the maximum contaminant levels (MCLS), maximum residual disinfectant levels (MRDLs), monitoring requirements, routine sampling and repeat sampling requirements, treatment techniques, reporting requirements and public notification requirements for microbiological, inorganic chemical, organic chemical, radiological, and disinfection byproduct contaminants established in this subchapter, Subchapter 21-11, and in 40 CFR, Parts 141 and 143. The monitoring requirements in this subchapter and Subchapter 21-11 are minimums. Additional monitoring may be required by the Secretary to insure protection of public health and welfare. Water suppliers are encouraged to comply with Maximum Contaminant Level Goals where they have been established (see Section 6.14). The Secretary may grant exemptions to the required monitoring for Public water systems which purchase their source water from other permitted systems.
6.1.2 Samples required in this subchapter shall be collected, transported, and analyzed according to methods approved by the Vermont Commissioner of Health, EPA's approved test methods in 40 CFR Part 141, and the methods identified in Section 6.17. The analyses shall be done only by the Vermont Department of Health laboratory or by other laboratories certified by the Vermont Department of Health, except that
(a) turbidity, chlorine, daily fluoride monitoring, corrosion control chemicals, color, specific conductance, temperature, residual disinfectant concentration, and pH as required by this subchapter, may be tested by certified water system operators;
(b) Imported Bottled water systems located in the United States may submit results from laboratories inside that United States that are certified by the primacy agent for the EPA Public Water System Supervision Program in that state or accredited by a state or an authority recognized by the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program; or located outside the United States may submit results from laboratories outside the United States that are certified by the appropriate national, regional or provincial governing agent; and
(c) Analysis of samples taken in compliance with Section 6.18 shall only be conducted by laboratories that have been certified by the Vermont Department of Health to analyze samples for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA pursuant to EPA Method 537.1, or an alternative method authorized by the Secretary pursuant to Section 6.17.2, and to report results at the minimum reporting level of 0.000002 mg/L.
6.1.3 Approved analytical requirements for contaminants are established in 40 CFR, Part 141, except the approved analytical requirements for PFHxS, PFHpA, PENA, PFOS, and PFOA, which is established in Section 6.17. The Vermont Commissioner of Health, with the concurrence of the US Environmental Protection Agency, may approve any alternate analytical technique which is substantially equivalent in both precision and accuracy to any method specified in 40 CFR, Part 141 or Section 6.17.
6.1.4 Public water systems, except Imported Bottled water systems, shall comply with the sampling requirements established in this section and in 40 CFR, Part 141 unless a waiver has been granted in writing by the Secretary. Waiver of sampling requirements may be for specified contaminants and may be based on a Source Protection Plan which includes a vulnerability assessment, a susceptibility assessment, and the analytical results of previous sampling and waivers will be consistent with the waiver criteria specified in 40 CFR Parts 141 and 142.
6.1.5 Public water systems, except Imported Bottled water systems, are required to sample and report on source water quality as part of the Source Permit process in Appendix A Part 3.
6.1.6 Community and Non-Transient Non-Community and Domestic Bottled water systems shall monitor for the contaminants as noted in Tables 6-1 and 6-2 of this section. Transient Non-Community water systems shall monitor for the contaminants listed, in Tables A11-5 and A11-6 in Appendix A, Part 11.
6.1.7 Notwithstanding the reference to "all Public water systems" or "public water systems" in Sections 6.2, 6.3, and 6.5 through 6.11, Sections 6.2, 6.3, and 6.5 through 6.11 do not apply to Imported Bottled water systems. Subchapter 21-11 establishes the monitoring requirements for Imported Bottled water systems.
6.1.8 When applying Sections to 6.6, 6.8, 6.9, and 6.10 to Domestic Bottled water systems, the sampling location of "entry point to the distribution system" shall mean the following locations: locations representative of each source prior to treatment and from each finished bottled water product type and package size.
6.1.8 When applying Sections to 6.2, 6.3, and 6.5 through 6.12 to Domestic Bottled water systems, sampling shall be at the frequency and number of samples identified in Table 62.
6.2 Filtration and Disinfection of Surface Waters and Groundwater under the Direct Influence of Surface Waters.
6.2.1 All Public water systems using surface water sources and groundwater sources under the direct influence of surface water (see definition in 40 CFR, § 141.2) must comply with the provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart H, Filtration and Disinfection.

Waivers of the requirements of this section may be granted by the Secretary, in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 6.2.2.

6.2.2 The requirements of Subsection 6.2.1, to filter surface water sources and groundwater sources under the direct influence of surface water, may be waived by the Secretary, after a review conducted in accordance with the provisions of 40 CFR, § 141 . 71, Criteria for Avoiding Filtration, and 10 V.S.A. Chapter 56, as amended.
6.2.2.1 The Secretary shall review each application for a construction grant under 10 V.S.A., § 1624 to determine whether the project qualifies for an avoidance of filtration waiver and shall notify the applicant of the results of that review. The applicant shall be afforded the opportunity to submit information in support of a positive finding. Criteria for evaluation under this subsection shall not prohibit human activity within the watershed of the source, provided that such human activity does not constitute a public health hazard or a significant public health risk.
6.2.2.2 The Secretary shall grant an avoidance of filtration waiver to a Public water system when an applicant demonstrates that the water system has a proven record of delivering adequate quantities of clean and safe drinking water, and that adequate protection of the surface water source is or may be assured. An applicant under this section should contact the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division for guidance on the demonstrations required in this section.
6.2.2.3 Public water systems must comply with 40 CFR, § 141. 71(a) for bacteria coliform concentrations; 40 CFR, § 141 . 71 (a)(2) for turbidity; and with the provisions of 40 CFR, § 141. 71 (b) for site-specific conditions, in order to avoid the filtration requirements of Subsection 6.2.1.
6.2.2.4 If the Secretary denies an application for avoidance from the requirement to filter surface water, the owner of the water system may appeal the decision to the Water Resources Board within 30 days of such decision.
6.2.3 All Public water systems using a groundwater source and any new proposed groundwater sources must obtain a determination by the Secretary as to whether the groundwater source is under the direct influence of surface water.

The Secretary, when making the determination under this subsection, will use the criteria established under the provisions of 40 CFR, § 142.16 as set out in Appendix A, Subpart 3.4.

All water systems using groundwater sources shall provide the Secretary information necessary to determine whether a source is under the direct influence of surface water.

6.3 Enhanced Filtration and Disinfection.

Public water systems that use surface water or groundwater under the direct influence of surface water and serve 10,000 people or more shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart P -Enhanced Filtration and Disinfection. See Subsection 7.9 for Composite Correction Program requirements.

All Public water systems that use surface water or ground water that is under the direct influence of surface water shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR, Subpart T Sections 141.500-571 and Subpart W Sections 141.700-723. The purpose of the Long Term 2 Enhanced Surface Water Treatment (LT2) rule is to reduce disease incidence associated with Cryptosporidium and other pathogenic microorganisms in drinking water.

6.4 Disinfectant and Disinfection Byproduct Monitoring Requirements and Treatment Requirements for Control of Disinfection Byproduct Precursors.

Public Community and Non-Transient Non-Community water systems which add a chemical disinfectant to the water in any part of the drinking water treatment process shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart L Section 141 . 130-135, Disinfectant Residuals, Disinfection Byproducts, and Disinfection Byproduct Precursors and Subpart G - National Primary Drinking Water Regulations: Maximum Contaminant Levels and Maximum Residual Disinfectant Levels.

The Stage 2 Disinfection Byproduct (DBP) rule applies to Public Community and Non-Transient NonCommunity water systems that add and/or deliver water that is treated with a primary or residual disinfectant other than ultraviolet light. These systems shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR Part 141, Subpart U Section 141.600-605 and Subpart V Section 141.620-629. The Stage 2 DBP rule builds upon earlier rules that addressed disinfection byproducts to improve drinking water quality and provide additional public health protection from disinfection byproducts.

6.5 Lead and Copper.

All Public water systems, except Domestic Bottled water systems, shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart I, Control of Lead and Copper, including Section 141.80-91.

6.6 Bacteriological Monitoring Requirements.
6.6.1 All Public water systems shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart Y Revised Total Coliform Rule including § 141.851-861 except as identified in Sections 6.6.2.1 and 6.6.2.2 below.
a) All public water systems shall maintain documentation of personnel performing sampling, monitoring, and site assessments, including, as a minimum, the name and qualifications of the personnel.
b) All plans, procedures, proposed schedules, and requests shall be submitted in writing to the Secretary. For a request, the system shall state the request and basis for the request and include any supporting documentation.
6.6.2 All Public water systems shall conduct coliform sampling in accordance with 40 CFR, § 141.853 General monitoring requirements for all public water systems.
6.6.2.1 Routine monitoring required for all Public systems. All Public systems shall collect the number of routine samples based on their respective populations as identified in Appendix C. Reduced monitoring shall not be permissible at any public drinking water system.: Baseline Monitoring frequency shall be established as follows:
a) Community Systems shall collect routine samples on a monthly frequency;
b) Seasonal Systems shall collect routine samples on a monthly frequency the months in which they are in operation;
c) All systems using surface water as a source shall sample on a monthly frequency;
d) All Non-community systems serving over 1,000 users in population, regardless of source type, shall sample on a monthly frequency.
e) All non-community systems, using only groundwater, operational year-round, and serving 1,000 or fewer users shall collect routine samples on a quarterly frequency unless and until triggering increases monitoring as identified in 40 CFR § 141.854.
6.6.2.2. Repeat Sampling: Repeat sampling under 40 CFR 141.858 directs water systems to collect repeat samples within 24 hours of notification of a total coliform or E. coli present sample. The system shall, on the same day, collect no fewer than three repeat samples for each total coliform-positive sample found.
a) Should a routine sample result show the presence of E. coli, the water system shall collect repeat samples within 24 hours of being notified of the result. If the system is unable to collect repeat samples within 24 hours of being informed of the result, it shall implement a boil water notice until the system receives results of the repeat samples and documents that all repeat sample results are total coliform absent. Repeat samples shall be collected pursuant to the same procedures and notification requirements under 40 CFR 141.858f the system violates the E. coli MCL under 40 CFR 141.860, the system must update the boil water notice to inform users of violation of the E. coli MCL, complete a Level 2 site assessment, address all sanitary defects identified, and collect the necessary number of samples required to lift the boil water notice based on the total water system population as identified in Appendix C.
b) Should a routine sample show only the presence of total coliform (E. coli absent), the twenty-four hour time limit to collect repeat samples may be extended to seven days from the date of notification of the total coliform positive sample (E. coli absent) when one or more of the following conditions beyond the control of the public water system prevent it from complying:
(i) Collection of samples within twenty-four hours would result in the holding time being exceeded before analysis is started due to limited delivery or courier service or a laboratory not being open.
(ii) Sample bottles could not be obtained due to certified laboratories being closed on a weekend or holiday.
(iii) Extreme weather conditions create unsafe travel or on-site conditions for the person collecting the samples.
c) Upon a request from a public water system, the Secretary may extend the twenty-four- hour limit on a case-by-case basis when the public water system has a logistical problem collecting the repeat samples within twenty-four hours other than those specified in this paragraph or when one or more of the conditions in paragraph (b) above create an unavoidable delay longer than seven days. When an extension is granted by the Secretary, the Secretary shall specify and document how much time the public water system has to collect repeat samples.
d) Results of all routine and repeat samples taken under 6.6.2.2 not invalidated by the State must be used to determine whether a coliform treatment technique trigger specified in 40 CFR 141.859 has been exceeded.
6.6.2.3 Upon triggering monthly monitoring under 6.6.2.1.e above, to return to quarterly monitoring, the groundwater, non-community system, serving under 1,000 in population, on a year-round basis shall:
(a) complete a sanitary survey or voluntary Level 2 Site Assessment by the State or a party approved by the State;
(b) be free of sanitary defects;
(c) have a protected source; and
(d) have a clean compliance history for the previous 12 consecutive months.
6.6.3 Seasonal water systems shall:
(a) conduct coliform sampling in the months in which the systems serves water to a public population.
(b) complete the seasonal startup form and certification regardless of whether the system remains pressurized in the off season.
(c) submit completed start up certification form within 10 days of the end of the month in which the system opens to the public.
(d) collect a routine monthly coliform sample within the first month in which they open.
6.6.4 All public water systems shall have a coliform sample siting plan that identifies sampling locations and schedules representative of the water in the distribution system. These plans shall be on a form provided by the Secretary and shall be subject to review and approval by the Secretary. Sample siting plans shall be reviewed during each sanitary survey, following water system upgrades that the Secretary identifies as impacting the sampling locations or adequate water system representation, following changes in water quality or system hydraulics, or otherwise at the discretion of the Secretary. Sample siting plans and adequacy of existing sampling locations shall be reviewed as part of the Level 1 and Level 2 Site Assessments.
6.6.4.1 Special Monitoring Evaluation: Sanitary Surveys are performed at Community systems within every 3 years and every 5 years at NTNC and TNC systems. During sanitary surveys, regardless of system size, staff shall review the sample siting plan and sampling locations to ensure the plan accurately reflects the distribution system. Staff shall ask to visit or view at least one of the sampling locations, if not more, based on availability and feasibility, to ensure the sanitary integrity is not suspect and to ensure adequate representation. Rule management staff shall perform a compliance review and consultation to confirm the system is sampling according to the minimum required frequency.
6.6.5 Site assessments and Sanitary Defects:
6.6.5.1 Level 1 Site Assessments require a completed state-generated form and a validly-certified drinking water system operator of the same class as or greater class than the water system shall conduct the assessment.
6.6.5.2 Level 2 site assessments require the completion of a state-generated form and the State or a State-approved party shall complete the assessment.
6.6.5.3 Sanitary defects are anything that can allow contamination into the water system or that identify an imminent failure of an existing barrier.
6.6.5.4
a) Consultation with the State for Level 1 Site Assessments:

Systems shall complete the assessment and submit the form within 30 days. These are completed by any certified operator of the same class of the system or greater. The forms have contact phone numbers for Division staff to assist in the process if the system has questions while performing the assessment.. Systems must seek an extension in writing, using the Level 1 form if additional time is required for the assessment. Staff will follow-up with the necessary system personnel after manually reviewing the form if there is need for discussion.

b) Level 2:

Level 2 site assessments are conducted by trained individuals or Division staff. The forms have contact phone numbers for Division staff to assist in the process if the system has questions while performing the assessment. Systems must seek an extension in writing, using the water system portion of the Level 2 form if additional time is required for the assessment.

Staff will follow-up with the necessary system personnel after manually reviewing the form if there is need for discussion.

6.6.4 All Public water systems that use groundwater, except public water systems that combine all of their ground water with surface or with ground water under the direct influence of surface water prior to treatment under Subpart H, must comply with the provisions of the Ground Water Rule 40 CFR Subpart S, Sections 141.400-141.405. For the purposes of this subpart, "ground water system" is defined as any public water system meeting this applicability statement, including consecutive systems receiving finished ground water.

The fecal indicator for all public water systems in Vermont shall be E.coli.

6.7 Turbidity Monitoring Requirements.
6.7.1 All Public water systems shall meet the turbidity monitoring requirements of 40 CFR, Sections 141.22 and 141.74.
6.7.2 A monthly turbidity monitoring report shall be submitted to the Secretary within ten days after the end of the month (See Subchapter 21-9).
6.8 Inorganic Chemical Monitoring Requirements.
6.8.1 All Public water systems shall conduct inorganic chemical monitoring in accordance with 40 CFR § 141.23, Inorganic Chemical Sampling and Analytical Requirements. Compliance with the MCL for arsenic shall be determined by the methods described in 40 CFR 141.23.
6.9 Organic Monitoring Requirements.

All Public water systems shall conduct organic chemical monitoring in accordance with 40 CFR § 141.24, Organic Chemical, Sampling and Analytical Requirements.

6.10 Radionuclide Monitoring Requirements.

All Public water systems shall conduct radionuclide monitoring in accordance with 40 CFR, § 141.26, Monitoring Frequency for Radioactivity in Community water systems.

6.11 Recycle Provisions.

All Public water systems using surface water sources and groundwater sources under the direct influence of surface water (see definition in 40 CFR, § 141.2) must comply with the provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart H, Recycle Provisions.

6.12 Maximum Contaminant Levels.

The Maximum Contaminant Levels and Maximum Residual Disinfectant Levels of 40 CFR Part 141 are adopted herein. The Secretary, with the concurrence of the Vermont Commissioner of Health, has established a more stringent MCL for uranium (listed in Table 6-1) than published in 40 CFR, Part 141. The Secretary has also adopted the Vermont Department of Health's Health Advisory for Nickel as an MCL and the Vermont Department of Health's Health Advisory for five per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA) as a cumulative (sum of all 5 analyte results) MCL.

Table 6-1 summarizes the contaminants and the maximum contaminant level (MCL) and maximum residual disinfectant level (MRDL) standards which apply to Public water systems. If any discrepancy exists between the values in Table 6-1, with the exception of nickel, uranium, PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA, and the referenced sections in 40 CFR, Part 141, the MCLs in 40 CFR, Part 141 shall apply.

Table 6-1 also summarizes the maximum contaminant level goals (MCLG) and the maximum residual disinfection level goals (MRDLG) which apply to Public water systems. If any discrepancy exists between the values in Table 6-1, with the exception of nickel, and the referenced sections in 40 CFR, Part 141, the MCLGs and MRDLGs in 40 CFR, Part 141 shall apply.

The provisions of 40 CFR, Section 142.63, prohibiting variances and exemptions from the MCL for total coliform, is adopted herein.

Table 6-1 -CONTAMINANT STANDARDS

CONTAMINANT

STANDARD MCL or MRDL as noted (mg/l unless otherwise noted)*

MCLG or MRDLG (as noted)

Initial Source Testing Required

1. Microbiological

MCL

MCLG

A. Total coliform bacteria

None

Zero (including fecal coliforms and Escherichia coli

Yes

B. Fecal Coliform or Escherichia coli (E. coli) repeat samples

When the system has an E. coli- positive repeat sample following a total-coliform routine sample; a total coliform- positive repeat sample following an E. coli-positive routine sample; the system fails to take all required repeat samples following an E. coli-positive routine sample; or the system fails to test for E. coli when any repeat sample tests positive for coliform

Zero

Yes

Giardia lamblia

----

zero

Only if MPA testing required

Viruses

---

zero

No

Legionella

---

zero

No

Cryptosporidium

---

zero

Only if MPA testing required

2. Turbidity

Yes

A. Unfiltered systems required to install filtration

See 40 CFR, $S141.13

---

---

B. Unfiltered systems that have been granted approval for avoiding filtration

See 40 CFR, $S141.71

---

---

C. Conventional, Direct, Slow Sand, Diatomaceous earth filtration and other filtration technologies

See 40 CFR, $S141.73

---

---

3. Primary Inorganic Chemicals

MCL

MCLG

Arsenic

0.010 mg/l

zero

Yes

Asbestos

7 million fibers/liter (longer than 10 um)

7 million fibers/liter (longer than 10 um)

No

Barium

2 mg/l

2 mg/l

Yes

Cadmium

0.005 mg/l

0.005 mg/l

Yes

Chromium

0.1 mg/l

0.1 mg/l

Yes

Copper

1.3 mg/l (Action Level)

1.3 mg/l

Yes

Fluoride

4.0 mg/l

4.0 mg/l

Yes

Lead

0.015 mg/l (Action Level)

zero

Yes

Mercury

0.002 mg/l

0.002 mg/l

Yes

Nitrate

10.0 (as Nitrogen)

10mg/l (as

Nitrogen)

Yes

Nitrite

1.0 (as Nitrogen)

1 mg/l (as Nitrogen)

Yes

Total nitrate & nitrite

10.0 (as Nitrogen)

10 mg/l (as Notrogen)

Yes

Selenium

0.05 mg/l

0.05 mg/l

Yes

Antimony

0.006 mg/l

0.006 mg/l

Yes

Beryllium

0.004 mg/l

0.004 mg/l

Yes

Cyanide (as free cyanide)

0.2 mg/l

0.2 mg/l

Yes

Nickel

0.1 mg/l

0.1 mg/l

Yes

Thallium

0.002 mg/l

0.0005 mg/l

Yes

4. Disinfection Byproducts

MCL

MCLG

Bromodichloromethane Dibromochloromethane Tribromethane

(Bromoform)

Trichloromethane

(Chloroform)

0.080 mg/l as the sum of all concentrations (Total Trihalomethanes):

0.080 mg/l

Zero

0.06 mg/l Zero

0.07 mg/l

No

Monochloroacetic acid

Dichloroacetic acid

Trichloroacetic acid

Monobromoacetic acid

Dibromoacetic acid

0.060 mg/l as the sum of all concentrations (Haloacetic acids

(five) HAA5)

0.07 mg/l Zero

0.02 mg/l No MCLG No MCLG

No

Bromate (systems treating with ozone)

0.010 mg/l

zero

No

Chlorite (systems treating with chlorine dioxide)

1.0 mg/l

0.8 mg/l

No

5. Disinfectant residuals

MRDL

MRDLG

Chlorine

4.0 mg/l (as Cl2)

4 mg/l (as Cl2)

No

Chloramines

4.0 mg/l (as Cl2)

4 mg/l (as Cl2)

No

Chlorine Dioxide

0.8 mg/l (as Cl2)

0.8 mg/l (as Cl2)

No

6. Volatile Organic Chemicals

MCL

MCLG

Vinyl Chloride

0.002 mg/l

zero

Yes

Benzene

0.005 mg/l

zero

Yes

Carbon Tetrachloride

0.005 mg/l

zero

Yes

1,2-Dichloroethane

0.005 mg/l

zero

Yes

Trichloroethylene

0.005 mg/l

zero

Yes

para-Dichlorobenzene

0.075 mg/l

0.075 mg/l

Yes

1,1-Dichlorethylene

0.007 mg/l

0.007 mg/l

Yes

1,1,1-Trichloroethane

0.2 mg/l

0.2 mg/l

Yes

cis-1,2-Dichloroethylene

0.07 mg/l

0.07 mg/l

Yes

1,2-Dichloropropane

0.005 mg/l

zero

Yes

Ethylbenzene

0.7 mg/l

0.7 mg/l

Yes

Monochlorobenzene

0.1 mg/l

0.1 mg/l

Yes

o-Dichlorobenzene

0.6 mg/l

0.6 mg/l

Yes

Styrene

0.1 mg/l

0.1 mg/l

Yes

Tetrachloroethylene

0.005 mg/l

zero

Yes

Toluene

1 mg/l

1 mg/l

Yes

trans-1,2-Dichloroethylene

0. 1 mg/l

0.1 mg/l

Yes

Xylenes (total)

10 mg/l

10 mg/l

Yes

Dichloromethane

0.005 mg/l

zero

Yes

1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene

0.07 mg/l

0.07 mg/l

Yes

1,1,2-Trichloroethane

0.005 mg/l

0.003 mg/l

Yes

7. Synthetic Organic Chemicals

MCL

MCLG

Alachlor

0.002 mg/l

zero

Yes

Atrazine

0.003 mg/l

0.003 mg/l

Yes

Carbofuran

0.04 mg/l

0.04 mg/l

Yes

Chlordane

0.002 mg/l

zero

Yes

Dibromochloropropane

0.0002 mg/l

zero

No

2,4-D

0.07 mg/l

0.07 mg/l

Yes

Ethylene Dibromide

0.00005 mg/l

zero

Yes only for groundwater sources

Heptachlor

0.0004 mg/l

zero

Yes

Heptachlor Epoxide

0.0002 mg/l

zero

Yes

Lindane

0.0002 mg/l

0.0002 mg/l

Yes

Methoxychlor

0.04 mg/l

0.04 mg/l

Yes

Polychlorinated biphenols

0.0005 mg/l

zero

Yes

Pentachlorophenol

0.001 mg/l

zero

Yes

Toxaphene

0.003 mg/l

zero

Yes

2,4,5-TP Silvex

0.05 mg/l

0.05 mg/l

Yes

Benzo$(a$)pyrene

0.0002 mg/l

zero

Yes

Dalapon

0.2 mg/l

0.2 mg/l

No

Di(2-ethylhexyl) adipate

0.4 mg/l

0.4 mg/l

Yes

Di(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate

0.006 mg/l

zero

Yes

Dinoseb

0.007 mg/l

0.007 mg/l

Yes

Diquat

0.02 mg/l

0.02 mg/l

No

Endothall

0.1 mg/l

0.1 mg/l

No

Endrin

0.002 mg/l

0.002 mg/l

Yes

Glyphosate

0.7 mg/l

0.05 mg/l

No

Hexachlorobenzene

0.001 mg/l

zero

Yes

Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

0.05 mg/l

0.05 mg/l

Yes

Oxamyl (Vydate)

0.2 mg/l

0.2 mg/l

Yes

Picloram

0.5 mg/l

0.5 mg/l

Yes

Simazine

0.004 mg/l

0.004 mg/l

Yes

2,3,7,8-TCDD (Dioxin)

3 x 10-8 mg/l

zero

No

8. Radionuclides

MCL

MCLG

Gross Alpha Particle

Activity (including radium226 but excluding radon and uranium)

15 pCi/l

zero

Yes

Combined Radium-226 and Radium-228

5 pCi/l2

zero

Yes

Uranium

20 ug/l

zero

Yes

Beta particle and photon radioactivity from manmade Radionuclides1

An annual dose equivalent to the total body or any internal organ greater than 4 millirem/year (mrem/year)3

zero

No

Gross Beta Activity1

50 pCi/l

---

No

Tritium1

20,000 pCi/l

---

No

Strontium-901

8 pCi/l5

---

No

8. Treatment Technique

MCLG

Acrylamide

----

zero

No

Epichlorohydrin

----

zero

No

9. Per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFAS)

Cumulative MCL

MCLG

Perfluorohexane sulfonic acid (PFHxS)

0.000020 mg/l6

zero

Yes

Perfluoroheptanoic acid (PFHpA)

0.000020 mg/l6

zero

Yes

Perfluorononanoic acid (PFNA)

0.000020 mg/l6

zero

Yes

Perfluorooctanesulfonic acid (PFOS)

0.000020 mg/l6

zero

Yes

Perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA)

0.000020 mg/l6

zero

Yes

* The conversion from mg/l to ug/l is 1 mg/l=1000 ug/l. As an example 5 mg/l is equal to 5000 ug/l. The conversion from mg/l to ng/l (ppt) is 1 mg/l =1,000,000 ng/l (ppt). As an example, 0.000020 mg/l is 20 ng/l. 20 ng/l is equivalent to 20 ppt.

1 Public Community Water Systems designated by the Secretary as vulnerable must sample for this contaminant

2 The combined radium-226 and radium-228 value is determined by the addition of the results of the analysis for radium-226 and radium 228.

3 See 40 CFR Section 141.66 for calculation of the MCL.

4 Average annual concentration assumed to produce a total body or organ doses of 4 mrem/yr. For tritium the critical organ is total body. See 40 CFR Section 141.66.

5 Average annual concentration assumed to produce a total body or organ doses of 4 mrem/yr. For strontium-90 the critical organ is bone marrow. See 40 CFR Section 141.66.

6 The MCL is 0.000020 mg/L for any combination of these PFAS: PFOA, PFOS, PFHxS, PFHpA, and PFNA.

Table 6-2 -DOMESTIC BOTTLED WATER MONITORING REQUIREMENTS

Category of Contaminant(1)

Sampling Frequency

Number of Samples

Source

Product

Microbiological

Total Coliform

Heterotrophic Plate Count (HPC)

Monthly(2)

Monthly(2)

1

1

4.

4

Primary Inorganic Chemicals (including lead and copper)

3 Years

1

1

Volatile Organic Chemicals

3 Years

1

1

Synthetic Organic Chemicals

3 Years

1

1

Per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFAS)

See $S 6.18

Radionuclides: Gross Alpha, Combined Radium 226 & 228, and Uranium

3 Years

1

1

Disinfectant By-products and Disinfectant Residual

According to 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart L

(1) See Table 6-1 for a detailed list of contaminants and associated MCLs and MRDLs.

(2) If bottling does not occur monthly, a letter must be submitted in place of the monthly sample to avoid receiving a monitoring violation.

6.13 Secondary Standards.
(a) All new Public Community, Domestic Bottled, and Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems shall initially monitor for the contaminants contained in Table 6-3 except for Aluminum, Copper, Fluoride, Foaming Agents, Silver, Sulfate, and Zinc. Proposed water systems with contaminants exceeding these values may be required to treat or abandon the source, at the discretion of the Secretary.
(b) Existing Public Community, Domestic Bottled, and Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems may be required to monitor and comply with the Secondary Standards contained in 40 CPR, Part 143 when the Secretary determines that monitoring and compliance is necessary to protect public welfare. When monitoring is required, the monitoring shall be conducted at every entry point to the water system's distribution system. Table 6-3 summarizes these secondary contaminants and the standards which apply to Public Community, Domestic Bottled, and Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems. If any discrepancy exists between the values in Table 6-3 with the exception of sodium and aluminum and the referenced sections in 40 CPR, Part 143, then the standards in 40 CPR, Part 143 shall apply.

Table 6-3

SECONDARY CONTAMINANT STANDARDS

CONTAMINANT

STANDARD

INITIAL SOURCE TESTING REQUIRED?

Aluminum

0.2 mg/l

No

Chloride

250 mg/l

Yes

Color

15 color units

Yes

Copper

1.0 mg/L

Yes as Primary Contaminant

Corrosivity

Non-corrosive (between +0.5 and -0.5 Langelier Saturation Index)

Yes

Fluoride

2.0 mg/L

Yes as Primary Contaminant

Foaming Agents

0.5 mg/l

No

Iron

0.3 mg/l

Yes

Manganese

0.05 mg/l

Yes

Odor

3 threshold odor number

Yes

pH

6.5-8.5

Yes

Silver

0.1 mg/l

No

Sodium

250 mg/l

Yes

Sulfate

250 mg/l

No

Total dissolved solids (TDS)

500 mg/l

Yes

Zinc

5 mg/l

No

(c) Existing Public Community and Non-Transient Non-Community water systems shall monitor for Iron and Manganese once every three years at every entry point to the distribution system. More frequent monitoring may be required when the Secretary determines it is necessary to protect public welfare or to ensure the efficacy of contaminant treatment techniques.
(d) Additional monitoring requirement for Public Transient Non-Community water Systems are contained in Appendix A Part 11.
6.14 Maximum Contaminant Level Goals (MCLGs).

The Maximum Contaminant Level Goals (MCLGs) contained in 40 CFR Part 141 are herein adopted (see Table 6-1 and Section 6.12). The MCLGs in the referenced sections of 40 CFR Part 141 shall apply throughout the entire Public water System.

A maximum contaminant level goal shall serve as the basis for design for any proposed treatment units using best available technology on existing water Systems and sources. Maximum contaminant level goals shall serve as the basis for design for new Public water Systems. Where feasible, new sources shall meet maximum contaminant level goals without treatment.

6.15 Health Advisories.

For contaminants which may be detected in a Public water System for which MCLs or MCLGs have not been adopted, and the Vermont Commissioner of Health has established a Vermont Health Advisory Level for it, the Secretary may adopt the Advisory Level as an MCL or MCLG.

6.16 Treatment Techniques.
6.16.1 All Public water Systems shall comply with the acrylamide and epichlorohydrin provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart K, Treatment Techniques.
6.17 Per- and Polyfluoroalkyl Substances Analytical Requirements.
6.17.1 The Secretary approves the following analytical requirements for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA samples.
6.17.2 Sample collection shall be conducted pursuant to EPA Method 537.1 or shall be conducted pursuant to a subsequently developed EPA-approved method for monitoring PF AS compounds in drinking water that the Secretary authorizes in writing for use by water systems.
6.17.3 Data shall be reported to the nearest 0. 000001 mg/L.
6.18 Per- and Polyfluoroalkyl Substances Monitoring Requirements.
6.18.1 Except as provided in Section 6.18.3, Public Community, Non-Transient Non-Community, and Domestic Bottled water systems shall conduct sampling for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA in accordance with this section to determine compliance with the maximum contaminant levels.
6.18.2 The Secretary may require Public Transient Non-Community water systems to conduct sampling for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA in accordance with this section when contamination is known or suspected of being present to ensure protection of public health and welfare.
6.18.3 Public water systems, except Domestic or Imported Bottled water systems and Public water systems that cross state or international boundaries, that do not have their own source are not required to monitor for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA.
6.18.4 Sampling sites for entry point monitoring for per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances
(1) Public water systems, except Domestic Bottled water systems, shall take a minimum of one sample at every entry point to the distribution system which is representative of each source after treatment.

If a system draws water from more than one source and the sources are combined before distribution, for that sampling site the system shall sample at an entry point to the distribution system where water is representative of all sources supplying the entry point.

(2) Domestic Bottled water systems shall take a minimum of one sample at locations representative of each source prior to treatment and one sample from each finished bottled water product type and package size.
(3) Composite sampling among multiple entry points to the distribution system shall not be used.
6.18.5 Frequency and timing of entry point monitoring for per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances
(1) Systems shall take one sample annually at each sampling site identified in Section 6.18.4.
(2) If annual monitoring results indicate no concentration above the reporting level of any combination of PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA at a sampling site identified in Section 6.18.4, then sampling shall be decreased to every three years (i.e., triennial sampling) at that sampling site.
(3) If two consecutive triennial monitoring results indicate no concentration above the reporting level of any combination of PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA at a sampling site identified in Section 6.18.4, then sampling shall be decreased to every six years at that sampling site.
(4) If any sampling results indicate a concentration above 15 ng/l of any combination of PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA at a sampling site identified in Section 6.18.4, then sampling shall be increased to quarterly at that sampling site, beginning in the next quarter.
(5) If four consecutive quarterly monitoring results demonstrate that concentrations are at or below 15 ng/l of any combination of PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA at a sampling site identified in Section 6.18.4, then monitoring shall be decreased to annual at that sampling site.
(6) If an analyte found in a sample is present in the field blank at a concentration greater than the reporting level, then all samples collected with the field blank are invalid and shall be recollected.
(7) If any sampling results indicate a concentration above 20 ng/l of any combination of PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA at any sampling site, an additional confirmation sample shall be collected from that sampling site as soon as possible after the initial sample but no later than 10 business days after receipt of the lab report by the system.
a. Each confirmation sample shall be accompanied by a field blank and a trip blank supplied by the laboratory at which the confirmation sample will be analyzed.
b. The confirmation sample shall be analyzed by the same analytical lab as was used for the original sample.
c. If re-collection of the initial sample is required pursuant to Section 6.18.5(6), a confirmation sample based on that invalid initial sample is not required.
d. Compliance with the MCL shall be determined pursuant to Section 6.18.6.
e. The Secretary may waive the requirement to take a confirmation sample during quarterly sampling subsequent to a sampling event when the system is out of compliance with the MCL for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA.
(8) Composite sampling shall not be used for confirmation samples.
6.18.6 Determination of compliance with the MCL for per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances
(1) A system is out of compliance with the MCL for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA if the average of the initial sample and confirmation sample is greater than the MCL at a sampling site identified in Section 6.18.4. If a system fails to collect the required number of samples, compliance (average concentration) shall be based on the total number of samples collected.
(2) Following a sampling event when a system is out of compliance with the MCL for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA, and while the system is conducting monitoring on a quarterly basis, the Secretary may determine that the system is in compliance with the MCL based on monitoring results received by the Secretary or a system may petition the Secretary to determine that they are in compliance with the MCL based on its monitoring results. The Secretary shall only determine that a system is in compliance with the MCL when the analytical results for the prior four consecutive quarters of monitoring are at or below the MCL and there is a stable or decreasing trend in the concentration of PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA.
6.18.7 Additional raw water monitoring requirements
(1) If an entry point to the distribution system is supplied by more than one source, and the concentration for any combination of PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA for a sample taken at the entry point is above 15 ng/l, a sample from the raw water sample tap shall be taken for each source supplying the entry point, or as directed by the Secretary. The raw water sample shall be taken within 30 days of receipt of the lab report by the system of the results of the entry point sample.
(2) The raw water monitoring data obtained pursuant to subsection (1) shall not be used to determine compliance with the MCL. The raw water monitoring data shall principally be used in the identification of remedy selection when non-compliance with the MCL has been identified pursuant to 6.18.6.
6.18.8 Emergency response plan for per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances
(1) Following a sampling event when a system is out of compliance with the MCL for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA, the system shall develop, and submit to the Secretary for approval, an emergency response plan that requires interim and long-term measures to address the exceedance of the MCL. The response measures can include, but are not limited to:
a. operational changes, such as discontinuing use of a contaminated source, using an alternative source (e.g., if there are at least two existing permitted source options), or water conservation;
b. drilling the existing well deeper;
c. if a second permitted source exists, blending;
d. construction or use of an emergency source or connection to another public water system if available;
e. point of use treatment or point of entry treatment managed and operated by the water system owner; and
f. centralized treatment.
Subchapter 21-7 FACILITY AND OPERATION REQUIREMENTS

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water Systems:

(a) Public Community water Systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water Systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water Systems; and
(d) Domestic Bottled water Systems.

The design, construction, installation, extension, modification, location, maintenance and operation of all Public water Systems and bottled water and bulk water plants or parts thereof shall comply with the requirements of this rule, Appendices A through D, and the relevant sections of 40 CFR, Part 141 as provided below.

7.1 Operation & Maintenance.
7.1.1 All Public water Systems except Transient Non-Community water Systems shall have an Operation and Maintenance Manual approved by the Secretary and shall be operated in a manner consistent with the approved Operation & Maintenance Manual (See Appendix D). Transient Non-Community water Systems with treatment are recommended to have an Operation and Maintenance Manual and to operate in accordance with it.
7.1.2 All water storage tanks shall be comprehensively inspected, inside and out, every 5 years, except for newly constructed, newly painted (inside), or newly reconditioned tanks (inside and outside), which shall be inspected within 10 years of service and every 5 years thereafter. The inspection of the outside of a buried or partially buried tank may be limited to exposed portions. The inspection, findings, and servicing documentation shall be retained in the water system's files for review upon request.
7.2 Disinfection.
7.2.1 Disinfection facilities are required of all Public Community and Non-Transient Non-Community water Systems. Public Community and Non-Transient Non-Community water Systems shall have the capability of continuous disinfection. Public water Systems shall conform to the disinfection provisions of 40 CFR, § 141.72. Disinfection shall be administered as described in Subpart 4.3 of Appendix A.
7.2.2 Continuously operating disinfection is required by the Secretary for all surface water sources and for groundwater sources under the direct influence of surface water. The Secretary may require intermittent or continuously operating disinfection for any other Public water system, when he or she determines it necessary for the protection of public health, including but not limited to sources determined to be vulnerable to pathogenic contamination (see Section 6.2).
7.2.3 Public water Systems which provide filtration must provide disinfection treatment as required by 40 CFR, § 141.72. Residual disinfectant concentration of the finished water shall be monitored as required by 40 CFR, § 141.74.
7.2.4 As also stated in Appendix A 5.2.2, all products or chemicals which may come in contact with water intended for use in a Public water System shall meet American National Standards Institute/NSF International Standards, specifically ANSI/NSF Standards 60 and 61.
7.2.5 Disinfection facilities are recommended for all Transient Non-Community water Systems.
7.3 Fluoridation.
7.3.1 Public water systems which add fluoride to drinking water for dental health purposes, in addition to complying with the maximum contaminant levels established in Subchapter 21-6, shall control the level of fluoride in accordance with current Centers for Disease Control and Prevention guidelines.
7.3.2 Water Systems that add fluoride shall test to determine the amount of fluoride in the finished water at least once per day, or more often if required by the Secretary.
(a) Residual testing equipment shall enable measurement of fluoride to the nearest 0.2 mg/l in the range from 0.0 mg/l to 4.0 mg/l.
(b) Analyses for fluoride residual shall be conducted in accordance with the analytical recommendations set forth in the latest edition of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, American Public Health Association, unless otherwise approved by the Secretary.
(c) Results of daily fluoride tests shall be reported to the Secretary in accordance with Subchapter 21-9.
7.3.3 Secondary Controls

Secondary control Systems for fluoride chemical feed devices shall be required by the Secretary as a means of reducing the possibility for overfeed or for pacing fluoride delivery to water flow. These may include flow or pressure switches or other devices.

7.4 Corrosion Control.
7.4.1 Public Community and Public Non-Transient Non-Community water Systems shall implement corrosion control programs in compliance with 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart I, Control of Lead and Copper.
7.5 Sanitary Surveys.
7.5.1 All Public water Systems must comply with the Sanitary Survey provisions of 40 CFR, § 141.21, 40 CFR § 141.401, 40 CFR § 141.536, 40 CFR § 141.711, 40 CFR § 141.716, and 40 CFR § 141.723.
7.6 Source Protection.
7.6.1 All Public Community, Domestic Bottled, and Public Non-Transient Non-Community water Systems shall have a Source Protection Plan approved by the Secretary and shall maintain the plan as required in Subchapter 21-16. Public Transient Non-Community water Systems are encouraged to develop and maintain a Source Protection Plan.
7.6.2 Standards and Criteria for Source Protection.

Standards and Criteria for Source Protection Plans covered under this subchapter shall follow the criteria and standards for source protection as set forth in Subchapter 21-16 and in the statutory requirements of 10 V.S.A., Chapter 56.

7.7 Adequate Water Supply Required.
7.7.1 A Public water System shall provide an adequate supply of potable water during average and peak user demand periods on a sustained basis to all users.
7.7.2 If a Public water System is unable to reliably and consistently produce an adequate supply of potable water from permitted non-emergency sources to meet normal and peak demands, the owner shall immediately begin planning for and implementing the development and connection of new permitted sources to meet average and peak user demands.
7.7.3 When user demand exceeds supply, the owner shall, on an emergency short-term basis, take appropriate action to reduce nonessential demand. Reduction of demand shall be considered as an emergency response achievable by directive from the water System to its users, which may include the implementation of water conservation practices and the prohibition of water use for nonessential purposes (e.g., lawns, gardens, vehicle washing).
7.7.4 When a water System does not have an adequate supply for its users, the Secretary may require the Public water System to supply potable water through other means, including but not limited to, bottled water, bulk water, and development of a new source, or to impose mandatory water conservation measures.
7.8 OSHA and VOSHA Compliance.

All Public water System facilities and operations shall comply with OSHA and VOSHA regulations, as applicable, including but not limited to confined space posting and entry requirements, chemical storage and handling, electrical safety, personal protective equipment, fall protection, lockout and tagout procedures, excavation safety, stairway and ladder safety, record keeping, reporting, and training. This section does not impose more stringent requirements than is independently imposed on water Systems by OSHA/VOSHA regulations.

7.9 Composite Correction Program Compliance.

The Secretary may require a Public water System to conduct a Composite Correction Program (CCP) and to require that the Public water system implement any follow-up recommendations that result as part of the CCP. The CCP consists of two elements-a Comprehensive Performance Evaluation (CPE) and Comprehensive Technical Assistance (CTA). A CPE is a thorough review and analysis of a plant's performance-based capabilities and associated administrative, operation and maintenance practices. It is conducted to identify factors that may be adversely impacting a plant's capability to achieve compliance and emphasizes approaches that can be implemented without significant capital improvements. A CTA is the performance improvement phase that is implemented if the CPE results indicate improved performance potential. During the CTA phase, the system must identify and systematically address plant-specific factors. The CTA is a combination of utilizing CPE results as a basis for follow-up, implementing process control priority-setting techniques and maintaining long-term involvement to systematically train staff and administrators.

Subchapter 21-8 CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water Systems:

(a) Public Community water Systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water Systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water Systems; and
(d) Domestic and Imported Bottled water Systems.
8.1 Cross Connections.
8.1.1 No physical connection, unless approved by the Secretary, shall be permitted between the distribution system of a Public or Non-Public water system and any pipes, pumps, hydrants, tanks or other water Systems whereby contaminated or polluted water or other contaminating substances may be discharged or drawn into the Public and Non-Public water system. Any physical connection with a non-potable source of water shall include an adequate backflow prevention device which meets the requirements of American Water Works Association Standards.
8.1.2 Where an investigation or inspection by a Public water system discloses that a cross connection exists, the water supplier shall take immediate action to completely eliminate the cross connection.
Subchapter 21-9 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS AND RECORD KEEPING

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water Systems:

(a) Public Community water Systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water Systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water Systems; and
(d) Domestic Bottled water Systems.
9.1 Reporting.
9.1.1 Except where a shorter period is specified in 40 CFR, Part 141 Subpart D, the water supplier shall report to the Secretary the results of any test measurement or analysis required by 40 CFR Part 141 or Section 6.18 within the first ten days following the month in which the result is received or the first ten days following the end of the required monitoring period as stipulated by the Secretary, whichever is shortest. Reporting shall be conducted in accordance with the applicable sections of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart D, Reporting and Record Keeping requirements. Additional reporting is required by Subsection 9.1.2 of this subchapter, below.
9.1.2 All Public Water Systems providing treatment and all Public Community water Systems shall submit a signed report to the Secretary at least once a month (or as otherwise directed by the Secretary) no later than ten (10) days following the end of the month, with the following information, as applicable.
(a) A summary of the water System operation, including the amount of water produced or purchased;
(b) Results of water temperature measurements;
(c) Results of all turbidity analyses;
(d) Results of chlorine residual analyses;
(e) Results of fluoride residual analyses;
(f) Results of pH analyses;
(g) Calculated CT values for highest peak hourly flow during the month; and
(h) Any other information specified by the Secretary as a condition of a permit or temporary permit to operate.

Sample collection for the analyses identified in (b) through (g) above, as applicable, shall be from water at the Entry Point to the Distribution System. The summary shall be submitted either on a form or in digital format prescribed by or approved by the Secretary. All laboratory test results submitted shall include copies of the original test reports on the letterhead of the laboratory which performed the analyses unless other arrangements have been approved by the Secretary.

9.1.4 The water supplier shall notify local law enforcement officials and the Secretary immediately upon discovering a threat to water quality or quantity due to vandalism, tampering, verbal or written threat, or sabotage.
9.1.5 Public Transient Non-Community water Systems shall report water System administrative and operation information annually to the Secretary on a form provided by the Secretary.
9.2 Record Keeping.
9.2.1 Record maintenance shall be conducted in accordance with 40 CFR, § 141.33, Record Maintenance.
9.2.2 Results of PFAS monitoring required pursuant to Section 6.18 shall be retained for 10 years.
Subchapter 21-10 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water Systems:

(a) Public Community water Systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water Systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water Systems; and
(d) Domestic and Imported Bottled water Systems.
10.1 General Notification Requirements.
10.1.1 All Public water System suppliers shall give public notification in accordance with 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart Q, Public Notification of Drinking Water Violations, including the Standard health effects language for public notification in Appendix B to Subpart Q of Part 141; and 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart S, Ground Water Rule § 141.403(a)(7) Special notice to the public of significant deficiencies or source water fecal contamination.
10.1.2 For monitoring and reporting violations and maximum contaminant level violations involving PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA, public water systems shall give public notification following the same requirements as identified in 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart Q for violations of national primary drinking water regulations, using this health effects language:

PFAS is a group of chemicals that may affect different systems in the body. Although more research is needed, some studies in people have shown that these chemicals may affect growth, learning, and behavior in babies and children; lower a woman's chance of getting pregnant; interfere with the body's natural hormones; increase cholesterol levels; affect the immune system; and increase the risk of cancer.

10.1.3 All Public water systems with an Operating Permit containing a schedule which requires compliance with specific provisions of this rule by specified dates shall provide public notice at least annually of the schedule and the reasons for the schedule. These notices shall follow the requirements of this subchapter. Public Community water systems may satisfy this requirement via notice in their annual consumer confidence report.
10.2 Other Notification Requirements.
10.2.1 For any required public notification not covered by 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart Q, or by the Water Supply Rule (e.g., variances from technical standards, conditions of permits, notices of alleged violations), or when the Secretary determines, in his or her judgment, public notification is necessary for the protection of public health, a Public water System shall provide the public notification prescribed by the Secretary. The water supplier shall be notified by the Secretary of the particular notification requirements. The Secretary shall use the information on record from the respective water System to provide the water System with the notification.
10.2.2 The Secretary may prescribe the content of the notice, the method of distribution, and the time to issue the notice.
10.2.3 The Secretary may modify the requirements of this subchapter, or require additional public notification measures (e.g., Boil Water notices, Do Not Drink notices, or other language) when necessary, in his or her judgment, to inform consumers of the water for protection of public health. Such additional measures may include other forms of notification and specific language in the notice.
10.2.4 The water supplier shall accomplish notification as prescribed by the Secretary depending on the type of System and population served. The water supplier shall give a copy of any current public notice to all new billing units or new hookups no later than the time service begins.

The Secretary may require any combination of the following forms of notification that he or she deems are necessary to adequately inform the consumers:

(a) Through publication in a daily newspaper of general circulation in the area served by the System. If the area served is not covered by a daily newspaper of general circulation, notice shall be given by publication in a weekly newspaper of general circulation in the area served;
(b) Through announcement on local radio stations or television stations;
(c) Through posting of the notice in conspicuous locations in the service area;
(d) Through written notice to each user by mail, included with the water bill, or by hand delivery; or
(e) Through any other means determined by the Secretary to provide effective notice.
10.2.5 When the condition(s) requiring public notification continue in effect, the water supplier shall make repeat notification as prescribed by the Secretary.
10.2.6 When a water supplier is required to issue a public water notice, the System shall notify consumers within the time prescribed by the Secretary. All notices required by the Secretary shall use the language and format provided by the Secretary. All notice language shall be presented in a plainly visible manner. Any deviations from the prescribed notice language or format must be approved by the Secretary.
10.3 Certification of Notice.

Within ten days of issuance of a required public notice, the water System owner shall submit to the Secretary a certification that it has fully complied with the public notification requirements, on a form supplied by the Secretary. The water System owner shall include with the certification a representative copy of each type of notice distributed, published, posted, and made available to the persons served by the System and to the media.

10.4 Notice by Secretary.

In addition to these requirements, the Secretary may issue any notice(s) he or she determines is necessary to inform consumers and the general public of possible public health risks or hazards.

10.5 Consumer Confidence Reports.

All Public Community water suppliers shall prepare and directly deliver an annual consumer confidence report on the quality of the water by July 1 of each year to the customers of the water System. The report shall be based on the immediately preceding calendar year. All Public Community water Systems shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart O Consumer Confidence Reports including Appendix A to Subpart O of Part 141 -Regulated Contaminants and the following requirements.

10.5.1 A copy of the report and a certification statement, stating that the report was directly delivered to all customers, shall be sent to the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division no later than July 1 of each year.
10.5.2 The report shall include, but not be limited to:
(a) Information about the source, or sources;
(b) Definitions;
(c) Information on detected contaminants displayed in a table;
(d) Information on Cryptosporidium, radon, and other contaminants;
(e) Information on all monitoring results for PFHxS, PFHpA, PFNA, PFOS, and PFOA from the preceding five calendar years;
(f) Compliance status with state and federal regulations;
(g) Variances and exemptions;
(h) A brief explanation regarding contaminants found in drinking water;
(i) Telephone number of the owner, operator, or water system designee;
(j) Information about opportunities for public participation;
(j) Required additional health information; and
(k) Any other reporting requirements established by the Secretary in addition to those identified here.
Subchapter 21-11 BOTTLED & BULK WATER

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water systems:

(a) Domestic and Imported Bottled water systems.

Additionally, this subchapter applies to systems that distribute or transport bulk water intended for human consumption or other consumer uses (i.e., a bulk water hauler):

Bottled or bulk water intended for human consumption and other consumer uses meets the definition of drinking water at 10 V.S.A., Section 1671, and therefore is regulated by this rule. The public distribution and sale of bottled water shall be permitted by the Secretary before such water is sold or delivered in Vermont. Facilities which produce bottled water, Domestic and Imported Bottled water systems, are considered Public water systems and shall meet all the applicable requirements of this rule, including the Appendices.

11.1 Bottled Water.
11.1.1 General Requirements for Domestic and Imported Bottled water systems
(a) No person shall provide bottled water for public distribution or sale in Vermont without a Permit to Operate issued pursuant to Subchapter 21-3 (for a Domestic Bottled water system) or an Approval to Sell Bottled Water in Vermont (for an Imported Bottled water system).
(b) For any proposed or new Domestic or Imported Bottled water system the application for the Permit to operate or Approval to Sell Bottled Water in Vermont shall include:
(1) methods employed in the bottling operation;
(2) recall plan;
(3) water treatments used;
(4) a flow diagram from the source through the bottling operation; and
(5). a label for each container size of the bottled water product that is to be distributed or sold in Vermont which contains the information in Subsection 11.1.1(d).
(c) All changes to labels must be approved through an amendment to a water system's Permit to Operate or an Approval to Sell Bottled Water in Vermont prior to the distribution or sale of products with the label in Vermont.
(d) All bottled water labels shall contain the following information:
(1) The name of the person or company bottling the water;
(2) Town and state in which the water is bottled;
(3) Town and state where the source is situated; and
(4) Source, i.e. private spring, private well or the name of the Public water system supplying the water.
(e) All bottled water shall be filtered, processed, and packaged in accordance with the Federal Food and Drug Administration Good Manufacturing Practice Regulations (GMPRs) as found in 21 CFR, Parts 110 and 129, in addition to the requirements of this rule. The Domestic and Imported Bottled water system shall certify in their application to the Secretary that they are in compliance with the Federal Food and Drug Administration GMPRs.
11.1.2 Requirements Specific to Imported Bottled water systems
(a) In the application for the Approval to Sell Bottled Water in Vermont:
(1) The Imported Bottled water system shall include a statement from the appropriate regulatory agency with jurisdiction over the Bottled water system indicating that the facility has been approved to bottle or package water for human consumption shall be submitted. This approval may be in the form of a copy of a certificate, license, permit, or a letter of approval from the agency.
(2) The Secretary may require the Bottled water system to submit of a copy of the laws and regulations on bottled water processing from the regulatory agency having jurisdiction.
(3) In accordance with 10 VSA Section 1673(f)(l), the Imported Bottled water system shall certify that the water and the source and system of the imported water is regulated by drinking water standards or requirements substantially equivalent to or more stringent than standards or requirements established by the Secretary pursuant to 10 VSA Section 1672(b).
(4) The Imported Bottled water system shall submit monitoring results for all contaminants identified in Tables 6-1 and 6-2 of Subchapter 21-6 that is measured at locations representative of each source prior to treatment and from each finished bottled water product type and package size to be distributed or sold in Vermont. These results must be collected no earlier than twelve (12) months before the date of the application, with the exception of the microbiological analyses which shall be collected no earlier than thirty (30) days before the date of the application.
(b) Imported Bottled water systems shall submit monitoring results for the contaminants identified in Table 6-1 of Subchapter 21-6, at the sampling frequency and for the number of samples identified in Table 11-1, measured at locations representative of each source prior to treatment and from each finished bottled water product type and package size distributed or sold in Vermont.

Table 11-1 -IMPORTED BOTTLED WATER MONITORING REQUIREMENTS

Category of Contaminant(1)

Sampling Frequency

Number of Samples

Source

Product

Microbiological

Total Coliform

Heterotrophic Plate Count (HPC)

Monthly(2)

Monthly(2)

1

1

4

4

Primary Inorganic

Chemicals (including lead and copper)

3 Years

1

1

Volatile Organic Chemicals

3 Years

1

1

Synthetic Organic Chemicals

3 years

1

1

Per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFAS)

3 Years

1

1

Radionuclides: Gross Alpha, Combined Radium 226 & 228, and Uranium

3 Years

1

1

Disinfectant By-products and Disinfectant Residual

According to 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart L

(1) See Table 6-1 for a detailed list of contaminants and associated MCLs and MRDLs.

(2) If bottling does not occur monthly, a letter must be submitted in place of the monthly sample to avoid receiving a monitoring violation.

(c) The Secretary may require additional water quality monitoring for protection of public health and welfare.
(d) Imported Bottled water systems shall comply with the MCLs identified in Table 6-1.
(1) An Imported Bottled water system that is in receipt of water quality monitoring data showing an exceedance of an MCL, or who becomes aware of water quality monitoring data showing an exceedance of an MCL, in their source or one or more of their products, shall immediately notify the Secretary and provide the results, when available to the water system, to the Secretary.
(2) If water quality monitoring data shows an exceedance of an MCL in an Imported Bottled water system source or one or more of their products, and when the Secretary determines it is necessary to protect public health, the Secretary may direct the Imported Bottled water system to cease distribution and sale of the affected products and make all efforts to remove the affected products from distribution and sale in Vermont. The Secretary may require the Imported Bottled water system to take other measures necessary to protect public health.
(e) If the Heterotrophic Plate Count is greater than or equal to 500 colony forming units per 1 ml, the water system shall investigate the source of contamination and bottling operation, and report the findings to the Secretary.
11.2 Bulk Water.
11.2.1 General Requirements

Bulk water is potable water for human consumption delivered to the consumer or a Public water system by means other than a pipeline or bottled water. It is typically delivered by tanker truck or trailer. Bulk water delivery is usually limited to emergency or temporary situations except for those bulk water operations permitted by the Secretary to be used as a source for Bottled water systems.

11.2.2 Source Requirements and Water Quality Standards

No person shall distribute, transport, or provide bulk water for human consumption or other consumer uses unless:

(a) the water is supplied from either a permitted Public Community water system or a Domestic Bottled water system permitted by the Secretary;
(b) a loading station that complies with the requirements of Appendix A, Subpart 8.11, Water Loading Stations is used to fill the bulk water tankers;
(c) the bulk water contains a free chlorine residual between 1.0 ppm and 4.0 ppm, or the bulk water supplier meets the requirements as specified under Subsection 11.2.3; and
(d) other requirements that may be imposed by the Secretary to protect public health and welfare are met.
11.2.3 Tanker Requirements for Hauling Water
(a) No person shall provide bulk water for human consumption unless the water tanker, water hoses, valves, and other surfaces coming into contact with the water are constructed of smooth, nonabsorbent, corrosion-resistant, and non-toxic material safe for contact with potable water.
(b) A bulk water hauler shall develop and implement a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) to ensure and document the sanitary conditions of the bulk water hauling operation for each delivery. This SOP shall outline the frequency and method of the vehicle tank cleaning, Total Coliform Bacteria testing, and Heterotrophic Plate Count (HPC) testing. If the HPC count is greater than or equal to 500 colony-forming units per 1 ml, the bulk water hauler shall investigate and correct the source of contamination. The SOP shall be available to the Secretary upon request.
(c) All bulk water transportation vehicles shall be dedicated to the sole purpose of transporting drinking water as defined by 10 VSA, Section 1671 and shall meet all the applicable requirements of this rule, including the Appendices (e.g., Filing Station requirements in Appendix A Subpart 8.11 and Finished Water Storage in Appendix A Subpart 7).
Subchapter 21-12 WATER SYSTEM CLASSIFICATION AND OPERATOR CERTIFICATION

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following Public water systems:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems;
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water systems; and
(d) Domestic Bottled water systems.
12.1 General.

All Public water systems shall be operated by a certified operator of the appropriate class as defined in this subchapter. A certified operator is one who has met the requirements of this subchapter and has a current, valid certification from the Secretary.

All Public water systems must have a Designated Certified Operator in responsible charge available at all times. "Available" means a Designated Certified Operator must be on site or able to be contacted as needed to initiate the appropriate action within one (1) hour if not already on-site when an issue requiring Operator attention occurs.

The Secretary may revoke an operator's certification and/or direct an owner to cease participation with a contract operator if one of the following occurs:

1. The water system or water system Operator violates portions of this Rule or any applicable State or Federal law, regulation, or rule within the scope of the Operator's control and related to the Operator's required duties.
2. There is a threat to public health as a result of an activity or inactivity due to the actions of the certified Operator.

For purposes of certifying Public water system operators, each Public water system shall be classified according to the type of source water, degree of treatment, and in the case of Class 4, according to size of population served. The class of operator certification required is dependent upon the classification of such facility.

12.2 Responsibilities and Duties.
12.2.1 Owner's Responsibilities
12.2.1.1 The owner shall be responsible for the water system's compliance with this Rule, the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act, Vermont statutes, and the regulations developed pursuant to all.
12.2.1.2 The owner shall be a certified operator or shall identify a Designated Certified Operator to be responsible for quality, quantity, and process control, and system integrity decisions involving public health, treatment, storage, distribution, and standards compliance. Such designation shall be in writing using a form provided by the Secretary, signed by the owner or the owner's duly-authorized representative, and be submitted for review by the Secretary.
12.2.1.3 The owner of any Public water system shall place the direct supervision of the water system under the responsible charge of the designated certified operator(s) (see Subsection 12.2.1.2). Each public water system shall identify one Designated Certified Operator and may identify additional certified operators. The owner shall place the certified operator(s) in responsible charge of all quality, quantity, process control, and system integrity decisions involving public health, treatment, storage, distribution, and standards compliance. The certified operator shall hold a valid certification equal to or greater than the classification of the treatment facility and distribution system. The Water System's O&M Manual shall include a short-term staffing plan in the event that a Designated Certified Operator is on vacation or temporarily unavailable or cannot access the water system within 1 hour.
12.2.2 Certified Operator's Responsibilities

The certified operator shall comply with the following requirements as a condition of his or her certification:

(a) The certified operator(s) in responsible charge must hold a valid certification equal to or greater than the classification of his or her water system, including each treatment facility and distribution system, as determined by the Secretary.
(b) The operator in responsible charge shall perform the following duties:
1. Conduct visual inspections of the system's source, source water protection area, storage facilities, and chemical addition systems at an appropriate frequency giving consideration to the system's design, location, vulnerability, Operations and Maintenance Manual (see Appendix D), and other relevant factors.
2. Be familiar with all aspects of the treatment and distribution system operation of the water system.
3. Review and adhere to the system's monitoring schedule.
4. Ensure that all samples are delivered to a certified laboratory in a timely manner.
5. Inspect system within 24 hours of water system failures that threaten public health.
6. Notify owner of any violation(s) of this Rule.
7. Ensure the accuracy of water meters and other flow measuring devices.
8. Keep abreast of changes in the drinking water regulations and safety regulations.
9. Fulfill certification and certification renewal requirements.
10. Operate and maintain system in accord with the Operation & Maintenance Manual and Permit to Operate.
11. Attend all sanitary survey inspections and site assessments as directed by state personnel.
12. Oversee source water protection, watershed protection, and other activities associated with chemical waivers or otherwise required by this Rule.
13. Keep complete and accurate water system records.
14. Carry out all required reporting requirements including submitting a complete monthly report to the Secretary by the 10th day of the following month when required.
15. Develop and maintain an accurate site plan showing the water source and distribution system.
16. Respond to consumer complaints promptly.
17. Comply with all applicable state and federal statutes, rules and orders governing water system regulation.
18. Conduct all duties with reasonable care and judgment for the protection of public health, public safety, and the environment.
19. Collect repeat total coliform samples.
20. Collect water quality samples for all entry point sampling and disinfection byproducts, where applicable.
21. Manage the system's flushing program.
22. Manage the system's valve exercise and operation.;
23. Set and adjust chemical dosage.
24. Set, adjust, and replenish chemical mixes and batches.
25. Supervise, authorize, and accept responsibility for repairs, maintenance, and inspection of water system infrastructure.
(c) The Certified operator may, at their discretion, delegate to on-site or contracted personnel the following tasks, to be completed under the authority of the certification of the water system's validly-certified operator:
1. Routine chemical residual monitoring;
2. Meter reading;
3. Collection of water quality samples;
4. Transportation of water quality samples;
5. Maintenance of water system grounds;
6. Compilation of information for monthly reporting;
7. Monitoring and/or recording of system pressure;
8. Routine visual inspections of water system infrastructure;
9. Checking and adding salt to ion exchange reservoirs as needed;
10. Collection of routine total coliform samples;
11. Water storage tank inspection/cleaning; and
12. UV treatment system maintenance; and
13. Other treatment equipment maintenance under contract.
(d) In instances where a water system is required to have both a treatment class operator and a class D operator, the designated certified operator shall possess the appropriate treatment class certification.
12.3 Operator Certification.
12.3.1 To be eligible for operator certification, each applicant must:
(a) Submit an application on a form provided by the Secretary;
(b) Meet the educational and experience requirements set forth in Section 12.9;
(c) Classes 2, 3, 4 and D shall obtain a passing grade on the certification examination approved by the Secretary (Class 1 operators need registration only) within the last 5 years;
(d) Pay any required fee; and
(e) Classes 2, 3, 4, and D must satisfy the requirements of Operator in Training established in 12.6 below; and
(f) Satisfy all other state mandated requirements for professional licensing and certification.
12.3.2 When replacing an operator, the water system owner shall notify the Secretary in writing within ten (10) days following the date an operator ceases operation of a plant or system, and within ten (10) days after a new operator commences operation of a Public water system.
12.3.3 Whenever a new Public water system is constructed, the water supplier shall employ or contract with an operator certified in the corresponding class for the new facilities.
12.3.4 When significant modifications are made to an existing Public water system which change the system's classification, the owner shall designate an operator of the appropriate class or higher who is available to operate the water system within 30 days. If the historic operator does not possess the required class certification as the system following the change in treatment, they are no longer eligible to be the Designated Certified Operator of the system and they historic operator must satisfy the requirements of 12.3.6 below to obtain an upgraded class certification. This includes working under the supervision of a validly certified operator of the appropriate class.
12.3.5 An operator holding a treatment certification in any class is permitted to operate all facilities in that treatment class and any lower treatment class. Class 4C is the highest Vermont water operator treatment class. Class D operators must also possess a treatment certification to operate any class treatment system otherwise they may only operate class D systems as defined by 12.8.5 below.
12.3.6 A certified operator may move from class or sub-class 2, 3, or 4A, 4B, or 4C to the next higher class if they satisfy all of the following:
(a) the operator has obtained a passing grade on the examination of the higher class; and
(b) they have worked as an operator-in-training for six months in the next higher class and satisfied the requirements of 12.6 below.
12.3.7 A certified operator seeking a Class D certificate shall satisfy the requirements for initial certification. There is not an avenue through which operators may move into D from a treatment-related class certificate or from D into a treatment-related class without satisfying the requirements of 12.3.1 above.
12.3.8 Applicants who did not obtain a passing grade on a written certification may not re-take the examination for 30 days. Following the 30-day period, applicants may be retested at any scheduled examination for the particular class or via computer-based examination.
12.3.9 The operator's certification shall be displayed in the office or plant of the system, and provided for inspection upon reasonable request.
12.4 Revocation or Suspension of Operator Certification.
(a) The Secretary may suspend or revoke an operator's certificate granted under this section, if the Secretary finds good cause to do so. Good cause to suspend or revoke an operator's certificate shall include any of the following:
1. Failing to adhere to or use care, judgment, and knowledge in the completion of the operator's duties identified in 12.2.2 resulting in an actual or potential threat to public health;
2. Actual or potential threats to public health that arise when uncertified on-site personnel acting under the delegated authority of the designated certified operator fail to adhere to or uphold care, judgement, and knowledge in the completion of operational functions;
3. Obtaining a certificate through fraud, deceit, or falsification;
4. Submitting false or misleading information regarding any application for initial certification or certification renewal;
5. Submitting false or misleading documentation relating to the operational, maintenance, monitoring, or reporting requirements of a public water system;
6. Conviction of a crime related to the practice of the profession or conviction of a felony, whether or not related to the practice of the profession. If an individual is convicted of either of these types of crimes, the Secretary shall consider the following in determining whether to deny or discipline a license or certification to the individual:
(a) the nature and seriousness of the conviction;
(b) the amount of time since the commission of the crime;
(c) the relationship of the crime to the ability, capacity, and fitness required to perform the duties and discharge the responsibilities of the profession; and
(d) evidence of rehabilitation or treatment
7. Having a professional or occupational certification or license from another certifying or licensing authority suspended, revoked, or refused renewal or reinstatement for any of the reasons identified in this section.
(b) The Secretary shall provide written notice of suspension or revocation, including the reason(s) for such actions, to the operator involved. The effective date of the revocation or suspension will be the date specified in the notice sent to the operator. Any operator who receives such notification shall have thirty days from the receipt of the notice to submit a written request for a hearing to the Secretary. If requested, the Secretary shall provide an opportunity for a hearing. Th submission of a request for a hearing does not stay the effective date of the Secretary's decision.
(c) The Secretary shall set forth what steps, if any, may be taken by the certificate holder to reapply for certification if a previous certificate has been revoked.
(d) In situations where the operator does not control the budget for water system maintenance and/or compliance, to avoid revocation of the certification, it is the designated certified operator's responsibility to either remove themselves from the system or inform the Secretary of the owner's intentions not to comply with this Rule.
(e) The Secretary may refuse to renew an Operator's certification for any reason enumerated in section (a) of this provision.
12.5 Recertification of Expired Certificates.

Any operator who fails to renew his or her certificate within sixty days following the expiration date of the certificate may not receive a new certificate until he or she successfully passes the qualifying examination and meets the requirements set forth in Section 12.3.1.

12.6 Operator-In-Training (OIT).
12.6.1 An Operator-in-Training (OIT) certification is required to operate a Public water system under the direct supervision of a certified operator and may be granted by the Secretary. Application must be made on a form supplied by the Secretary.
12.6.2 Upon written notification by the certified operator overseeing the OIT's operational experience, that the OIT has completed the minimum required operational experience for full certification in the appropriate class, and an accompanying statement that the OIT is capable of operating a public drinking water system to the satisfaction of the operator to warrant issuance of a certificate, the Secretary may issue the appropriate operator certificate provided the OIT has satisfied all operator certification requirements of this part. If the OIT is not able to submit such notification by the certified operator overseeing the OIT's operational experience, the Secretary may accept such notification and statement from non-certified operators only under extenuating circumstances.
12.7 Provisional Certification.
12.7.1 A Provisional Certificate may be issued by the Secretary to an applicant for the operation of a specific water system when the applicant has not met the full certification requirements for experience in that water system class. A Provisional Certificate may be issued provided the specific water system has exhausted all reasonable efforts in recruiting a fully certified operator, and the applicant has obtained a passing grade on the operator examination for the particular water system class.
12.7.2 The Provisional Certificate Application shall be co-signed by the applicant and the owner for the water system which will be served by the provisionally certified operator. The owner of the water system shall certify that the applicant has had operator training by the manufacturer, consultant, or other certified operator and is capable of operating the specified water system. The Provisional Certificate has the following restrictions:
(a) It shall be issued for operation of a single, specific water system;
(b) It shall be valid only for a time period equal to the minimum operating experience requirements identified in Table 12-1 of Section 12.9; and
(c) It shall be non-transferable.
(d) It shall be contingent of review/approval of the system's O&M Manual and a compliance determination.
12.7.3 To convert from a Provisional to a Full Certificate, applicants must:
(a) present evidence of having been employed in a particular water system for a specific amount of time, to include all time in training with equipment manufacturers, consultants, or other certified trainers/operators (see Table 12-1, of Subsection 12.9; and
(b) present evidence of having obtained a passing grade on an examination for the particular classification being sought and evidence that all other certification requirements have been met (see Subsection 12.2.1).
12.8 Classification of Public Water Systems and Drinking Water Facilities.

Each Public water system is to be classified by the Secretary as set forth in this rule. There will be five classes, 1 through 4 and D.

12.8.1 Class 1A

This class of Public water system includes Transient Non-Community water systems with distribution and using any of the following technologies

(a) No treatment;
(b) Ion exchange for the sole purpose of water softening;
(c) Cartridge filtration for aesthetic purposes; or
(d) Limestone contactors.
12.8.1.1 Treatment Class 1B

This class of Public water system includes Transient Non-Community water systems with distribution and using any of the following technologies:

(a) Disinfection with chlorine or UV, including standby capability.
(b) Treatment of secondary contaminants with an active service contract. The contract for such treatment must be kept up-to-date and made available to the Secretary upon request.

A higher class of operator is not required for point of use treatment at commercial establishments undertaken for aesthetic purposes. Aesthetic purposes as used here includes soda machines, beverage machines, coffee production, and similar activities, and such classification will be made at the discretion of the Secretary.

12.8.2 Treatment Class 2

This class of Public water system includes Public Community, Bottled, and Public Non-Transient NonCommunity water systems with distribution and any of the following technologies to treat groundwater:

(a) No treatment;
(b) Disinfection with chlorine or UV; including systems with standby chlorination;
(c) Ion exchange for the sole purpose of water softening;
(d) Treatment of secondary contaminants;
(e) Limestone contactors if installed for aesthetic purposes only, not as a result of Lead and Copper sampling results, or;.
(f) Consecutive water systems, regardless of source type that do not meet the definition of 12.8.5 below and provide treatment according to Class 2 specifications above.
12.8.3 Treatment Class 3

This class of Public water system applies to all Public water systems with distribution and any of the following technologies to treat groundwater:

(a) Disinfection by other than chlorine or UV;
(b) Sequestering of iron or manganese;
(c) Fluoridation;
(d) Corrosion control including limestone contractors if installed in response to a lead or copper action level exceedance;
(e) pH control;
(f) Air stripping;
(g) Granular activated adsorption to address primary contaminants;
(h) Ion exchange to achieve compliance with an MCL or the manganese health advisory;
(i) Aeration;
(j) Reverse Osmosis Micro filtration, nanofiltration, ultrafiltration;
(k) Consecutive water systems, regardless of source type, that do not meet the definition of 12.8.5 and provide treatment according to class 3 specifications; or
(l) Authorized blending to achieve compliance with a primary contaminant

This class also includes all Public water systems using groundwater determined to be under the direct influence of surface water and which have a filtration waiver.

12.8.4 Treatment Class 4

This class of Public water system includes water systems which treat surface water, or which have groundwater determined to be under the direct influence of surface water with respect to which a filtration waiver has not been issued. Class 4 is further differentiated by population served by the system in the following sub-classes:

4A, for served populations between 25 and 500;

4B, for served populations between 501 and 3,300; and

4C, for served populations greater than 3,300

For a system categorized in 4A or 4B above that is growing and whose class changes between sanitary surveys or other routine regulation, the Secretary shall consider administratively upgrading the class of the respective operators to accommodate the growth of the system.

12.8.5 Class D
1. This class of Public water system includes the following:
(a) Consecutive Public water systems serving 500 people or more and that have only a distribution system. This type of Class D system purchases its water and does not have any source or treatment associated with it; this class of systems may have storage or pumping facilities.
(b) Public Community water systems serving 500 or more people with any of the following are required to have an operator with both a treatment certification as identified above and either a "Legacy Distribution" or a Distribution certification as identified below or a separate certified treatment and distribution system operator(s) or certification(s) when there are:
1) multiple pressure zones within the distribution system owned or operated by the public water system;

or

2) fire protection through designated fire hydrants connected to the transmission or distribution system.
(c) Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems serving 500 or more people with fire hydrants connected to the distribution system for the purpose of firefighting are required to have an operator with both a treatment certification as identified above and a "Legacy Distribution" or a Distribution certification as identified below or separate certified treatment and distribution system operator(s) or certification(s).
2. Public water systems meeting the definition of 12.8.5(a), (b), or (c) above are required to obtain a certified Class D operator or the existing operator required to obtain a "Legacy Distribution" certification no later than July 1, 2029.
(a) Legacy Distribution Certification : Operators who have passed a treatment exam prior to July 1, 2029 and can document 1.5 years of experience at a water system(s) meeting the definition of 12.8.5(a), (b), or (c), above, may attend and complete a State-provided distribution training class in lieu of taking the distribution class examination. Upon satisfactory completion of the state-provided training, these operators will be issued what will be referred to as a "Legacy Distribution" certification. This certification will apply only to the systems for which the operator has 1.5 years of experience or greater as of the time of submitting their application, no later than July 1, 2029. Should a "Legacy Distribution" operator wish to work at a system for which they previously do not have the required 1.5 years of experience, they would need to pass the Distribution exam to be granted a Distribution certificate according to this section.
(i) Legacy Distribution Certification renewal shall be linked with the respective treatment certificate and follow the 3-year renewal period assigned to the treatment classification.
(b) Distribution Certification :
(i) Operators who have not previously passed the appropriate treatment exam or had the required 1.5 years of experience at a specific water system meeting the definition of 12.8.5(a), (b), or (c) above will not be eligible to obtain a Legacy Distribution certification and instead shall meet the certification requirements for a Distribution certification as identified in this chapter including passing the certification examination and having the minimum required applicable experience.
(ii) Operators who earned a passing grade on the class D exam after January 1, 2018 who have not adhered to the certification renewal requirements of this section to maintain their D certification but have maintained a valid class 2, 3, or 4 treatment certification as of the date of application apply to reinstate their class full D certification prior to July 1, 2029 and be considered dual-certified moving forward so long as the continued requirements for certification renewal established in this section are met.
12.9 Experience and Education.
12.9.1 In determining whether an applicant has the operating experience required for certification in a particular water system class, the Secretary may consider the following:
1) the period of satisfactory experience as a system operator or OIT in the respective certification class sought; and
2) operating experience in the respective certification class sought accrued in another jurisdiction.

All satisfactory experience as noted above shall be credited toward the total experience required for certification in the particular class for which application is made. Operating experience is defined as time spent at a facility, plant, or system in satisfactory performance of operational duties.

12.9.2 All applicants shall have a high school diploma or a general equivalency diploma (GED). The Secretary may allow experience and relevant training to be substituted for a high school diploma or GED.
12.9.3 Table 12-1, below, contains the minimum experience requirements for certification.

Table 12-1 -OPERATOR CLASSIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Public Water System Class(s)

Class of Operator

Operating Experience Required (Yrs)

ALL

Operator-in-Training(OIT)

NONE

ALL

Provisional

NONE

1A

Operator Class 1A

NONE

1B

Operator Class 1B

NONE

2

Operator Class 2

1.5

3

Operator Class 3

1.5

4A1

Operator Class 4A1

2

4A

Operator Class 4A

2

4B

Operator Class 4B

2.5

4C

Operator Class 4C

3

D

Operator Class D

1.5

12.9.4 Substitutions for Experience Requirements
(a) Substitutions with related schooling or courses may be made for up to 50% of the required on-site experience for Classes 2, 3, 4A, 4B, 4C, and D
(b) Formal Education
(1) High School education cannot be substituted for any experience requirement.
(2) Approved relevant formal academic education at the post high school or college level may be substituted for experience requirement on a year for year basis, subject to the 50 percent limitation described in Subsection 12.9.4(a) above. Thirty (30) semester hours or equivalent educational hours of credit are considered to represent 1 year of formal education.
(c) Operator Training
(1) Specialized operator training courses, seminars, workshops or approved technical conferences may be substituted for experience requirements subject to the 50 percent limitation previously described. Continuing Education Units (CEUs) totaling 30 are considered equal to 1 year. 1 CEU equals 10 Training Contact Hours (TCH).
(d) Partial credit toward operating experience may be given for experience in plant or system maintenance, in a laboratory, in a different certification category than that which is being applied for, and in related (allied) trades, as determined or approved by the Secretary.
12.10 Certification Renewal.
12.10.1 A certified water system operator shall submit to the Secretary, at least 30 days before the expiration date of the certificate, a completed application on the form approved by the Secretary, including any fee due and signed statement by the operator attesting that all required credit hours have been completed for the respective renewal period and the operator meets the minimum requirements for their certification to be renewed. If the application is complete, and the Secretary finds no cause under this section to deny the application, a renewed certificate shall be issued.

The burden of certification renewal is assumed by the applicant and failure of the Secretary to provide notice shall not constitute a basis for contesting the expiration of an operator certificate. The applicant bears the burden to renew their certification. The applicant may not use the Secretary's failure to provide notice of a required renewal to contest an expired operator certificate.

12.10.2 Should an operator with enough TCH to apply to a renewal of their certification earn TCH in the calendar year of a renewal cycle, but not elect to apply those hours toward the current renewal, they may apply those hours to the next renewal period. This must be clearly stated on the renewal form.
12.10.3 Certification renewal shall occur on a schedule as shown below and shall be based on various methods of recertification depending on water system class.

Table 12 - 2 Duration of drinking water operator certificates

Class of Certificate

Duration of Certificate, Years

Method of Certification

1A

3

Registration

1B, 2, 3, 4A, 4B, 4C, and D

3

Satisfaction of TCH requirements

12.10.3 Upon receiving prior approval from the Secretary an operator may retake the certification exam for their respective class and, upon passing the exam, be allowed to renew their license without completing the required TCH for that renewal period. This option is allowed once per class, per operator.
12.10.4 Certifications issued under the Rule may be for a different duration than shown above, in order to stagger the renewal dates for more efficient administration of the program at the discretion of the Secretary.
12.11 Continuing Education.
12.11.1 Continuing education requirements for certification renewal are as follows, according to the training categories established in 12.11.2 and 12.11.5 below.
(a) Water System Class 1A operators are encouraged to complete at least 3 TCH of state approved seminar or other approved instruction each 3 year renewal period.
(b) Water System Class 1B operators shall complete at least 3 TCH of a state sponsored seminar or other approved instruction each 3 year renewal period.
(c) Water System Class 2 operators shall complete at least 10 TCH of a state sponsored seminar or other approved instruction each 3 year renewal period.
(d) Water System Class 3, 4, and D operators shall complete at least 20 TCH of state sponsored seminars or other approved instruction each 3 year renewal period.
12.11.2 For each renewal cycle, class 2, 3, and 4 operators shall obtain no less than 30% of their required TCH from topics included in Category 1 below; no less than 30% of required TCH from topics included in Category 2 below; and the remaining 40% from any training category as follows:

Table 12 -3 Training Categories

Category 1

Category 2

Category 3

Topics

Regulatory

Treatment

All other approved training topics

Public Health

Distribution

Management and/or

Source Protection

Finance

Operation and Maintenance

Minimum Hours Class 2

3 hours per renewal

3 hours per renewal

No minimum

Minimum Hours Classes 3, 4

6 hours per renewal

6 hours per renewal

No minimum,

12.11.3 Assignment of Class Categories
(a) Class offerings will be assigned a category or in some instances will cover multiple categories above. It is the obligation of the operator to identify from the possible assigned categories how they are seeking to apply each TCH to their respective certification when multiple categories apply.
(b) Single classes providing less than 4 hours of TCH will not be permitted to be sub-divided among multiple categories.
(c) Single classes providing 4 or more hours of TCH will be permitted to be sub-divided among multiple categories in half-hour increments.
12.11.4 Documentation of continuing education shall be submitted to the Secretary to account for each TCH received and being applied to the operator's certificate for renewal. Documentation will be provided by the applicant. Acceptable documentation shall consist of individual course completion certificates (preapproval of course required) or formal course sign-in sheets for pre-approved courses containing the signature of the applicant confirming attendance. The operator shall identify the respective categories for each TCH earned on a form provided by the Secretary. The Secretary will review and audit a select portion of renewal applications every renewal cycle to ensure consistency and adherence to the requirements above.
12.11.5 For each renewal cycle, class D operators shall obtain no less than 50% of their required TCH from topics included in Category 1 below; no less than 30% of required TCH from topics included in Category 2 below; and the remaining 20% from any training category as follows:

Table 12-4

Category 1

Category 2

Category 3

Topics

Regulatory

Treatment

All other approved training topics

Public Health

Management and/or Finance

Distribution

Operation and Maintenance

Work site safety

Hydraulics (pumps, pressure, etc.)

Minimum Hours Class D

10 hours per renewal

6 hours per renewal

No minimum

12.11.6 Certain Certified Operators who possess both a treatment classification and a distribution certification may apply a specified amount of distribution-related TCH to both the treatment classification and the distribution certification per renewal cycle, meaning a set number of hours can be treated as "dual" credits. These "dual" distribution credits amounts may be applied as follows:
1. Treatment classification 2 operators who possess a distribution certification may treat up to 5 TCH as "dual" credits per renewal cycle. The Operators must complete at least 15 total TCH.
2. Treatment classification 3 and 4 operators who possess a distribution certification may treat up to 10 TCH as "dual" credits per renewal cycle. The Operators must complete at least 30 total TCH.

Trainings listed in Category 3 in Table 12-3 or 12-4 may not count toward "dual" credit and may only count toward the treatment certification when an operator possess multiple certifications. Operators who chose to use "dual" credit must otherwise complete the requirements specified in the tables related to their respective treatment and distribution classes.

Subchapter 21-13 LABORATORY CERTIFICATION

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water systems:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems; and
(c) Public Transient Non-Community (TNC) water systems.
13.1 Certification.

All laboratories doing analyses which are to be submitted by Public water systems under this rule, must be certified by the Vermont Department of Health and all shall be subject to the laboratory certification provisions of 40 CFR, Part 141, Subpart C, and § 142.10(b)(3) and (b)(4).

Subchapter 21-14

(RESERVED)

Subchapter 21-15 CAPACITY

Introduction

This subchapter applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems and
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems.
15.1 General Requirements.
15.1.1 All proposed new Public Community and Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems, for which applications were submitted on or after October 1, 1999, shall demonstrate technical, managerial, and financial capacity prior to obtaining a Construction Permit or an Operating Permit. A Construction Permit or an Operating Permit shall not be issued until a determination has been made by the Secretary that the water system has demonstrated that it has, and will continue to have over the long term, technical, financial, and managerial capacity. Subchapters 21-4 (Construction Permits) and 21-5 (Operating Permits) identify the necessary information required for submittal as part of permit applications. Appendix A of this rule identifies many of the technical capacity requirements, and Appendix B identifies the managerial and financial capacity requirements.
15.2 Technical Capacity.
15.2.1 Technical Capacity shall generally be demonstrated by:
(a) Compliance with Appendix A source water and infrastructure requirements;
(b) An approved Operation and Maintenance Manual;
(c) The retention of a certified operator; and
(d) Approved "as-built" drawings.
15.3 Managerial Capacity.
15.3.1 Managerial Capacity shall generally be demonstrated by:
(a) An organizational chart that shows clear lines of authority and responsibility, and identifies a person(s) with decision-making authority;
(b) Proof of appropriate experience and expertise of managerial personnel; and
(c) By-laws, policies, and procedures for municipalities, cooperatives, homeowners associations and other similar organizations that define system and customer responsibilities and demonstrate acceptable management and decision-making processes.
15.4 Financial Capacity.
15.4.1 Financial Capacity shall generally be demonstrated by:
(a) Reliable cost and revenue projections that demonstrate revenue sufficiency, and
(b) Proof of implementation of sound fiscal management and control policies and procedures.
Subchapter 21-16 SOURCE WATER PROTECTION

Introduction

This subchapter applies to the following water systems:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Domestic Bottled; and
(c) Public Non-Transient Non-Community (NTNC) water systems.
16.1 General.

All Public Community, Domestic Bottled water systems, and Non-Transient Non-Community Water Systems shall have an approved Source Protection Plan. The owner shall prepare and submit a Source Protection Plan to the Secretary for approval. Public Transient Non-Community water systems are encouraged, but not required, to complete Source Protection Plans.

16.2 Components of a Source Protection Plan.

A Source Protection Plan shall consist of a map of the delineated Source Protection Area; an inventory of the potential and actual sources of contamination in the Source Protection Area located on the map; a management plan for the risks from the potential and actual sources of contamination; and a contingency plan. Some parts of the Source Protection Plan may also be required in the Operation and Maintenance Manual (see Appendix D of this rule).

16.2.1 Source Protection Area Maps

The Source Protection Plan shall include a topographic map showing:

(a) the source(s) identified by name and the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division's Source Number;
(b) the Source Protection Area, including any delineated zones;
(c) the lots and associated landowners, unless this information is included on a tax or orthophoto map showing the Source Protection Area; and
(d) the location of any potential and actual sources of contamination.
16.2.2 Source Protection Area Delineation

For Public Community Water Systems, the Source Protection Area shall be:

(a) the area approved by the Secretary;
(b) the 3,000 foot fixed radius circle assigned by the Secretary prior to September 24, 1992; or
(c) the area approved by the Vermont Department of Health prior to July 1, 1991. These approvals do not include restrictions imposed by the Board of Health in Health Orders.

Where multiple Source Protection Areas have been delineated for a particular source, only the most current, approved, Source Protection Area shall be in effect.

Non-Transient, Non-Community water systems with groundwater sources shall delineate a Source Protection Area in accordance with Vermont's Wellhead Protection Program Guidance Document. NonTransient, Non-Community water systems with a surface water source or Groundwater Under the Direct Influence of Surface water source shall use the delineation methodology in Appendix A Part 3 of this Rule.

Surface water systems with a 3000 foot radius circle Source Protection Area shall redelineate their Source Protection Area(s) in accordance with Appendix A of this Rule, except for surface water systems using Lake Champlain as a source.

Surface water systems using Lake Champlain as a source shall redelineate their Source Protection Areas in accordance with Appendix A of this Rule or in accordance with the EPA approved Assessment Protocol for Great Lakes Sources, dated August 8, 1999. The public water system shall choose which method to use.

16.2.3 Inventory of Potential Sources of Contamination

The Source Protection Plan shall include an inventory of all potential and actual sources of contamination within the Source Protection Area. The inventory shall include the type of facility or business and the contact name and address. As required in 16.2.1, a map shall be included showing the location of the potential sources of contamination in relation to the Source Protection Area and the sources.

With prior approval of the Secretary, certain potential sources of contamination may be grouped together instead of listed individually.

16.2.4 Assessment of Potential Sources of Contamination

The Source Protection Plan shall include an assessment of high, medium, or low risk for the potential source of contamination to affect the public water source(s). The Source Protection Plan shall include justification for the ranking.

The actual risk to the source and the health of persons from each contaminant at each activity will be made upon considering the following factors:

(a) distance from potential or actual source of contamination to drinking water source;
(b) toxicity of contaminants (if chemical);
(c) the relative elevation of the bottom of source compared to discharge point or potential discharge point at the PSOC;
(d) level of control exerted over PSOC;
(e) volume of contaminant which is, or might be, released at the PSOC;
(f) a past, present and ongoing, or a potential discharge;
(g) the nature of the soils between the PSOC and the source;
(h) the aquifer characteristics, if known;
(i) type and severity of illness associated with the PSOC if contaminants are disease causing;
(j) source construction integrity;
(k) detection of chemical or microbiological contaminants; and
(l) other factors which might help evaluate the level of risk as high, medium, or low.

For Zone 1 of a groundwater source, the risk ranking shall be "high" for any activity identified as a "prohibited land use" in Appendix A Subpart 3.3.1.2(e).

For any actual sources of contamination, the risk ranking shall be "high."

16.2.5 Management Plan of Risk

The Source Protection Plan shall contain a plan for managing the potential and actual sources of contamination. This plan shall be directed towards controlling existing potential sources of contamination and, where possible, reducing risks of potential contamination.

At a minimum, the water system shall notify all landowners within the Source Protection Area of the Source Protection Plan. Other techniques may include educational efforts on protecting groundwater and surface water, zoning ordinances, purchase of land or conservation easements to protect the drinking water quality, maintaining buffer zones for surface water sources, educating the residents about proper septic systems and storage tank maintenance, developing educational programs for schools, etc.

Water systems using Lake Champlain as a source shall include information about watershed protection in their management plan. The Secretary will prepare this information.

16.2.6 Contingency Plan

All Source Protection Plans shall include a Contingency Plan. The Contingency Plan shall include, but not be limited to:

(a) Identification of alternative drinking water sources, both long and short term;
(b) A list of key personnel to be notified in case of a water emergency; and
(c) A shut-down/start-up procedure, if one is not already contained in an approved Operations & Maintenance (O&M) Manual.
16.3 Updates of Source Protection Plans.

Source Protection Plans shall be updated by the Public Water System every three years. The updates shall be submitted to the Secretary for review and approval. The update shall include, but is not be limited to:

(a) Inspection reports of potential sources of contamination;
(b) Inventory and assessment of new potential and actual sources of contamination in source protection area;
(c) Map location of new potential and actual sources of contamination;
(d) Management plans for new potential sources of contamination;
(e) A summary of any remedial or corrective actions taken on potential sources of contamination; and
(f) Changes in landowners; key town, county, or state officials; management techniques; source protection area; or other pertinent information.
(g) Pertinent new requirements of state and federal rules which may have been adopted since the last update.
16.4 Financial Assistance.
16.4.1 The Secretary may establish a financial assistance program to assist Public Community and NonTransient Non-Community water systems in preparing and updating Source Protection Plans and Source Water Assessments.
16.4.2 Any financial assistance program which is established through the Drinking Water State Revolving Fund will be detailed in the Drinking Water State Revolving Fund's Intended Use Plan submitted to the United States Environmental Protection Agency.
16.5 Construction of Sewer Lines in Source Protection Areas.

An owner who also owns sewer lines in its water system's Source Protection Area shall provide for adequate protection of the source water quality as part of the design and construction of any new sewer lines in the Source Protection Area. The Secretary may develop procedures on sewer line construction standards in Source Protection Areas.

Appendix A Vermont Standards for Water System Design, Construction, and Protection.

Part 1 SUBMISSION OF PLANS

Introduction

This Part applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems; and
(c) Domestic Bottled water systems.
1.0 General

An application for a Permit to Construct or for a Source Permit must be submitted on an application form supplied by the Secretary. An application must be submitted a minimum of 30 days prior to the date of which action by the Secretary is desired. For larger projects contact the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division for typical review times. Preliminary plans and the engineer's report for municipal projects should be submitted for review prior to the preparation of final plans. Approval for construction will not be issued until complete, detailed plans and specifications have been submitted to the Secretary and found to be satisfactory. Documents submitted for consideration of formal approval shall include but not be limited to:

(a) general layout, including location plan;
(b) detailed plans and specifications;
(c) basis of design, including a summary; AND
(d) operation requirements, where applicable.
1.1 Permit Application

The requirements for filing an application with the Secretary shall include but are not limited to:

(a) The owner shall complete and sign the application form; and
(b) A brief description shall be provided as part of this form including:
(1) purpose of the project;
(2) source of water supply;
(3) service classification (commercial, residential, offices, recreational, etc.);
(4) estimated average and maximum daily water demand;
(5) general description of the proposed water system including length and diameter of water mains, number of service connections, all other fixtures; and
(6) fire protection where provided (i.e. number of hydrants, design fire flow, building(s) to be sprinkled).
1.2 Engineer's Report

The Engineer's Report for water system improvement shall, where pertinent, present the following information:

1.2.1 General Information shall include the following:
(a) name and mailing address of the owner;
(b) identification of the area to be served on a Vermont orthophoto base tax map;
(c) general description of any existing water system or drinking water facilities, including age, general condition, and adequacy;
(d) a letter of allocation from the Public water system serving the project, or Source Permit; and
(e) information on fire protection to be provided, if any.
1.2.2 Extent of Water System, including:
(a) description of the nature and extent of the area to be served;
(b) provisions for extending the water system to include areas beyond limits of intended construction; and
(c) appraisal of the future requirements for service, including existing and potential industrial, commercial, institutional, and other water supply needs.
1.2.3 Alternate Plans

Where two or more feasible solutions exist for providing Public water system facilities, including connection to an existing Public water system, the applicant shall discuss the alternative plans. Reasons shall be given for selecting the one recommended, including financial considerations, implementability and a comparison of the minimum classification of the water system operator required for operation of each alternative facility.

1.2.4 Design Criteria

A summary of complete design criteria shall be submitted for the proposed project containing, but not limited to, the following:

(a) safe yield of the source of supply (which may be waived for existing systems with no history of outages and which will not allow further connections);
(b) reservoir surface area, volume and a volume-versus-depth curve, if applicable;
(c) area and map of source protection area, including an accurate GPS location of the source(s);
(d) estimated average and maximum day water demands for the design period;
(e) number of existing and proposed services;
(f) fire fighting requirements; includes volume (gpm), pressure and duration of flow (minimum of 2 hours required);
(g) flash mix, flocculation and settling basin capacities;
(h) retention times;
(i) unit loading;
(j) filter area and the proposed filtration rate;
(k) backwash rate; and
(l) feeder capacities and ranges.
1.2.5 Soil and Groundwater Conditions, including a description of:
(a) the character of the soil through which water mains are to be laid;
(b) soil conditions prevailing at sites of proposed structures; and
(c) the elevation of highest groundwater in relation to subsurface structures;
1.2.6 Water Use Data to include:
(a) a description of the population trends as indicated by available records, and the estimated population which will be served by the proposed water system or expanded system;
(b) present water consumption and the projected average and maximum daily demand, including fire flow demand (see Appendix A Subpart 1.2.8); and
(c) unusual occurrences, including anticipated future industrial or commercial uses.
1.2.7 Hydraulic Analysis

A hydraulic analysis shall be performed on all proposed water systems, and may be required on major improvements to existing systems, demonstrating the ability of the system to meet pressure and flow requirements.

1.2.8 Fire Flow Requirements to include:
(a) recommendations of the Insurance Services Office, current edition or the local fire department as to fire flows required in the service area involved; systems used for both fire protection and domestic use must maintain a minimum of 20 psi under fire flow conditions at all points in the distribution system and provide adequate distribution storage to meet both domestic and fire flow requirements (See Appendix A Subpart 7.0.1).
(b) fire flows which will be made available by the proposed or enlarged system; and
(c) information of type and connection to the water system required for building sprinkler systems, including back flow prevention devices meeting the applicable ASSE Standards and AWWA Standard M -14.
1.2.9 Sewerage System Availability

Describe the existing sewerage system and indicate location of existing and known future sewage treatment works, with special reference to their proximity to existing or proposed water system structures which may affect the operation of the water system, or which may affect the quality of the supply.

1.2.10 Source of Water Supply

Describe the proposed source or sources of water supply to be developed, the reasons for their selection and provide information as needed to gain a Source Permit as required in Subchapter 21-4. (Provide details of operation when two or more sources are used.)

1.2.11 Proposed Treatment Processes

Summarize and establish the adequacy of proposed processes and unit parameters for the treatment of the specific water under consideration. Alternative methods of water treatment and chemical use should be considered as a means of reducing water handling and disposal problems. Pilot studies are required when the proposed treatment deviates from the conventional complete treatment involving coagulation, flocculation, sedimentation and filtration with standard rates. Pilot studies may range from review of pilot studies on similar systems with similar raw water quality to full scale pilot system construction and evaluation.

1.2.12 Waste Disposal

Discuss the various wastes from the water treatment plant, their volume, proposed treatment and points of discharge. Disposal of water treatment plant sludge shall occur in a manner that is in accordance with the Agency of Natural Resources requirements.

1.2.13 Automation

Provide data supporting the selection of automatic equipment, for treatment plants, including the servicing and operator training to be provided. Manual override must be provided for any automatic controls.

1.2.14 Project Sites:

Include a discussion of:

(a) the various sites considered and advantages of the recommended one(s);
(b) the proximity of residences, industries, and other important establishments and land uses; and
(c) any potential sources of contamination that may influence the quality of the supply or interfere with effective operation of the water system, such as sewage absorption systems, septic tanks, privies, cesspools, sink holes, sanitary landfills, refuse, garbage, underground storage tanks, hazardous sites, industrial facilities, direct discharge sites, agricultural land use, industrial dumps, etc.
1.2.15 Financing to include:
(a) estimated cost of integral parts of the system;
(b) projected estimated annual cost of operation; and
(c) proposed methods to finance both capital and operating costs.
1.2.16 Future Extensions

Summarize planning for future needs and services.

1.3 Plans for Construction

Plans for water system improvements shall, where pertinent, provide the following:

1.3.1 General Layout:

Include:

(a) One (1) copy of plans which are relevant to water system approval such as location of source, storage, if any, storm and waste water sewers, boundaries of area to be served, etc.
(b) The first plan sheets shall contain:
1. Project Title;
2. Complete index of all sheets for the project;
3. Location map including North identification;
4. Legend differentiating between existing and proposed facilities and will be different for sanitary and storm sewers;
5. Inclusion of professional engineer's seal and signature; and
6. A scale bar will be provided when drawings are to scale.
(c) Plans shall be on nominal 2' X 3' sheets.
(d) All sheets shall be legible; each sheet shall have the title of the sheet, project name, name of the public water system.
(e) All revisions shall be so identified and include the registered professional engineer's seal and signature.
(f) Location and size of existing water mains.
(g) Location and nature of existing water system structures and appurtenances affecting the proposed improvements, noted on one sheet, and location plan showing project location(s) within the municipality.
1.3.2 Plan Sheets shall include:
(a) stream crossings, providing profiles with elevations of the stream bed and the normal and high and low water levels;
(b) profiles having a horizontal scale of not more than 100 feet to the inch and a vertical scale of not more than 20 feet to the inch, with both scales clearly indicated, and plan views having a scale of not more than 50 feet to the inch;
(c) location and size of the property to be used for the source development with respect to known references such as roads, streams, section lines, or streets;
(d) topography and arrangement of present or planned sources, roads, or structures, with contour intervals not greater than two feet, where necessary to detail construction grading and filling;
(e) elevations of the highest known flood level, floor of the structure, upper terminal of protective casings and outside surrounding grade, using a single datum which may be a National Geodetic Vertical Datum or United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, United States Geological Survey or equivalent elevations where applicable as reference;
(f) plat and profile drawings of source construction, showing diameter and depth of drill holes, casing and linear diameters and depths, grouting depths, elevations and designation of geological formations, water levels and other details to describe the proposed well completely;
(g) location of all existing and potential sources of pollution as outlined in Subchapter 21-16 of this Rule;
(h) size, length and identity of sewers, drains and water mains and their locations relative to plant structures, also preferred type of pipe shall be indicated on the plan;
(i) schematic flow diagrams and hydraulic profiles showing the flow through various plant units;
(j) piping in sufficient detail to show flow through the plant, including waste lines;
(k) locations of all chemical storage areas, feeding equipment and points of chemical application;
(l) all appurtenances, specific structures, equipment, water treatment plant waste disposal units and points of discharge having any relationship to the plans for water mains and/or water system structures;
(m) locations of sanitary or other potentially contaminating facilities, such as lavatories, showers, toilets, and lockers, when applicable or required by the Secretary;
(n) locations, dimensions, and elevations of all proposed plant facilities;
(o) locations of all sampling taps; and
(p) adequate description of any features not otherwise covered by the specifications
(q) Service connection detail must be provided. Curb stops must be shown on plan drawings, and they must be incapable of conveying surface loads onto the service line.
(r) Any connection between potable water and building sprinkler/fire protection systems must be shown and a state accepted method of preventing backflow provided.
Part 2 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Introduction

This Part applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems; and
(b) Domestic Bottled water systems.
2.0 General

The design of a water system or treatment process encompasses a broad area. Application of this part is dependent upon the type of system or process involved.

2.1 Design Basis

The water treatment plant, water system sources, and pump stations shall be designed for maximum day demand at the design year, recommended 20 years hence. Water system treatment plants, for water systems planning on future growth, shall be designed for maximum day demands expected at least 10 years hence. Water mains and transmission lines shall be designed for 50 years projected growth. Public water systems serving fewer than 100 connections, such as condominiums or subdivisions, need only plan for known projected demand. Specific per capita per day demands as outlined in Subpart 2.2, Table A2-1, shall be used to establish initial average day demand.

When a water system, expecting future growth, reaches 90% of the capacity of treatment or pumping systems capacity, it shall commence planning for the required additional capacity. When pumping or treatment capacities reach 100%, the water system shall initiate construction of these facilities.

2.2 Water Demand

Source yields will be compared against the maximum demands of the water systems to determine the adequacy of the source(s) to meet the expected demand.

2.2.1 Average Day Demands

The source's ability to meet the average day demand is based on pumping 12 hours per day. When a water system's average day demand is being met by pumping in excess of 12 hours per day at the permitted rate the water system shall immediately apply for additional source capacity.

2.2.1.1 For design of new systems or modification to systems without metered data records, the average day demands shall be based on the average day flow quantities in Table A2-1.
2.2.1.2 Reduction in average day demands determined using Table A2-1 may be made based on the results of metered data. Reductions below 60 gal/person/day will not be permitted in residential dwellings. A 10% leakage/aging factor will be added to empirically derived average day demands. Four types of proposals may be presented to determine reductions in the average day demands.
(a) Meter readings on the existing water system:
(1) Must be tabulated on a daily basis for at least one year and readings must represent current usage;
(2) Must include daily population figures or occupancy data when appropriate; and
(3) On seasonally occupied dwellings, average day demands must be taken for period of maximum occupancy.
(b) Meter readings on existing similar water systems:
(1) must be similar in population type and usage and must be approved for study by the Secretary, and
(2) two similar water systems should be monitored for at least one year prior to analysis.
(c) Installation of low flow plumbing fixtures, 3.5 gallon or less flush toilets, 3.0 gallon per minute or fewer showerheads, and faucet aerators will allow for a 10% reduction in design flows as calculated from Table A2-1.
(d) Other proposals, acceptable to the Secretary, on a case by case basis.
2.2.2 Maximum Day Demand

When the peaking factor is two (2), meeting the maximum day demand is based on finished water production when pumping 24 hours per day at the same rate (GPM) as needed to meet the average day demand.

Maximum day demands are determined as follows:

Average day demands x peaking factor = maximum day demands. In the absence of site specific data the peaking factor shall be two (2).

Please note that the basis of design, including the definitions for average day demand and maximum day demand differ in Part 11, Small Scale Systems.

2.2.3 Peaking factor
2.2.3.1 The peaking factor on new projects and non-metered existing projects is two (2).
2.2.3.2 The peaking factor, if based on metered data, must be based on the same information and conditions outlined in Appendix A Subpart 2.2.1.2, and is the ratio of the metered maximum day demand to the metered average day demand. The maximum day demand is the greatest amount of water produced by the water system on a single day during a 12 month period, or other appropriate time period.

Table A2-1 -UNITIZED AVERAGE DAY FLOWS

Engineering Design Criteria Unitized Average Day Flow Quantities

ESTABLISHMENT

DESIGN VALUE

Gallons Per Person Per Day(Unless otherwise noted below)

Assembly Areas, Conference Rooms

5

Airports

5

Bathhouses

5

Bowling Alley (no food service)

75

Per Lane

Camps:

Campground with central comfort stations (4 people per site

100

Per Site

With flush toilets, no showers (4 people per site)

75

Per Site

Construction Camps (semi-permanent)

50

Day camps (no meals served)

15

Day Care Centers

15

Per Child or Employee, Per Shift

Resort camps (night & day) with limited plumbing

50

Cafeterias

50

Per Seat

Churches

Sanctuary seating x 25%

5

Church Suppers

8

Cottages

50

Country Clubs

100

Per Resident Member

Country Clubs

25

Per Non-Resident Member Present

Dairy Farms

20

per tie-up

Dentists' Office

35

Per Staff Member

Plus

200

Per Chair

Doctors' Office

35

Per Staff Member

Plus

10

Per Patient

Dwellings

Apartments

75

Per Person with Minimum of 2 People Per Bedroom

Boarding Houses

50

Plus Addition for non-resident boarders

10

Multiple dwelling (condominiums, town houses, clustered housing)

75

Per Person with Minimum of 2 People/Bedroom

Den with Couch

55

Rooming House

40

Per Occupant Bed Space

Single Family Dwellings

150

Per Bedroom

Factories

15

Gallons Per Person, Per Shift, exclusive of Industrial Wastes

Gyms

10

Per Participant

3

Per Spectator

Hairdressers

10

Per Operator

Plus

150

Per Chair

Hotels ** with Private Baths

50

Per Sleeping Space

Hospitals

250

Per Bed

Institutions other than hospitals

125

Per Bed

Laundries, self-service

500

Per Machine

Mobile Home Parks

Systems Serving 4 or fewer trailers

450

Per Space

Systems Serving 5 or more trailers

250

Per Space

Motels ** with private baths

50

Per Sleeping Space

Nursing Homes

125

Picnic Parks (toilet waste only/picnickers)

5

Restaurants (toilet and kitchen wastes, including restaurant and bar seats)

30

Per Seat

Additional for restaurant serving 3 meals per day

15

Per Seat

Restaurants (fast food-see Cafeteria)

Schools

Boarding

100

Day, without gyms, cafeterias & showers

15

Day, with gyms, cafeterias & showers

25

Day, with cafeteria, but without gyms and showers

20

Service Stations

500

First set of gas pumps

Plus

300

Each set thereafter

Shopping Centers/Stores;

Large Dry Goods

5

Per 100 Square Feet

Large supermarkets with meat department, without garbage grinder

7.5

Per 100 Square Feet

Large supermarkets with meat department, with garbage grinder

11

.Per 100 Square Feet

Small Dry Goods (in shopping centers)

100

Per Store

Subdivision

450

Per Lot or 150 Gallons Per Day Per Bedroom, whichever is larger

Theaters

Movie

5

Per Auditorium Seat

Drive-in

5

Per Car Space

Travel trailer parks without individual water & sewer hookups

Comfort Station

90

Per Trailer Space

Dumping Station

35

Per Trailer Space

Travel trailer parks with individual water & sewer hookups

125

Per Trailer Space

Veterinary clinic (3 or fewer doctors)

Without animal boarding

750

Per Clinic

With animal boarding

1500

Per Clinic

Workers

Construction (at semi-permanent camp)

50

Day at schools and offices

15

Per Person Per Shift

*Elderly housing may be calculated at 1.5 people per bedroom.

**Does not include laundry or restaurant demand.

2.3 Plant Layout

Design shall consider:

a) functional aspects of the plant layout
b) provisions for future plant expansion
c) provisions for expansion of the plant waste treatment and disposal facilities
d) access roads
e) site grading
f) site drainage
g) walks, driveways and ramps
h) chemical delivery
2.4 Building Layout

Design shall provide for:

a) adequate ventilation
b) adequate lighting and heating
c) adequate drainage
d) dehumidification equipment, if necessary
e) accessibility of equipment for operation, servicing and removal
f) flexibility of operation
g) operator safety
h) convenience of operation
i) chemical storage and feed equipment in a separate room to reduce hazards and dust problems
2.5 (Reserved)
2.6 Electrical Controls

Main switch gear electrical controls shall be located above grade, in areas not subject to flooding. All electrical panels, including control panels, shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing agency.

2.7 Standby Power

Standby power may be required so that water may be treated and/or pumped to the distribution system during power outages. If not proposed as part of the project, the engineer shall provide reasons for not including standby power.

2.8 Shop Space and Storage

Adequate facilities should be included for shop space and storage consistent with the needs of the designed facilities.

2.9 Laboratory Equipment

Each Public water system shall have minimum equipment and facilities for laboratory testing as approved by the Secretary and as necessary to assure proper operation. Laboratory equipment shall be based on the characteristics of the raw water source and the complexity of the treatment process involved.

2.9.1 Testing Equipment

As a minimum, or as approved by the Secretary, the following laboratory equipment shall be provided:

a) Surface water systems shall have a nephelometric turbidimeter meeting the requirements of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, latest edition.
b) Each surface water treatment plant shall have a pH meter.
c) Each iron and/or manganese removal plant shall have test equipment capable of accurately measuring iron to a minimum of 0.1 mg/l and/or test equipment capable of accurately measuring manganese to a minimum of 0.03 mg/l.
d) Public water systems which chlorinate shall have test equipment for determining both free and total chlorine residual using the N,N-diethyl-p-phenylenediamine colorimetric method in Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, latest edition.
e) Public water systems which fluoridate shall have test equipment for determining fluoride by methods in Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, latest edition.
f) Public water systems which feed polyphosphates shall have test equipment capable of accurately measuring phosphates from 0.1 to 20 mg/l.
2.9.2 Physical facilities

Sufficient bench space, ventilation, lighting, safety equipment, storage and a laboratory sink shall be provided.

2.10 Monitoring Equipment

Water treatment plants shall have monitoring equipment to monitor water being discharged to the distribution system as follows:

a) Plants treating surface water must have the capability of monitoring and recording turbidity to meet the requirements of Section 6.4. Free chlorine must be monitored daily per Subsection 7.2.3.
b) Plants treating groundwater shall have the capability to monitor and record free chlorine residual.
2.11 Sample Taps

Sample taps shall be provided so that water samples can be obtained from each water source and from appropriate locations in each unit operation of treatment. Taps shall be consistent with sampling needs and shall not be of the petcock type. Taps used for obtaining samples for bacteriological analysis shall be of the smooth nosed type without interior or exterior threads, shall not be of the mixing type, and shall not have a screen, aerator, or other such appurtenance. Provision shall be made for sampling untreated well water using a sampling tap.

2.12 Facility Water Supply

The facility water supply service line and the plant finished water sample tap shall be supplied from a source of finished water at a point where all chemicals have been thoroughly mixed, and the required disinfectant contact time has been achieved (see Appendix A Subpart 4.3.2). There shall be no cross connections between the facility water supply service line and any piping, troughs, tanks, or other treatment units containing wastewater, treatment chemicals, raw or partially treated water.

2.13 Wall Castings

Whenever pipes pass through walls of concrete structures, consideration shall be given to providing extra wall castings built into the structure to facilitate future uses.

2.14 Meters

All water systems shall have an acceptable means of metering the finished water.

2.15 Piping Color Code

To facilitate identification of piping in plants and pumping stations, it is recommended that the following color scheme will be utilized.

Chemical Lines

Water Lines

Raw

Olive green

Settled or Clarified

Aqua

Finished or Potable

Dark blue

Alum or Primary Coagulant

Orange

Ammonia

White

Carbon Slurry

Black

Caustic

Yellow/green band

Chlorine (Gas and Solution)

Yellow

Fluoride

Light blue/red band

Lime Slurry

Light green

Ozone

Yellow/orange band

Phosphate Compounds

Light green/red band

Polymers or Coagulant Aids

Orange/ green band

Potassium Permanganate

Violet

Soda Ash

Light green/orange band

Sulfuric Acid

Yellow/red band

Sulfur Dioxide

Light green/yellow band

Waste Lines

Backwash Waste

Light brown

Sludge

Dark brown

Sewer (Sanitary or Other)

Dark gray

Other

Compressed Air

Dark green

Gas

Red

Other lines

Light gray

In situations where two colors do not have sufficient contrast to easily differentiate between them, a six-inch band of contrasting color will be on one of the pipes at approximately 30 inch intervals.

The name of the liquid or gas will also be on the pipe. In some cases it may be advantageous to provide arrows indicating the direction of flow.

2.16 Disinfection Prior To Use

All walls, pipe, tanks, and equipment which can convey or store potable water shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA procedures. See Appendix A Subparts 7.0.19 and 8.5.7 for details. Plans or specifications shall outline the procedure and include the disinfectant dosage, contact time, and method of testing the results of the procedure. The tablet method is not acceptable.

2.17 Manuals and Parts Lists

An operation and maintenance manual (see Appendix D) including equipment maintenance and a parts list shall be supplied to the water system as part of any proprietary unit installed in the facility.

2.18 Operator Instruction

Provision shall be made for operator instruction at the start up of a water system water treatment plant or pumping station.

2.19 Other Considerations

Consideration must be given to the design requirements of other federal, state, and local regulatory agencies for items such as safety requirements, special designs for the handicapped, plumbing and electrical codes and construction in or near the flood plain.

Part 3 PUBLIC WATER SYSTEM SOURCE DEVELOPMENT AND PROTECTION

Introduction

This Part applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems with surface water sources and sources determined to be ground water under the direct influence of surface water;
(c) Public Transient water systems with surface water sources and sources determined to be ground water under the direct influence of surface water; and
(d) Domestic Bottled water systems.
3.0 General

In selecting the source of water to be developed, the applicant for a Source Permit shall show, to the satisfaction of the Secretary, that an adequate quantity of water will be available, and that the water which is to be delivered to the consumers will meet the current requirements of the Secretary with respect to microbiological, physical, chemical and radiological qualities. Each water system should take its raw water from the best available source which is economically reasonable and technically feasible. Proposed sources are evaluated against six criteria; site, construction, water quality, water quantity, interference, and source protection.

Not all subparts of Part 3 of Appendix A may be relevant for a pre-existing source. The applicant is advised to consult with the Secretary for further guidance.

General procedural requirements for a Source Permit are outlined in Subchapter 4. Technical requirements for surface water are in Appendix A Subpart 3.2 and for groundwater in Appendix A Subpart 3.3.

3.1 Reserved
3.2 Surface Water Development

A surface water source includes all tributary streams and basins, natural lakes and artificial or natural impoundments above the point of water supply intake.

3.2.1 Source Permit
3.2.1.1 Source Permit Application (See Subchapters 3 and 4 for details)
(a) A Source Permit will be based in part on existing threats to the water sources and the ability of the water supplier to effectively manage those threats.
(b) Land within a 200 feet isolation zone of the intake (or as approved by the Secretary) shall be owned or legally controlled by the water system as in Subpart 3.3.1.2(f). Land uses not permitted_ within 200' of the intake are listed in Subpart 3.3.1.2(e).
(c) Fencing of the intake site may be required by the Secretary.
3.2.2 Construction
3.2.2.1 Design of intake structures shall provide for:
(a) withdrawal of water from more than one level if quality varies with depth;
(b) separate facilities for release of less desirable water held in storage;
(c) where frazil ice may be a problem, holding the velocity of flow into the intake structure to a minimum, generally not to exceed 0.5 feet per second;
(d) inspection manholes every 1000 feet for pipe sizes large enough to permit visual inspection;
(e) occasional cleaning of the inlet line;
(f) adequate protection against rupture by dragging anchors, ice, etc.; and
(g) ports located above the bottom of the stream, lake or impoundment, but at sufficient depth to be kept submerged at low water levels.
3.2.2.2 Natural and Artificial Impoundments

Site preparation shall provide for, where applicable:

(a) removal of brush and trees to high water elevation;
(b) protection from floods during construction;
(c) closure of all wells which will be inundated, in accordance with requirements of the Secretary; and
(d) obtaining necessary approvals and permits from other local, state, or federal agencies.
3.2.2.3 Filtration Requirement

All surface water sources shall be filtered and disinfected, or receive an avoidance of filtration waiver, in accordance with Section 6.2 of Subchapter 21-6.

3.2.3 Quantity
3.2.3.1 Safe Yield Analysis

The quantity of water at the source shall be shown to supply the design year average day demands given either a 1Q20 low flow condition for intakes without raw water impoundments; or a 20 to 50 year drought condition using a mass diagram for systems with raw water impoundments, and shall consider other withdrawals in the stream, including minimum stream flow requirements of the Secretary.

3.2.3.2 Quantity Testing

In the absence of suitable long term gaged flows, existing information from surrounding watersheds may be used. Hydrology models used to predict low flow conditions must include gaged flows from the water shed in question. The proposed watershed shall be _gaged on a daily basis during at least 30 days of the year's low flow conditions. Low flow conditions may be late summer and mid winter depending on the watershed. The method proposed for determination shall be approved by the Secretary prior to use.

3.2.4 Water Quality

The proposed source shall be tested for the water quality constituents listed in Table 6-1 of this rule, except for the disinfection by-products and disinfection residuals, and any additional constituents that the Secretary requires. Section 6.14 contains information about Maximum Contaminant Level Goals.

3.2.5 Source Interference

Interference with existing withdrawals shall be evaluated. The proposed withdrawal rate shall not create a potential health hazard nor interfere with existing uses of the surface water source. These existing uses are to be identified by the applicant. These shall include but not be limited to: deeded or legislated water rights, uses for minimum stream flow, and uses for assimilative capacity.

3.2.6 Source Protection

A source protection area shall be delineated for the surface water source and a source protection plan (see Subchapter 21-16) shall be developed which mitigates risks associated with existing and potential sources of contamination.

3.2.6.1 Delineation

Source protection areas delineation for surface water sources shall include the following zones:

(a) Zone 1 shall consist of an area 200 feet in radius around the intake or as otherwise determined by the Secretary.
(b) Zone 2 shall consist of areas within the watershed located within 200 feet of perennial surface water and limited to 17,000 acres.
(c) Zone 3 shall consist of the remaining watershed area beyond Zones 1 and 2, except as may be reduced by the Secretary on a case-by-case basis giving consideration to the size of the watershed and the likelihood of contamination of the source.
3.2.6.2 Source Protection Plan (SPP)

A Source Protection Plan shall be developed in accordance with Subchapter 21-16.

3.3 Groundwater Source Development

A groundwater source includes all water obtained from dug, drilled, bored or driven wells, springs, and infiltration lines and galleries. The degree of treatment required for a groundwater source may be similar to that of surface water sources in cases where the groundwater source is under the direct influence of surface waters as determined in Subpart 3.4.

3.3.1 Source Site and Isolation Zone
3.3.1.1 General Information on Sites

Proposed source site locations shall be remote from all sources of contamination, hydraulically upgradient of major sources of contamination, and situated so as to minimize the impact from water quality threats. Proposed source sites will not be approved by the Secretary in areas which may create a public health hazard or unacceptable risk. Fencing or posting of source sites to restrict access may be required by the Secretary on a case-by-case basis. On site sewage disposal systems located within the recharge area shall be located a minimum of a two year travel time in saturated materials from proposed source sites.

3.3.1.2 Source Isolation Zones

The source isolation zone shall be a water system controlled 200' radius around the proposed source unless approved otherwise based on site specific considerations as follows.

(a) The isolation zone may be increased at the discretion of the Secretary to insure reasonable protection of water system sources.
(b) source isolation zone reductions to a minimum of 125', may be allowed if the following can be shown:
(1) An impeding layer of soil is present and located at least 200' around the source, with no significant hydraulic connection to the proposed aquifer. Hydraulic connection, or lack thereof, between aquifers must be determined by standard pumping test methods including:
i) stressing the production well or proposed aquifer,
ii) monitoring the aquifer's response in multi-level piezometers, and
iii) mapping areas of influence of the source in overlying unconfined aquifers.

or:

(2) Undevelopable land surrounds the source site such as rock cliffs.
(c) Spring isolation zones may be reduced in a down slope direction provided that the area down slope of the spring is below the bottom elevation of the spring. This area must be large enough to include space for maintenance of the spring. In no cases shall a spring isolation zone be reduced to less than 50 feet in the down slope direction.
(d) All proposed groundwater sources shall be evaluated for direct influence by surface water as per Appendix A Part 3.
(e) Permitted and prohibited land uses in the source isolation zone are as follows:
(1) Permitted land uses will be restricted to:
(i) source operation and maintenance;
(ii) playgrounds, ball fields, tennis courts;
(iii) seasonal light duty roads;
(iv) conservation zones;
(v) controlled use of potassium and phosphorous fertilizers; and
(vi) other uses which have the approval of the Secretary.
(2) Prohibited land uses include:
(i) application of nitrogen, pesticides and herbicides;
(ii) buildings other than those required for the water system;
(iii) parking of motor vehicles;
(iv) chemical or fuel storage except natural gas or propane and other chemicals that are required by the water system;
(v) swimming pools;
(vi) salted or paved roads passing through the area;
(vii) septic tanks, subsurface disposal systems and sewer lines; and
(viii) any other activity which may contaminate the water source.
(f) Control of land use activities within the source isolation zone can be achieved by ownership of the land or through easements with restrictive covenants. The applicant's attorney must submit a written certification attesting that the applicant has the ability to control the isolation zone per Appendix A Subpart 3.3.1.2(e). The applicant shall provide documentation on request by the Secretary.

Legal control of land uses within the isolation zone by the water system must be tied to the land deeds for all parcels within the source isolation zone and run with the land regardless of future land ownership so long as the source is used for a Public water system.

(g) Proposed site locations shall follow isolation and separation distances as described in Table 11-1 except where an isolation zone has been defined. In those instances, section 3.3.1.2 (e) (2) applies.
3.3.2 Source Construction

Construction of Public water system drilled wells shall comply with the well construction standards in Part 12 of Appendix A.

All drilled or driven wells shall have a physical means of protecting the above grade well casing from collisions by installation of a permanent barrier, such as surrounding posts, a containing structure, or fencing.

3.3.2.1 Spring and Shallow Well Construction

Construction of springs and shallow wells shall only be permitted when drilled wells are not feasible or upon waiver by the Secretary. Specific reasons shall be submitted to the Secretary and may include results of test wells on the project site, results of existing well yields in the project area, or detailed hydrogeologic analysis. 3.3.2.1.1 Construction Materials

Acceptable materials include:

(a) concrete tiles (grouted together),
(b) poured in place concrete,
(c) well casing, and
(d) other metallic or plastic casing as approved by the Secretary.
3.3.2.1.2 Site Work

Spring and shallow well site construction shall include the following:

(a) accessible entrance with lock,
(b) screened openings,
(c) runoff diversion berm located 50 feet upslope where feasible,
(d) back fill material of high clay content sloping away from the structure,
(e) minimum of 4 inches of top soil over the clay, and
(f) a watertight sanitary cover.
3.3.2.2 Water Level Measurement
(a) Provisions shall be made for periodic measurements of water levels in the completed well, e.g. install 0.5 to 1" diameter probe tube.
(b) Where pneumatic water level measuring equipment is used, it shall be made using corrosion resistant materials attached firmly to the drop pipe or pump column and in such a manner as to prevent entrance of foreign materials.
3.3.2.3 Observation Wells shall be:
(a) Constructed in accordance with requirements for production wells and properly protected and maintained if to remain in service.
(b) Protected at the upper terminal to preclude entrance of foreign materials.
(c) Closed in accordance with requirements for permanent wells, if they are taken out of service.
3.3.3 Water Quantity
3.3.3.1 Safe Yield
(a) Pumped groundwater sources
(1) The source shall be capable of 180 days of pumping at the average day demand rate followed by a peak of 3 or 7 days of pumping at the maximum day demand rate without dewatering the source. The 7 day duration of maximum day demand pumping shall be applied to water systems serving developments constructed for the purpose of accessing recreational and resort areas. The 3 day duration of maximum day demand pumping is applied to all other water systems. Peaking duration is evaluated by the Secretary on a case-by-case basis. The maximum safe yield shall not be greater than the pump rate of the constant discharge test, except on a case-by-case basis where a 10% increase may be granted when supported by appropriate documentation.
(2) Sources which may be subjected to interference from existing sources shall have that interference evaluated per Appendix A Subpart 3.3.3.2.2(f).
(3) Proposed sources which may be subject to future interference shall be allowed to use only 90% of the total available head in the safe yield analysis. This requirement may be waived by the Secretary for wells belonging to the same Public water system.
(4) The safe yield determination shall take into consideration seasonal low static water level and hydrogeologic boundaries affecting the aquifer.
(b) Springs

Spring yields determined from random measurements throughout summer and fall shall be divided by 4 and compared against maximum day demands to determine the adequacy of the source. Springs issuing from a defined bedrock or sand and gravel aquifer, and having a detailed hydrologic low flow analysis will be compared against maximum day demands, in a 1Q20 drought condition.

Detailed hydrologic analysis must include at least the following:

(1) Monitoring of spring yield for low flow analysis on a weekly basis from July 1 to October 15 and from December 15 to March 15. The lowest flow during either period shall be used in the analysis.
(2) Monitoring of spring yield for high flow analysis on a weekly basis from March 15 to July 1 and from October 15 to December 15. The highest flow during either period shall be used in the calculation and delineation of the Source Protection Area(s).

All safe yield analyses shall use methodologies appropriate to the hydrogeologic setting and published methodologies, unless previously approved by the Secretary.

3.3.3.2 Pumping Test Procedures and Requirements

All pump tests shall consist of and be conducted in the following order: a step drawdown test, a constant discharge test, and a recovery test. The constant discharge test shall be conducted after full recovery from the step test. The recovery test shall immediately follow the constant discharge test. Tests shall be evaluated using standard published methodologies or any pre- approved proprietary method proposed by the consultant and approved by the Secretary. All recordings and evaluations (including graphical) appropriate to the testing program shall be provided to the Secretary.

3.3.3.2.1 Step drawdown tests shall:
(a) Contain at least 5 steps of at least 60 minutes duration.
(b) Hold discharge constant for the duration of each step. See table below under Constant Discharge Test (in Subpart 3.3.3.2.2) for discharge limits.
(c) Have drawdown measured to the nearest 10th of a foot.
(d) Recommended times for drawdown measurements are as follows:

0 - 10 minutes

every 1 minute

10 - 20 minutes

every 2 minutes

20 - 60 minutes

every 5 minutes

60+ minutes

every 10 minutes

(e) Provide a graph of drawdown / discharge vs. discharge (Sw/Q vs Q) and evaluation of the data collected above using published methodologies.
3.3.3.2.2 Constant Discharge Test

The constant discharge test shall be conducted after full recovery from the step test. The following table shall be used to determine the duration of constant discharge tests:

Pump Test Rate (GPM)

Duration

Constant Discharge Within:

0-49

72 hours

± 5%

50-99

96 hours

± 3%

100 or greater

120 hours

± 3%

The constant discharge test shall include but not be limited to the following:

(a) Discharge shall be held constant within the above limits. Ball-type valves shall be placed after meters to prevent turbulence in the meter. Meters shall be checked by another independent method, i.e., bucket and stopwatch.
(b) Drawdown measurements to the nearest 100th of a foot in observation wells and to the nearest 10th of a foot in production wells.
(c) Recommended times for drawdown and discharge measurements in the production well, including early time readings, are as follows:

TIME INTO TEST, MINS

READING FREQUENCY

0-10

every 1 minute

10-30

every 2 minutes

30-90

every 5 minutes

90-180

every 10 minutes

180-420

every 30 minutes

420-1440

every 60 minutes

1440-end of test

every 2 to 4 hours

(d) All observation wells, including water system sources, within the specified radius (see Appendix A Subpart 3.3.5.2 for the radius) shall be monitored and water level measurements shall be taken as follows:
(1) Water level measurements shall be taken every four (4) hours for two (2) days prior to and one (1) day following the constant discharge test.
(2) Water level measurements during the constant discharge test shall be taken at least every four (4) hours and more frequently based on the hydrogeologic setting and distance from the pumped source.
(3) Monitoring of water system sources in use shall include measurements taken at a time following their longest recovery period, usually between 3 and 5 A.M and monitoring increments of two hours apart during the day (6 P.M. to 6 A.M.) and four hours apart for the remaining hours shall be used.
(e) A graph of drawdown vs time on log-log or semi-log paper and distance vs drawdown, if two (2) or more observation wells are available, and an evaluation of this data using published methodologies.
(f) An evaluation of groundwater level trends for the production and monitored sources prior to pumping to evaluate seasonal or storm related fluctuations in groundwater conditions, effects of neighboring sources, and domestic usage patterns.
(g) Precipitation and discharge plotted on each graph of time drawdown for all sources monitored.
(h) The installation and monitoring of observation wells, piezometers or other monitoring devices as needed,
(i) Type and location of all observation wells shall be shown on engineering plan.
3.3.3.2.3 Constant Discharge Test Interruptions

The first 24 hours of the constant discharge test shall be free of interruptions. If an interruption occurs the test shall be terminated, the source allowed to fully recover and the test restarted. After the first twenty four (24) hours, if the constant discharge test is interrupted a total of two (2) hours or longer, the test shall be terminated, the source allowed to fully recover and the test re-started.

3.3.3.2.4 Recovery tests shall be conducted immediately following the constant discharge test and shall include the following:
(a) Drawdown measurements to the nearest 10th of a foot in the pumped source.
(b) Monitoring for two days or complete recovery, whichever occurs first.
(c) Monitoring of drawdown at timed intervals which will result in evenly spaced plots on logarithmic paper when plotted as s' vs t/t'. Recommended times of recovery measurement beginning when the pump is turned off are as follows:

RECOVERY TIME, MINS.

FREQUENCY

0-10

every 1 minute

10-20

every 2 minutes

20-60

every 5 minutes

60-120

every 15 minutes

120-360

every 60 minutes

360-600

every 120 minutes

600-2880

every 360 minutes

(d) Calculation of aquifer parameters from recovery data.
3.3.3.3 Approved Yield

Combined approved yield for all sources shall not exceed the system's maximum day demand except in the case of water systems serving municipalities where the approved yield may include the maximum day demand as projected over a 20 year time period. When a system's metered maximum day demand equals 90% of the previously projected maximum day demand, the water supplier should project a new maximum day demand and develop additional sources of water supply at that time.

3.3.4 Water Quality
3.3.4.1 The proposed source shall be tested for the water quality constituents listed in Table 6-1 of this rule, except for the disinfection by-products and disinfection residuals, and any additional constituents that the Secretary requires. Section 6.14 contains information about Maximum Contaminant Level Goals.
3.3.4.2 Samples shall be collected at the conclusion of the test pumping procedure.
3.3.4.3 Field determination of physical constituents or special sampling may be required by the Secretary.
3.3.4.4 A turbidity in excess of 5 NTU is not acceptable. Treatment may be required.
3.3.5 Source Interference

Source interference monitoring shall be conducted on all sources, when permitted by the source owner, within the monitoring radius defined in this subpart unless a waiver is granted by the Secretary. Source interference analyses determine whether a proposed pumping source will result in a source interference problem at a neighboring water system. See Appendix A Subpart 3.3.5.4 for the definition of unacceptable source interference.

3.3.5.1 Development of a Source Interference Testing Program.
(a) The proposed source interference testing program shall be detailed on the Source Testing Application Form.
(b) All source owners within the radial distances defined in Appendix A Subpart 3.3.5.2(c) shall be identified and notified in writing of the forthcoming test. The notification shall:
(1) Include an informational form letter supplied by the Secretary.
(2) Request monitoring permission and a written response;
(3) Define responsibility to prepare source for monitoring;
(4) State the monitoring radius requirement.
(5) Offer to disinfect and re-seal the source when the monitoring ends.
(6) Inform the source user and owner that the applicant will supply potable water or cease the pump test should their water supply needs not be met.
(7) Identify name and phone number of contact person in the event of a water outage during testing.
(c) If unable to monitor a neighbor's source, estimate source interference based on calculations.
(d) All sources identified per 3.3.5.2(c) shall be monitored, if possible.
(e) All sources monitored shall be disinfected at the end of the testing program when permitted by the source owner. Monitoring tubes and water level probes shall be disinfected prior to installation.
3.3.5.2 Data Collection for Source Interference Testing.
(a) All data specified in Subpart 3.3.3.2.2(d) shall be collected.
(b) Existing sources not in service should be measured to the nearest 0.01 foot. Sources in service should be measured to the nearest 0.10 foot.
(c) The following rates and distances shall be used for determining the study area for source interference monitoring. The monitor radius and duration may be increased at the discretion of the Secretary.

PUMP TEST RATE, GPM

MONITOR RADIUS

DURATION

0-19

1000 feet

72 hours

20-49

2000 feet

72 hours

50-99

2500 feet

96 hours

100+

3000 feet

120 hours

(d) Water usage and listing of sources in service.
3.3.5.3 Data Submittal

Source interference information shall be submitted in the Source Evaluation Report on forms provided by the Secretary.

3.3.5.4 Definition of Unacceptable Source Interference

If, as a result of source interference, existing Public and private water systems cannot meet their design demands, then a source interference problem exists. Applicants are advised to contact the Secretary for additional guidance on calculating interference effects on private water systems.

Public and private water systems depleted by the testing of proposed sources (and existing permitted sources seeking an increase in approved yield) shall be able to meet their expected demand while the proposed Public water system is pump tested for approval. Unless more specific information is available, the reliable long-term yield for a private source should be assumed to be one-half (1/2) the driller's reported yield. Depending upon system use, this long-term yield must satisfy the minimum values found in Table A2-1 in this rule for Public water systems.

Interference problems may also include water quality problems resulting from public source testing. Interference will be determined based on measurement or calculation of interference effects from the production source pumping at the approvable rate at the end of 180 days at average day demand plus 3 or 7 days at maximum day demand.

3.3.5.5 Resolution of Unacceptable Source Interference
(a) All unacceptable source interference shall be resolved to the satisfaction of the Secretary prior to the issuance of a Source Permit. The applicant is responsible for identification of all sources in use within the monitoring radius defined in Appendix A Subpart 3.3.5.2. The Secretary may either reduce the permitted yield or require additional testing or analysis to determine the impact upon the unmonitored source.
(b) Solutions may include:
(1) drill affected source deeper and test for water quantity.
(2) test affected source or re-evaluate existing data.
(3) Connect affected water system onto acceptable Public water system.
(4) develop an alternative water source for the affected source.
(5) Present water usage data from the affected water system which documents a reduction in water demand.
(6) For some private water systems, additional storage may be developed to offset the source interference.
(7) Hydrofracture the well or redevelop by other methods.
3.3.6 Source Protection

A Source Protection Area shall be delineated for the water system source and a Source Protection Plan shall be developed which minimizes, to the extent practicable, risks from potential sources of contamination.

3.3.6.1 Source Protection Areas (SPA) - General
(a) Delineation of Source Protection Areas is required for a new Public water system and for altering the permitted production rate.
(b) If a new Public water system well interferes with an existing Public water system and increases the source protection area of the existing source(s), then the applicant shall redelineate the source protection area for the affected existing source and shall follow the public notice requirements in Subchapter 21-4, subsection 4.1.1.3.
(c) Any increase in the risk of contamination to an existing Public water system caused by the expansion of its SPA due to pumping of a proposed well must be addressed by the applicant prior to source permitting for the new Public water system.
3.3.6.2 Source Protection Area Delineation
(a) Source protection areas shall be delineated using existing geologic and hydrogeologic data, and pumping test data. The applicant shall give consideration to the following:
(1) Hydrogeologic setting based on published and unpublished reports, well logs, fracture traces, on site observations, and other site specific information available;
(2) Pump testing at design production rate;
(3) Ambient non-pumping groundwater flow conditions based on topography and observation wells when available;
(4) Topography using U.S.G.S. topographic maps;
(5) Structure (fracture pattern, jointing, lineaments);
(6) Surficial and bedrock geology (rock types, depositional environment, etc.);
(7) Soils (type, thickness, hydraulic properties);
(8) The source's expected maximum use;
(9) Elevation of the source pump intake;
(10) Appropriate hydrogeologic models; and
(11) Seasonal maximum discharges of springs
(b) The delineation of a SPA is performed in conjunction with the Source Permit process described in Subchapter 21-4.
(1) Source Permit Application:

Identification of sources of contamination, development of a conceptual hydrogeologic model, and preliminary SPA based on existing data collection and assessment;

(2) Source Testing Application; Scope of Work:

The applicant shall propose the method of SPA delineation, state what data are to be collected from the pumping test and how it will be used in the SPA delineation. The proposal may include:

(i) Monitoring wells to determine distance drawdown relationship. Production wells in unconsolidated aquifers with intended production rates of 50 gpm or greater require a minimum of three (3) observation wells. A monitoring well plan and rationale shall be submitted for approval.
(ii) Water table or potentiometric surface fluctuations, groundwater flow pattern.
(iii) Effect of precipitation
(3) Source Evaluation Report

Each SPA shall be delineated after careful consideration of all existing information. The SPA shall be presented on a original unfolded USGS map of scale 1:24000 or as required by the Secretary. A georeferenced digital file of the area may also be submitted. This map shall include the following:

(i) Name and number of the project and source, and the town name.
(ii) Pumping rate of the source in GPM, maximum day demand.

A narrative which describes the following for each SPA shall be included in the Source Evaluation Report.

(i) Bedrock and surficial geology (rock types, depositional environment, etc.)
(ii) Structure (fracture pattern, jointing, lineaments)
(iii) Soils (type, thickness, stratification, hydraulic, properties)
(iv) Hydrogeologic setting and aquifer type
(v) Field Reconnaissance observations
(vi) Data Gaps which may be filled through future testing.

Note: As data is gathered during source development, refinement of the understanding of the groundwater flow system should occur. It is therefore expected that the methodologies employed for SPA delineation be adjusted to the hydrogeologic environment and that all existing data be considered to define a reasonable area to be used to protect the source.

3.3.6.3 SPA Zones

Source protection areas shall be delineated with the following zones, in a manner that reflects the hydrogeologic setting.

Zone 1 Shall consist of the isolation zone as described in Appendix A Subpart 3.3.1.2. This is the area where impacts are likely to be immediate and certain.

Zone 2 Shall consist of the contributions from the monitoring radius established in Appendix A Subpart 3.3.5.2(c), and outside the Zone 1 Isolation Zone. This area is one where there will be probable impacts from potential sources of contamination.

Zone 3 Shall consist of remaining recharge area(s) or area of contribution to the source not delineated as Zone 2 and where there may be possible impacts from potential sources of contamination. Groundwater under the direct influence of surface water shall include upstream areas in the watershed within 200 feet of any surface water potentially influencing the source.

2YTT Two year travel time (2YTT) zone shall be used to identify a protection area to provide adequate protection from pathogen threats resulting from onsite disposal of sewage.

3.3.6.4 Source Protection Plans

Source protection plans shall be developed for groundwater sources and shall meet the requirements of Subchapter 21-16.

3.3.7 Infiltration Galleries
(a) Two types of infiltration galleries are recognized by the Secretary.
(1) Groundwater induced infiltration galleries located so as to intercept ambient groundwater flow.
(2) Surface water induced infiltration galleries located so as to intercept surface water. Infiltration galleries within 200 feet of surface water are considered surface water induced infiltration galleries, unless detailed analysis of groundwater flow conditions and water quality determine waters to be acceptable groundwater.
(b) Groundwater induced infiltration galleries may be considered only where geological conditions preclude the feasibility of developing an acceptable drilled well.
(c) Infiltration galleries shall be regarded in the same manner as wells as far as sanitary isolation distance and land uses are concerned.
(d) Flow in the galleries shall be by gravity to the collecting well.
(e) Review Process

Infiltration galleries should only be considered when development of alternative sources is shown not to be technically viable.

(1) Groundwater induced infiltration galleries will be reviewed in a similar manner to wells.
(2) Surface water infiltration galleries will be reviewed on a case by case basis and may be considered surface water intakes.
3.4 Groundwater Under the Direct Influence of Surface Water (GWUDI)
3.4.1 Public Community Water Systems and Public Non-Transient Non-Community Water Systems
3.4.1.1 Criteria

All systems not otherwise exempted under Appendix A Subpart 3.4.1.2, and using groundwater sources, shall use the Microscopic Particulate Analysis (MPA) test when the source meets any one or more of the following criteria:

(a) The source has a history of water-borne disease;
(b) The source, within the most recent 3 year period, has had one or more violations of total coliform MCL or has failed to meet any total coliform monitoring requirements;
(c) The source is subject to annual flooding;
(d) There are construction defects or deficiencies that could allow surface water to directly enter the source;
(e) The source is a spring or infiltration gallery;
(f) The source has a tested capability to yield more than 500 gallons per minute;
(g) The source is less than 150 feet from a surface water body and:
(1) has less than 50 feet of soil over the screen, end of casing, or bedrock surface;
(2) has no confining layer; or
(3) has a direct hydraulic connection;
(h) The source is a bedrock well farther than 150 feet from the nearest surface water but has:
(1) less than 50 feet of watertight casing; and
(2) no confining layer.
(i) The source exhibits other convincing evidence of being under the direct influence of surface water.
3.4.1.2 Exemptions
(a) Systems are exempt from further testing when all available sources:
(1) are groundwater sources, but not springs or infiltration galleries; and
(2) are farther than 150 feet from the nearest surface water body; and for rock wells
(3) have more than 50 feet of watertight casing or a confining layer,
(b) Systems which pass the Microscopic Particulate Analysis tests are exempt from further testing.
3.4.2 Public Transient Non-Community Water Systems
3.4.2.1 Criteria

A water system shall conduct water quality testing if the Secretary determines a source is at risk of GWUDI. Sources are at risk of GWUDI when:

(a) there are construction defects or deficiencies exist that could allow surface water to directly enter the source;
(b) there are indications of water-borne disease outbreaks associated with the source;
(c) there is evidence of direct surface water contamination;
(d) there are surrounding sources of fecal contamination;
(e) the source is an infiltration gallery or dug well;
(f) the source is a gravel well or well point and less than or equal to 50 feet from surface water, and exhibits criteria listed in (a) through (e); or
(g) there is not enough information to make the determination.
3.4.2.2 Water Quality Testing
(a) Systems shall make improvements to obvious source construction defects that increase the source's vulnerability to surface water contamination before beginning testing;
(b) System shall perform six months of total coliform testing, including e-coli testing if fecal coliformpositive;
(c) System shall perform one spring MPA test if any confirmed total coliform-positive occurs during step (b) testing;
(d) System shall perform hydraulic connection analysis if the MPA laboratory is unable to adequately examine the requisite amount of sample.
3.4.2.3 GWUDI Determination

The Secretary will determine if the source is GWUDI based on the available information, site visits, and water quality testing data. The system shall provide the Secretary with the information needed to make this determination.

3.5 Standards for Public Non-Community Water System Sources
3.5.1 Water system sources for Public Non-Community water systems shall comply with the requirements found in Part 11 of Appendix A.
Part 4 WATER SUPPLY TREATMENT

Introduction

This Part applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-transient water systems;
(c) Public Transient water systems; and
(d) Domestic Bottled water systems.
4.0 General

The design of treatment processes and devices shall depend on evaluation of the nature and quality of the particular water to be treated and the desired quality of the finished water.

(a) All filtration facilities must be capable of producing finished water meeting the MCLs at in Subchapter 21-6, and the Giardia and viral standards at 40 CFR, § 141.70.
(b) Pilot studies are required on all non-conventional water treatment systems, where data on similar facilities in use on Vermont waters is not available.
(c) Pilot studies must address water qualities expected throughout the year including spring runoff and winter cold water.
(d) Pilot studies may not be required for conventional flocculation, sedimentation, filtration facilities.
(e) Best Available Technologies (BAT) shall be considered when a treatment technology is required under 40 CFR Parts 141 and 142.
(f) Pilot studies may be required by the Secretary for proposed applications of Granular Activated Carbon (GAC) treatment when other compounds in the water may interfere with effective GAC treatment.
4.1 Clarification

Plants designed for processing surface water shall:

(a) provide a minimum of two units each for rapid mix, flocculation and sedimentation,
(b) be constructed to allow units to be taken out of service without disrupting operation, and have drains or pumps sized to allow dewatering in a reasonable period of time,
(c) be started manually following shutdown, and
(d) minimize hydraulic head losses between units to allow future changes in processes without the need for re-pumping.
4.1.1 Rapid Mix

Rapid mix shall mean the rapid dispersion of chemicals throughout the water to be treated, usually by violent agitation.

(a) Equipment - Basins should be equipped with mechanical mixing devices.
(b) Mixing - The detention period should be no more than thirty seconds.
(c) Location - The rapid mix and flocculation basin shall be as close together as possible.
(d) Some systems may be able to use static mixers to accomplish rapid mixing.
4.1.2 Flocculation

Flocculation shall mean the agitation of water at low velocities for long periods of time.

(a) Basin Design - Inlet and outlet design shall prevent short circuiting and destruction of floc. A drain and/or pumps shall be provided to handle dewatering and sludge removal.
(b) Detention - The flow through velocity shall be not less than 0.5 nor greater than 1.5 feet per minute with a detention time for floc formation of at least 30 minutes.
(c) Equipment - Agitators shall be driven by variable speed drives with the peripheral speed of paddles ranging from 0.5 to 3.0 feet per second.
(d) Piping - Flocculation and sedimentation basins shall be as close together as possible. The velocity of flocculated water through pipes or conduits to settling basins shall be not less than 0.5 feet per second nor greater than 1.5 feet per second. Allowances must be made to minimize turbulence at bends and changes in direction.
(e) Other designs - Baffling may be used to provide for flocculation in small plants only after consultation with the Secretary. The design should be such that the velocities and flows noted above will be maintained.
(f) Accessibility - Flocculation basin should be designed for easy access and observation of floc.
(g) A superstructure over the basin may be required.
4.1.3 Sedimentation

Sedimentation shall follow flocculation. The detention time for effective clarification is dependent upon a number of factors related to basin design and the nature of the raw water. The following criteria apply to conventional sedimentation units.

(a) Detention time - Shall provide a minimum of four hours of settling time. Reduced sedimentation time may also be approved when equivalent effective settling is demonstrated.
(b) Inlet devices - Inlets shall be designed to distribute the water equally and at uniform velocities. Open ports, submerged ports, and similar entrance arrangements are required. A baffle should be constructed across the basin close to the inlet end and should project several feet below the water surface to dissipate inlet velocities and provide uniform flows across the basin.
(c) Outlet devices - Outlet devices shall be designed to maintain velocities suitable for settling in the basin and to minimize short circuiting. The use of submerged orifices is recommended in order to provide a volume above the orifices for storage where there are fluctuations in flow.
(d) Overflow rate - The rate of flow over the outlet weir shall not exceed 20,000 gpd per foot of weir length. Where submerged orifices are used as an alternate for overflow weirs, they should not be lower than three feet below the flow line with flow rates equivalent to weir loadings.
(e) Velocity - The velocity through settling basins shall not exceed 0.5 feet per minute. The basins must be designed to minimize short circuiting. Fixed or adjustable baffles must be provided as necessary to achieve the maximum potential for clarification.
(f) Overflow - An overflow weir (or pipe) should be installed which will establish the maximum water level desired on top of the filters. It shall discharge by gravity with a free fall at a location where the discharge will be noted.
(g) Superstructure - A superstructure over the sedimentation basin is required.
(h) Sludge collection - Mechanical sludge collection equipment should be provided.
(i) Drainage - Basins must be provided with a means for dewatering. Basin bottoms should slope toward the drain not less than one foot in twelve feet where mechanical sludge collection equipment is not required.
(j) Flushing lines - Flushing lines or hydrants shall be provided and must be equipped with back flow prevention devices acceptable to the Secretary.
(k) Safety - Permanent ladders or handholds should be provided on the inside walls of basins above the water level. Guard rails should be included.
(l) Sludge removal - Sludge removal design shall provide that:
(1) sludge pipes shall be not less than three inches in diameter and so arranged as to facilitate cleaning,
(2) entrance to sludge withdrawal piping shall prevent clogging,
(3) valves shall be located outside the tank for accessibility, and
(4) the operator may observe and sample sludge being withdrawn from the unit.
(m) Sludge disposal - Sludge disposal facilities shall meet the requirements of the Secretary (See Subpart 4.10.)
4.1.4 Solids Contact Unit

Units are acceptable for clarification where water characteristics are not variable and flow rates are uniform. Clarifiers should be designed for the maximum uniform rate and should be adjustable to changes in flow which are less than the design rate and for changes in water characteristics. A minimum of two units are required for surface water treatment.

4.1.4.1 Chemical Feed

Chemicals shall be applied at such points and by such means as to insure satisfactory mixing of the chemicals with the water.

4.1.4.2 Mixing

A rapid mix device or chamber ahead of solids contact units may be required by the Secretary to assure proper mixing of the chemicals applied. Mixing devices employed shall be so constructed as to:

(a) provide good mixing of raw water with previously formed sludge particles, and
(b) prevent deposition of solids in the mixing zones.
4.1.4.3 Sludge Concentrators

The equipment should provide either internal or external concentrators in order to obtain a concentrated sludge with a minimum of waste water.

4.1.4.4 Sludge Removal
(a) Sludge pipes shall be not less than three inches in diameter and so arranged as to facilitate cleaning,
(b) entrance to sludge withdrawal piping shall prevent clogging,
(c) valves shall be located outside the tank for accessibility, and
(d) the operator may observe and sample sludge being withdrawn from the unit.
4.1.4.5 Detention Period

The detention period shall be as approved by the Secretary based on the individual units used, and the raw water characteristics.

4.1.4.6 Water losses
(a) Units shall be provided with suitable controls for sludge withdrawal.
(b) Total water losses should not exceed five percent (5%) for clarifiers.
4.1.4.7 Weirs or Orifices

The units should be equipped with either overflow weirs or orifices constructed so that water at the surface of the unit does not travel over 10 feet horizontally to the collection trough.

(a) Weirs shall be adjustable, and at least equivalent in length to the perimeter of the tank.
(b) Weir loading shall not exceed 10 gpm per foot of weir length for units used for clarifiers, and
(c) Where orifices are used the loading per foot of launder rates should be equivalent to weir loadings. Either shall produce uniform rising rates over the entire area of the tank.
4.1.4.8 Upflow Rates

Unless supporting data is submitted to the Secretary to justify rates exceeding the following, the rate of flow shall not exceed 1.0 gpm per square foot of area at the sludge separation line.

4.1.5 Tube or plate settlers

Proposals for settler unit clarification must include pilot plant and/or full scale demonstration satisfactory to the Secretary prior to the preparation of final plans and specifications for approval.

4.2 Filtration

Acceptable filters shall include, at the discretion of the Secretary, the following types:

(a) rapid rate gravity filters;
(b) rapid rate pressure filters;
(c) slow sand filtration;
(d) direct filtration;
(e) diatomaceous earth filtration; or
(f) other technology as approved by the Secretary.

The application of any one type must be supported by water quality data representing a reasonable period of time to characterize the variation in water quality. Experimental treatment studies may be required to demonstrate the applicability of the method of filtration proposed.

4.2.1 Rapid Rate Gravity Filters
4.2.1.1 Pretreatment

The use of rapid rate gravity filters shall require pretreatment through the addition of constituents to enhance the treatment process.

4.2.1.2 Rate of Filtration

The rate of filtration shall be determined through consideration of such factors as raw water quality, degree of pretreatment provided, filter media, water quality control parameters, competency of operating personnel, and other factors as required by the Secretary. In any case, the filter rate must be proposed and justified by the designing engineer to the satisfaction of the Secretary prior to the preparation of final plans and specifications.

4.2.1.3 Total Filter Capacity Determination
(a) At least two units shall be provided. Where only two units are provided each shall be capable of meeting the plant design capacity (the projected maximum daily demand) at the approved filtration rate. Where more than two filter units are provided, the filters shall be capable of meeting the plant design capacity at the approved filtration rate with one filter removed from service. Where declining rate filtration is provided, the variable aspect of filtration rates, and the number of filters must be considered when determining the design capacity for the filters.
(b) The reserve capacity of water treatment plants constructed between 1980 and 1992 shall be determined under the previous practices until 2011. These previous practices required the plant capacity to meet average daily demand with one filter off line and maximum daily demand with all filters operating. Any new water treatment plant construction or major modification beginning after January 1, 1993, requires use of the new standards for design as described in Appendix A Subpart 4.2.1.3(a).
4.2.1.4 Structural details and hydraulics

The filter structure shall be so designed as to provide for:

(a) vertical walls within the filter;
(b) no protrusion of the filter walls into the filter media;
(c) head room to permit normal inspection and operation;
(d) minimum water depth over the surface of the filter media of three (3) feet;
(e) trapped effluent to prevent back flow of air to the bottom of the filters;
(f) prevention of floor drainage to the filter with a minimum of 4 inch curb around the filters;
(g) prevention of flooding by providing overflow;
(h) maximum velocity of treated water in pipe and conduits to filters of two feet per second;
(i) cleanouts and straight alignment for influent pipes or conduits where solids loading is heavy;
(j) washwater drain capacity to carry maximum flow;
(k) safety handrails or walls around filter areas adjacent to normal walkways; and
(l) construction to prevent cross connections and common walls between potable and non- potable water.
4.2.1.5 Washwater troughs

Washwater troughs should be constructed to have:

(a) the bottom elevation above the maximum level of expanded media during washing;
(b) a two inch freeboard at the maximum rate of wash;
(c) the top edge level and all at the same elevation;
(d) spacing so that each trough serves the same number of square feet of filter area; and
(e) maximum horizontal travel of suspended particles to reach the trough not to exceed three feet.
4.2.1.6 Filter material

The media shall be clean silica sand or other natural or synthetic media approved by the Secretary, having the following characteristics:

(a) a total depth of not less than 24 inches and generally not more than 30 inches;
(b) an effective size range of the smallest material no greater than 0.45 to 0.55 mm;
(c) a uniformity coefficient of the smallest material not greater than 1.65; and
(d) a minimum of 12 inches of media with an effective size range no greater than 0.45 mm to 0.55, and a specific gravity greater than other filtering materials within the filter.
(e) Types of filter media:
(1) Anthracite - Clean crushed anthracite, or a combination of anthracite and other media may be considered on the basis of experimental data specific to the project, and shall have:
(i) effective size of 0.45 mm to 0.55 mm with uniformity coefficient not greater than 1.65 when used alone;
(ii) effective size of 0.8 mm to 1.2 mm with a uniformity coefficient not greater than 1.85 when used as a cap;
(iii) effective size for anthracite used on potable groundwater for iron and manganese removal only shall be a maximum of 0.8 mm (effective sizes greater than 0.8 mm may be approved based upon onsite pilot plant studies).
(2) Sand - sand shall have:
(i) effective size of 0.45 mm to 0.55 mm; and
(ii) uniformity coefficient of not greater than 1.65.
(3) Other media - Other media will be considered based on experimental data and operating experience.
(5) Gravel - Gravel, when used as the supporting media, shall consist of hard, rounded particles and shall not include flat or elongated particles. The coarsest gravel shall be 2-1/2 inches in size when the gravel rests directly on the strainer system, and must extend above the top of the perforated laterals. Not less than four layers of gravel shall be provided in accordance with the following size and depth distribution when used with perforated laterals:

Size

Depth

2-1/2 to 1-1/2 inches

5 to 8 inches

1-1/2 to 3/4 inches

3 to 5 inches

3/4 to 1/2 inches

3 to 5 inches

1/2 to 3/16 inches

2 to 3 inches

3/16 to 3/32 inches

2 to 3 inches

Reduction of gravel depths may be considered upon justification to the Secretary when proprietary filter bottoms are specified.

4.2.1.7 Filter bottoms and strainer systems

Departures from these standards may be acceptable for high rate filters and for proprietary bottoms. Porous plate bottoms shall not be used where iron or manganese may clog them or with waters softened by lime. Manifold type collection systems shall be designed to:

(a) minimize loss of head in the manifold materials; and
(b) assure even distribution of washwater and even rate of filtration over the entire area of the filter.
4.2.1.8 Surface wash or subsurface wash

Surface or subsurface wash facilities are recommended and may be accomplished by a system of fixed nozzles or a revolving type apparatus. All devices shall be designed with:

(a) provision for water pressure of at least 45 psi;
(b) a properly installed vacuum breaker or other approved device to prevent back siphonage if connected to the treated water system;
(c) rate of flow of 2.0 gallons per minute per square foot of filter area with fixed nozzles or 0.5 gallons per minute per square foot with revolving arms; and
(d) air wash can be considered based on experimental data and operating experiences.
4.2.1.9 Appurtenances

The following shall be provided for every filter:

(a) influent and effluent sampling taps;
(b) means for measuring head loss;
(c) a flow meter. A modified rate controller which limits the rate of filtration to a maximum rate may be used. However, equipment that simply maintains a constant water level on the filters is not acceptable, unless the rate of flow onto the filter is properly controlled. A pump or a flow meter in each filter effluent line may be used as the limiting device for the rate of filtration only after consultation with the Secretary;
(d) filter to waste provision; and
(e) provisions for draining the filter to waste with appropriate measures for back flow prevention (see Appendix A Subpart 4.10).

It is recommended the following be provided for every filter:

(a) a continuous or rotating cycle turbidity recording device for surface water treatment plants, and
(b) a 1 to 1-1/2 inch pressure hose and storage rack at the operating floor for washing filter walls.
4.2.2 Rapid rate pressure filters

The use of these filters is not recommended and generally not approved since their effectiveness is easily reduced and their operation difficult to monitor, however, they may be the only economic solution in certain circumstances.

4.2.2.1 General

Minimum criteria relative to number, rate of filtration, structural details and hydraulics, filter media, etc., provided for rapid rate gravity filters also apply to pressure filters where appropriate.

4.2.2.2 Rate of filtration

The rate shall not exceed three gallons per minute per square foot of filter area, except where pilot study or in plant testing as approved by the Secretary has demonstrated satisfactory results at higher rates.

4.2.2.3 Details of design

The filters shall be designed to provide for:

(a) a minimum of two sight ports (except for iron and manganese removal filters);
(b) a differential head loss gauge;
(c) an easily readable meter or flow indicator on each battery of filters. A flow indicator is recommended for each filtering unit;
(d) filtration and backwashing of each filter individually with an arrangement of piping as simple as possible to accomplish these purposes;
(e) filter media shall comply with Appendix A Subpart 4.2.1.6;
(f) the top of the washwater collectors to be at least 18 inches above the surface of the media;
(g) the under drain system to efficiently collect the filtered water and to uniformly distribute the backwash water at a rate not less than 15 gallons per minute per square foot of filter area;
(h) backwash flow indicators and controls that are easily readable while operating the control valves;
(i) an air release valve on the highest point of each filter;
(j) an accessible manhole to facilitate inspection and repairs;
(k) means to observe the wastewater during backwashing;
(l) construction to prevent cross connection; and
(m) a pressure relief valve shall be installed for each filter.
4.2.3 Diatomaceous earth filtration

The use of these filters may be considered for application to surface water with low turbidity and low bacterial contamination, and may be used for iron removal for groundwater, providing the removal is effective and the water is of satisfactory sanitary quality before treatment.

4.2.3.1 Conditions of use

Diatomaceous earth filters are expressly excluded from consideration for the following conditions:

(a) color removal;
(b) turbidity removal where either the gross quantity of turbidity is high or the turbidity exhibits poor filterability characteristics; and
(c) filtration of water with high algae counts.
4.2.3.2 Pilot plant study

Installation of a diatomaceous earth filtration system shall be preceded by a pilot plant study on the water to be treated.

(a) Conditions of the study such as duration, filter rates, head loss accumulation, slurry feed rates, turbidity removal, bacteria removal, etc. must be approved by the reviewing authority prior to the study;
(b) Satisfactory pilot plant results must be obtained prior to preparation of final construction plans and specifications.
(c) The pilot plant study must demonstrate the ability of the system to meet applicable drinking water standards at all times.
4.2.3.3 Types of filters

Pressure or vacuum diatomaceous earth filtration units will be considered for approval. However, the vacuum type is preferred for its ability to accommodate a design which permits observation of the filter surfaces to determine proper cleaning, damage to a filter element, and adequate coating over the entire filter area.

4.2.3.4 Treated water storage

Treated water storage capacity in excess of normal requirements shall be provided to:

(a) allow operation of the filters at a uniform rate during all conditions of system demand at or below the approved filtration rate, and
(b) guarantee continuity of service during adverse raw water conditions without by-passing the system.
4.2.3.5 Number of units.

See Appendix A Subpart 4.2.1.3 for information on number of units.

4.2.3.6 Pre-coat
(a) Application: A uniform pre-coat shall be applied hydraulically to each septum by introducing a slurry to the tank influent line and employing a filter to waste or recirculation system.
(b) Quantity: Diatomaceous earth in the amount of 0.2 pounds per square foot of filter area or an amount sufficient to apply a 1/8 inch coating should be used with recirculation. When pre coating is accomplished with a filter to waste system, 0.15-0.2 pounds per square foot of filter area is recommended.
4.2.3.7 Body Feed

A body feed system to apply additional amounts of diatomaceous earth slurry during the filter run is required to avoid short filter runs or excessive head losses.

(a) Quantity: Rate of body feed is dependent on raw water quality and characteristics and must be determined in the pilot plant study. Inclusion of a coagulant coating (alum or polymer) to the body feed should be considered.
(b) Operation and maintenance can be simplified by providing accessibility to the feed system and slurry lines.
(c) Continuous mixing of the body feed slurry is required.
4.2.3.8 Filtration
(a) Rate of filtration: The recommended nominal rate is 1.0 gallon per minute per square foot of filter area with a recommended maximum of 1.5 gpm per square foot. The filtration rate shall be controlled by a positive means.
(b) Head loss: The head loss shall not exceed 30 psi for pressure diatomaceous earth filters, or a vacuum of 15 inches of mercury for a vacuum system.
(c) Recirculation: A recirculation or holding pump shall be employed to maintain differential pressure across the filter when the unit is not in operation in order prevent the filter cake from dropping off the filter elements. A minimum recirculation rate of 0.1 gallon per minute per square foot of filter area shall be provided.
(d) Septum or filter element: The filter elements shall be structurally capable of withstanding maximum pressure and velocity variations during filtration and backwash cycles, and shall be spaced such that no less than one inch is provided between elements or between any element and a wall.
(e) Inlet design: The filter influent shall be designed to prevent scour of the diatomaceous earth from the filter element.
4.2.3.9 Backwash

A satisfactory method to thoroughly remove and dispose of spent filter cake shall be provided.

4.2.3.10 Appurtenances

The following shall be provided for every filter:

(a) sampling taps for raw and filtered water;
(b) loss of head or differential pressure gauge;
(c) rate-of-flow indicator, preferably with totalizer;
(d) a throttling valve used to reduce rates below normal during adverse raw water conditions; and
(e) evaluation of the need for body feed, recirculation, and any other pumps, in accordance with Appendix A Subpart 6.3.
4.2.4 Slow Rate Gravity Filters

The use of these filters shall require prior engineering studies to demonstrate the adequacy and suitability of this method of filtration for the specific raw water supply.

4.2.4.1 Quality of raw water

Slow rate gravity filtration will generally be limited to waters having maximum turbidities of 10 units and maximum color of 5 units: such turbidity must not be attributable to colloidal clay. Raw water quality data must include examinations for algae.

4.2.4.2 Number

At least two units shall be provided. Where only two units are provided, each shall be capable of meeting the plant design capacity (normally the projected maximum daily demand) at the approved filtration rate. Where more than two filter units are provided, the filters shall be capable of meeting the plant design capacity at the approved filtration rate with one filter removed from service.

4.2.4.3 Structural details and hydraulics

Slow rate gravity filters shall be so designed as to provide:

(a) a cover, and insulation to prevent freezing
(b) headroom to permit normal movement by operating personnel for scraping and sand removal operations
(c) adequate manholes and access ports for handling of sand
(d) filtration to waste
(e) an overflow at the maximum filter water level
(f) provisions for draining the filter to waste with appropriate measures for back flow prevention (see Appendix A Subpart 4.10)
4.2.4.4 Rates of filtration

The permissible rates of filtration shall be determined by the quality of the raw water and shall be on the basis of experimental data derived from the water to be treated. The nominal rate may be 45 to 150 gallons per day per square foot of sand area, with somewhat higher rates acceptable when demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Secretary.

4.2.4.5 Underdrains

Each filter unit shall be equipped with a main drain and an adequate number of lateral underdrains to collect the filtered water. The underdrains shall be so spaced that the maximum velocity of the water flow in the lateral underdrain will not exceed 0.75 feet per second. The maximum spacing of the laterals shall not exceed 3 feet.

4.2.4.6 Filtering material
(a) Filter sand shall be placed on graded gravel layers for a minimum depth of 30 inches.
(b) The effective size shall be between 0.15 mm and 0.35 mm, or as approved by the Secretary.
(c) The uniformity coefficient shall not exceed 2.5, or as approved by the Secretary.
(d) The sand shall be clean and free from foreign matter.
4.2.4.7 Filter gravel

The supporting gravel shall conform to the size and depth distribution provided for rapid rate gravity filters. See Appendix A Subpart 4.2.1(6)(e)(5).

4.2.4.8 Depth of water on filter beds

Design shall provide a depth of at least three feet of water over the sand. Influent water shall not scour the sand surface.

4.2.4.9 Control appurtenances

Each filter shall be equipped with:

(a) a loss of head gauge;
(b) an orifice, venturi meter, or other suitable metering device installed on each filter to control the rate of filtration; and
(c) an effluent pipe designed to maintain the water level above the top of the filter sand.
4.2.5 Direct Filtration

Direct filtration, as used herein, refers to the filtration of a surface water without prior settling. The nature of the treatment process will depend upon the raw water quality. A full scale direct filtration plant shall not be constructed without prior pilot studies which are acceptable to the Secretary. In-plant demonstration studies may be appropriate where conventional treatment plants are converted to direct filtration.

Where direct filtration is proposed, an engineering report shall be submitted prior to conducting pilot plant or in-plant demonstration studies. In cases where a direct filtration plant is effectively treating the same source, pilot plant studies may be eliminated.

4.2.5.1 Engineering report

In addition to the items considered in Appendix A Subpart 1.2, "Engineer's Report," the report should include a historical summary of meteorological conditions and of raw water quality with special reference to fluctuations in quality, and possible sources of contamination. The following raw water parameters should be evaluated in the report:

(a) color;
(b) turbidity;
(c) bacterial concentration;
(d) microscopic biological organisms;
(e) temperature;
(f) total solids;
(g) general inorganic chemical characteristics; and
(h) additional parameters as required by the Secretary.

The report should also include a description of methods and work to be done during a pilot plant study or where appropriate, an in plant demonstration study.

4.2.5.2 Pilot plant studies (when required)

After approval of the engineering report, a pilot study or in-plant demonstration study shall be conducted. This study shall be conducted under average and adverse water quality conditions and shall emphasize but not be limited to the following items:

(a) chemical mixing conditions including shear gradients and detention periods;
(b) chemical feed rates;
(c) use of various coagulant aids including polymers;
(d) flocculation conditions;
(e) filtration rates;
(f) filter gradation, types of media and depth of media; and
(g) filter breakthrough conditions.

Prior to the initiation of design plans and specifications, a final report including the engineer's design recommendations shall be submitted to the Secretary.

4.2.5.3 Pretreatment - Rapid mix and flocculation

The final rapid mix and flocculation basin design should be based on the pilot plant or in-plant demonstration studies augmented with applicable portions of Appendix A Subpart 4.1.1 Rapid Mix and Appendix A Subpart 4.1.2 Flocculation.

4.2.5.4 Filtration
(a) Filters should be rapid rate gravity filters with dual or mixed media. The final filter design should be based on the pilot plant or in-plant demonstration studies augmented by applicable portions of Appendix A Subpart 4.2.1 Rapid Rate Gravity Filters. Single media sand filters shall not be used.
(b) Surface wash shall be provided for the rapid rate gravity filters in accordance with Appendix A Subpart 4.2.1.8.
4.2.5.5 Control and operation
(a) A continuous recording turbidimeter should be installed on each filter effluent line and on the composite filter effluent line.
(b) Additional continuous monitoring equipment may be required by the Secretary.
4.3 Disinfection

Historically chlorine has been the preferred disinfecting agent. However, disinfection may be accomplished with liquid chlorine, monochloramines, calcium or sodium hypochlorite or chlorine dioxide. Other disinfecting agents will be considered, providing reliable application equipment is available and testing procedures for residual are recognized in Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, latest edition or an equivalent means of measuring effectiveness exists. Disinfection is required for all Subpart H systems including surface water supplies and groundwater under the direct influence of surface water, and for any groundwater at risk of contamination. The required amount of primary disinfection needed shall be specified by the reviewing authority and shall be consistent with levels of treatment required by these rules. Consideration must be given to the formation of disinfection byproducts (DBPs) when selecting the disinfectant.

4.3.1 Chlorination
4.3.1.1 Equipment
4.3.1.1.1 Type

Solution feed gas chlorinators or hypochlorite feeders of the positive displacement type must be provided (See Part 5 of Appendix A). Use of gas is limited to large, operator on-site, or monitored, 24 hour facilities, under very specific conditions.

4.3.1.1.2 Capacity

The chlorinator capacity shall be such that a free chlorine residual of at least 2 milligrams per liter can be maintained in the water with CT values as required in Appendix A Subpart 4.3.2(c) when maximum flow rate coincides with anticipated maximum chlorine demand. The equipment shall be of such design that it will operate accurately over the desired feeding range. (See Appendix A Subpart 5.0.1.)

4.3.1.1.3 Standby equipment

Where chlorination is required for protection of the supply, standby equipment of sufficient capacity shall be available to replace the largest unit. Spare parts shall be made available to replace parts subject to wear and breakage.

4.3.1.1.4 Automatic switchover

Automatic switchover of chlorine cylinders shall be provided, where necessary, to assure continuous disinfection.

4.3.1.1.5 Automatic proportioning

Automatic proportioning chlorinators will be required where the rate of flow or chlorine demand is not reasonably constant.

4.3.1.1.6 Eductor

Each eductor must be selected for the point of application with particular attention given to the quantity of chlorine to be added, the maximum injector waterflow, the total discharge back pressure, the injector operating pressure, and the size of the chlorine solution line. Gauges for measuring water pressure and vacuum at the inlet and outlet of each eductor should be provided.

4.3.1.1.7 Injector/diffuser

The chlorine solution injector/diffuser must be compatible with the point of application to provide a rapid and thorough mix with all the water being treated. The center of a pipeline is the preferred application point.

4.3.2 Contact time and point of application
(a) Due consideration shall be given to the contact time of the chlorine in water with relation to pH, ammonia, taste producing substances, temperature, bacterial quality, trihalomethane formation potential and other pertinent factors. Chlorine should be applied at a point which will provide adequate contact time. All basins used for disinfection must be designed to minimize short circuiting. Determination of contact time for calculation of CT values will be made using Appendix C of the E.P.A. Guidance Manual, October, 1989.
(b) At plants treating surface water, provisions should be made for applying chlorine to the raw water, filtered water, and water entering the distribution system. The contact time as required in this subpart must be provided to achieve the necessary log removal as shown below.

The required minimum primary disinfection is the disinfection needed for the entire surface water and Subpart H treatment process to meet the overall treatment requirement of 3 log Giardia and 4 log virus removal/inactivation. Regardless of any filter efficiency, a 0.5 log minimum inactivation of Giardia by disinfection is required.

The following table provides a summary of the expected minimum level of surface water and Subpart H treatment performance in well operated filter systems and the required level of disinfection.

Expected Log Filtration Removals

Required Disinfection (Log Inactivations)

Giardia

Viruses

Giardia

Viruses

Conventional

2.5

2.0

0.5

2.0

Direct

2.0

1.0

1.0

3.0

Slow Sand

2.0

2.0

1.0

2.0

Diatomaceous Earth

2.0

1.0

1.0

3.0

The Secretary may require greater removals/inactivation depending on the degree of contamination in the source water.

(c) For surface water and groundwater under the direct influence of surface water sources, CT Values (CT) must be achieved as shown in Tables A4-1 and A4-2 (See following Appendix A Subpart 4.3).
(d) For groundwater sources determined to be vulnerable to viral contamination, 4.0 log inactivation of viruses must be achieved as shown in Table A4-1.
(e) Groundwater sources not under the direct influence of surface water that are required to be continuously disinfected or that are required to have the capability of being continuously disinfected shall meet the CT requirements to provide 4.0 log viral inactivation as shown in Table A4-1.
4.3.3 Residual chlorine

Minimum free chlorine residual at distant points in a water distribution system should be 0.1 milligrams per liter. Higher residuals may be required depending on pH, temperature and other characteristics of the water.

4.3.4 Testing equipment
(a) Chlorine residual test equipment, using the DPD method or other method recognized in the latest edition of Standard Methods for the Disinfection of Water and Wastewater, shall be provided and should be capable of measuring residuals to the nearest 0.1 milligram per liter.
(b) Each system shall continuously monitor the disinfectant residual of the water as it enters the distribution system and record the lowest disinfectant residual each day. Systems serving fewer than or equal to 3300 people may take grab samples in lieu of continuous monitoring at frequencies as follows:

System Population

Samples/day*

less than or equal to 500.

1

501-1,000.

2

1,001-2,500.

3

2,501-3,300

4

(*: The minimum time between samples is 1 1/2 hours)

4.3.5 Chlorinator piping
4.3.5.1 Cross connection protection

The chlorinator water supply piping shall be designed to prevent contamination of the treated water supply by sources of questionable quality. At all facilities treating surface water, pre and post chlorination systems must be independent to prevent possible siphoning of partially treated water into the clear well. The water supply to each eductor shall have a separate shut-off valve. No master shut off valve will be allowed.

4.3.5.2 Pipe material

The pipes carrying elemental liquid or dry gaseous chlorine under pressure and liquid chlorine must be schedule 80 seamless steel tubing or other materials recommended by the Chlorine Institute (never use PVC).

A chlorine solution is defined as a solution of chlorine in water and, therefore, its handling differs from that of elemental liquid or dry gaseous chlorine. For chlorine solution piping and fittings, rubber, PVC, polyethylene, or other materials recommended by the Chlorine Institute must be used.

Nylon products are not acceptable for any part of the chlorine solution piping system.

4.3.6 Housing

Adequate housing must be provided for the chlorination equipment and for storing the chlorine (see Appendix A Part 5).

Table A4-1 - CT VALUES FOR VIRUSES

CT VALUES FOR INACTIVATION OF VIRUSES BY FREE CHLORINE (1,2)

Log Inactivation

2.0

3.0

4.0

pH

6-9

10

6-9

10

6-9

10

Temperature (°C)

0.5

6

45

9

66

12

90

5

4

30

6

44

8

60

10

3

22

4

33

6

45

15

2

15

3

22

4

30

20

1

11

2

16

3

22

25

1

7

1

11

2

15

NOTES:

1. Data adapted from Sobsey (1988) for inactivation of Hepatitis A Virus (HAV) at pH = 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 and temperature = 5 C. CT values include a safety factor of 3.

2. CT values adjusted to other temperatures by doubling CT for each 10 C drop in temperature.

Table A4-2 - GIARDIA INACTIVATION

Click to view image

Click to view image

Click to view image

Click to view image

Click to view image

Click to view image

4.3.7 Non-Chorine Based Disinfection

Design and installation of disinfection methods other than chlorine based systems, such as ultraviolet light, may be permitted, provided such designs conform to the Secretary's written guidelines.

4.4 Softening

The softening process selected shall be based upon the mineral qualities of the raw water and the desired finished water quality in conjunction with requirements for disposal of sludge or brine waste, cost of plant, cost of chemicals and plant location. Applicability of the process chosen shall be demonstrated.

4.4.1 Lime or lime-soda process

Design standards for rapid mix, flocculation and sedimentation are in Appendix A Subpart 4.1. Additional consideration shall be given to the following process elements.

4.4.1.1 Hydraulics

When split treatment is used, the bypass line should be sized to carry total plant flow, and an accurate means of measuring and splitting the flow shall be provided.

4.4.1.2 Aeration

Determinations should be made for the carbon dioxide content of the raw water. When concentrations exceed 10 milligrams per liter, the economics of removal by aeration as opposed to removal with lime should be considered if it has been determined that dissolved oxygen in the finished water will not cause corrosion problems in the distribution system.

4.4.1.3 Chemical feed point

Lime and recycled sludge should be fed directly into the rapid mix basin.

4.4.1.4 Rapid mix

Rapid mix basins shall not exceed 30 seconds detention time with adequate velocity gradients to keep the lime particles dispersed.

4.4.1.5 Stabilization

Equipment for stabilization of water softened by the lime or lime-soda process is required. (see Appendix A Subpart 4.7).

4.4.1.6 Sludge Collection
(a) Mechanical sludge removal equipment shall be provided in the sedimentation basin.
(b) Sludge recycling to the rapid mix should be provided.
4.4.1.7 Sludge Disposal

Provisions shall be included for proper disposal of softening sludge. (see Appendix A Subpart 4.10).

4.4.1.8 Disinfection

The use of excess lime shall not be considered an acceptable substitute for disinfection.

4.4.1.9 Plant start-up

The plant processes shall be manually started following shut-down.

4.4.2 Cation exchange process

Alternative methods of hardness reduction should be investigated when the sodium content and dissolved solids concentration is of concern.

4.4.2.1 Pre-treatment requirements

Iron, manganese, or a combination of the two, should not exceed 0.3 milligrams per liter in the water as applied to the ion exchange resin. Pre-treatment is required when the content of iron, manganese, or a combination of the two, is one milligram per liter or more. (see Appendix A Subpart 4.5). Waters having 5 units or more turbidity should not be applied directly to the cation exchange softener.

4.4.2.2 Design

The units may be of pressure or gravity type, of either an upflow or downflow design. Automatic regeneration based on volume of water softened should be used unless manual regeneration is justified and is approved by the reviewing authority. A manual override shall be provided on all automatic controls.

4.4.2.3 Exchange capacity

The design capacity for hardness removal should not exceed 20,000 grains per cubic foot when resin is regenerated with 0.3 pounds of salt per kilograin of hardness removed.

4.4.2.4 Depth of resin

The depth of the exchange resin should not be less than three feet.

4.4.2.5 Flow rates

The rate of softening should not exceed seven gallons per minute per square foot of bed area and the backwash rate should be six to eight gallons per minute per square foot of bed area. Rate-of- flow controllers or the equivalent shall be installed for the above purposes.

4.4.2.6 Freeboard

The freeboard will depend upon the specific gravity of the resin and the direction of water flow. Generally, the washwater collector should be 24 inches above the top of the resin on downflow units.

4.4.2.7 Underdrains and supporting gravel

The bottoms, strainer systems and support for the exchange resin shall conform to criteria provided for rapid rate gravity filters. (see Appendix A Subparts 4.2.4.5 and 4.2.4.7).

4.4.2.8 Brine distribution

Facilities should be included for even distribution of the brine over the entire surface of both upflow and downflow units.

4.4.2.9 Cross-connection control

Backwash, rinse and air relief discharge pipes should be installed in such a manner as to prevent any possibility of back-siphonage.

4.4.2.10 Bypass piping and equipment

A bypass shall be provided around softening units to produce a blended water of desirable hardness. Totalizing meters shall be installed on the bypass line and on each softener unit. The bypass line shall have a shutoff valve and should have an automatic proportioning or regulating device. In some installations, it may be necessary to treat the bypassed water to obtain acceptable levels of iron and/or manganese in the finished water.

4.4.2.11 Additional limitations

Silica gel resins should not be used for waters having a pH above 8.4 or containing less than six milligrams per liter silica and should not be used when iron is present. When the applied water contains a chlorine residual, the cation exchange resin shall be a type that is not damaged by residual chlorine. Phenolic resin should not be used.

4.4.2.12 Sampling taps

Smooth-nose sampling taps shall be provided for the collection of representative samples. The taps shall be located to provide for sampling of the softener influent, effluent and blended water. The sampling taps for the blended water shall be at least 20 feet downstream from the point of blending. Petcocks are not acceptable as sampling taps. Sampling taps should be provided on the brine tank discharge piping.

4.4.2.13 Brine and salt storage tanks
(a) Salt dissolving or brine tanks and wet salt storage tanks shall be covered and be corrosion-resistant.
(b) The make-up water inlet shall be protected from back-siphonage. Water for filling the tank should be distributed over the entire surface by pipes above the maximum brine level in the tank. The tanks should be provided with an automatic declining level control system on the make-up water line.
(c) Wet salt storage basins shall be equipped with manholes or hatchways for access and for direct dumping of salt from a truck. Openings shall be provided with raised curbs and watertight covers having overlapping edges similar to those required for finished water reservoirs.
(d) Overflows, where provided, shall be protected with corrosion resistant screens and shall terminate with either a turned downed bend having a proper free fall discharge or a self- closing flap valve.
(e) Two wet salt storage tanks or compartments designed to operate independently should be provided.
(f) The salt shall be supported on graduated layers of gravel placed over a brine collection system.
(g) Alternative designs which are conducive to frequent cleaning of the wet salt storage tank may be considered.
4.4.2.14 Salt and brine storage capacity

Total salt storage should have sufficient capacity to provide for at least 30 days of operation.

4.4.2.15 Brine pump or eductor

An eductor may be used to transfer brine from the brine tank to the softeners. If a pump is used, a brine measuring tank or means of metering should be provided to obtain proper dilution.

4.4.2.16 Stabilization

Stabilization for corrosion control shall be provided. An alkali feeder shall be provided except when exempted by the reviewing authority.

4.4.2.17 Waste disposal

Suitable disposal shall be provided for brine waste (See Appendix A Subpart 4.10). Where the volume of spent brine must be reduced, consideration may be given to using a part of the spent brine for a subsequent regeneration.

4.4.2.18 Construction materials

Pipes and contact materials shall be resistant to the aggressiveness of salt. Plastic and red brass are acceptable piping materials. Steel and concrete shall be coated with a non-leaching protective coating which is compatible with salt and brine.

4.4.2.19 Housing

Bagged salt and dry bulk salt storage shall be enclosed and separated from other operating areas in order to prevent damage to equipment.

4.5 Iron & Manganese Control

Iron and manganese control, as used herein, refers solely to treatment processes designed specifically for this purpose. The treatment process used will depend upon the character of the raw water. The selection of one or more treatment processes must meet specific local conditions as determined by engineering investigations, including chemical analyses of representative samples of water to be treated, and receive the approval of the Secretary. It may be necessary to operate a pilot plant in order to gather all information pertinent to the design. Consideration should be given to adjusting pH of the raw water to optimize reaction.

4.5.1 Removal by oxidation, detention and filtration
4.5.1.1 Oxidation may be by aeration or by chemical oxidation with chlorine, potassium permanganate, ozone or chlorine dioxide.
4.5.1.2 Detention
(a) Reaction - A minimum detention time of 20 minutes shall be provided following aeration to insure that the oxidation reactions are as complete as possible. This minimum detention may be omitted only where a pilot plant study indicates no need for detention. The detention basin should be designed as a holding tank with no provisions for sludge collection but with sufficient baffling to prevent short circuiting.
(b) Sedimentation - Sedimentation basins are recommended when treating water with high iron and/or manganese content, or where chemical coagulation is used to reduce the load on the filters. Provisions for sludge removal shall be made.
4.5.1.3 Filtration

Filters shall be provided and shall conform to Subpart 4.2.

4.5.2 Removal by manganese greensand filtration

This process consists of either a continuous feed of potassium permanganate to the influent of a manganese greensand filter or regeneration of filter media by permanganate.

a) Provisions should be made to apply the permanganate as far ahead of the filter as practical and to a point immediately before the filter.
b) Other oxidizing agents or processes such as chlorination or aeration may be used prior to the permanganate feed to reduce the cost of the chemical.
c) Anthracite media cap of at least six inches over manganese greensand is recommended.
d) Normal filtration rate is three to five gallons per minute per square foot.
e) Normal wash rate is 8 to 10 gallons per minute per square foot.
f) Air washing should be provided.
g) Sample taps shall be provided:
(1) prior to application of permanganate,
(2) immediately ahead of filtration,
(3) at the filter effluent.
4.5.3 Removal by ion exchange

This process of iron and manganese removal should not be used for water containing more than 0.3 milligrams per liter of iron, manganese or combination thereof. This process is not acceptable where either the raw water or wash water contains dissolved oxygen.

4.5.4 Sequestration by polyphosphates

Sequestration process will only be considered as a viable option for use in Vermont under the following conditions:

(a) Pilot work done with specific sequestering agent being proposed demonstrating effectiveness under various conditions i.e. time, temperature, pH.
(b) Specific program presented for operational control and monitoring of sequestering agent and its continued effectiveness.
(c) Iron, manganese or combination thereof shall not be in excess of 1.0 mg/l.
(d) The maximum concentration of phosphate applied shall not exceed 10 ppm PO 4.
(e) Feeding equipment shall conform to the requirements of Appendix A Subpart 5.
(f) Stock phosphate solution must be kept covered and disinfected by maintaining approximately 10 mg/l free chlorine residual. Newer premixed phosphate solutions may not require free chlorine residual be maintained.
(g) Polyphosphates shall not be applied ahead of iron and manganese removal treatment. The point of application shall be prior to any aeration, oxidation or disinfection if no iron or manganese removal treatment is provided.
(h) Phosphate chemicals must meet NSF Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals and System Components Certification.
(i) Testing equipment for phosphates must be available to allow daily monitoring of sequestering chemical levels in the distribution system.
4.5.5 Sampling equipment

Taps shall be located on each raw water source, each treatment unit influent and each treatment unit effluent.

4.5.6 Testing equipment

Testing equipment should be provided for all plants. The equipment should have the capacity to accurately measure the iron content to a minimum detection level of 0.1 milligrams per liter and the manganese content to a minimum detection level of 0.03 milligrams per liter.

4.6 Fluoridation

Sodium fluoride, sodium silicofluoride and hydrofluorosilicic acid shall conform to the NSF Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals and System Components Certification. The proposed method of fluoride feed must be approved by the Secretary prior to preparation of final plans and specifications. The proposed method will conform to CDC Water Fluoridation: A Manual for Engineers and Technicians, latest edition.

4.6.1 Fluoride compound storage

Fluoride chemicals should be isolated from other chemicals to prevent contamination. Compounds shall be stored in covered or unopened shipping containers and should be stored inside a building. Unsealed storage units for hydrofluorosilicic acid must be vented to the atmosphere at a point outside any building. Bags, fiber drums and steel drums should be stored on pallets.

4.6.2 Chemical feed equipment and methods

In addition to the requirements in Appendix A Part 5, fluoride feed equipment shall meet the following requirements:

(a) scales, loss-of-weight recorders, water meters or liquid level indicators, as appropriate, accurate to within five percent of the average daily change in reading shall be provided for chemical feeds;
(b) feeders shall be accurate to within five percent of any desired feed rate;
(c) the point of application of hydrofluorosilicic acid, if into a horizontal pipe, shall be in the lower half of the pipe;
(d) a fluoride solution, including hydrofluorosilicic acid, shall be applied by a positive displacement pump;
(e) anti-siphon devices shall be provided for all fluoride feed lines and dilution water lines;
(f) a device to measure the flow of water to be treated is required;
(g) the dilution water pipe shall terminate at least two pipe diameters above the solution tank when an upflow saturator is not used;
(h) water used for sodium fluoride dissolution shall be softened if hardness exceeds 75 mg/l as calcium carbonate;
(i) fluoride solutions shall not be injected to a point of negative pressure;
(j) the electrical outlet used for the fluoride feed pump should have a nonstandard receptacle and shall be electrically interconnected with the well or service pump; and
(k) sodium fluoride saturators should be of the upflow type and be provided with a meter and backflow protection on the makeup water line.
4.6.4 Protective equipment

Protective equipment, as outlined in Appendix A Subpart 5.3.4, and as required by OSHA and VOSHA regulations, shall be provided for operators handling fluoride compounds.

4.6.5 Dust control
(a) Provision must be made for the transfer of dry fluoride compounds from shipping containers to storage bins or hoppers in such a way as to minimize the quantity of fluoride dust which may enter the room in which the equipment is installed. The enclosure shall be provided with an exhaust fan and dust filter which place the hopper under a negative pressure. Air exhausted from fluoride handling equipment shall discharge through a dust filter to the outside atmosphere of the building.
(b) Provision shall be made for disposing of empty bags, drums or barrels in a manner which will minimize exposure to fluoride dusts. A floor drain should be provided to facilitate the hosing of floors. A floor drain may require a discharge permit from the Secretary.
4.6.6 Testing equipment

Equipment shall be provided for measuring the quantity of fluoride in the water. Such equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Secretary.

4.7 Stabilization

Water that is unstable due to natural causes or to subsequent treatment should be stabilized.

4.7.1 Polyphosphates

The feeding of polyphosphates may be applicable for corrosion control.

(a) Feed equipment shall conform to Appendix A Part 5, Chemical Application.
(b) Phosphate must meet NSF Drinking water treatment chemicals and system components certification.
(c) Stock phosphate solution must be kept covered and disinfected by carrying approximately 10 milligrams per liter free chlorine residual.
(d) Satisfactory chlorine residuals shall be maintained in the distribution system when phosphates are used.
4.7.2 Other treatment

Other treatment for controlling corrosive waters by the use of sodium silicate and sodium bicarbonate shall be used where necessary. Any proprietary compound must receive the specific approval of the Secretary before use. Chemical feeders shall be as required in Appendix A Part 5.

4.7.3 Water unstable due to biochemical action in distribution system

Unstable water resulting from the bacterial decomposition of organic matter in water (especially in dead end mains), the biochemical action within tubercles, and the reduction of sulfates to sulfides should be prevented by the maintenance of a free chlorine residual throughout the distribution system.

4.8 Taste & Odor Control

Provision shall be made for the control of taste and odor as required by the Secretary. Chemicals shall be added sufficiently ahead of other treatment processes to assure adequate contact time for an effective and economical use of the chemicals. Where severe taste and odor problems are encountered in-plant and/or pilot plant studies are required.

4.8.1 Flexibility

Treatment plants that supply water with known taste and odor problems should have equipment available to treat these problems. The equipment should have several control processes available for treatment flexibility in addressing the problem.

4.8.2 Chlorination

Chlorination can be used for the removal of some objectionable odors. Adequate contact time must be provided to complete the chemical reactions involved. Excessive potential trihalomethane production through this process should be avoided by adequate bench-scale testing prior to design. The breakpoint technique of chlorinating is recommended.

4.8.3 Chlorine dioxide

Chlorine dioxide has been generally recognized as a treatment for tastes caused by industrial wastes, such as phenols. However, chlorine dioxide can be used in the treatment of any taste and odor that is treatable by an oxidizing compound. Provisions shall be made for proper storing and handling of the sodium chlorite, so as to eliminate any danger of explosion.

4.8.4 Powdered activated carbon
(a) Powdered activated carbon when prescribed should be added as early as possible in the treatment process to provide maximum contact time. Flexibility to allow the addition of carbon at several points is preferred. Activated carbon should not be applied near the point of chlorine application.
(b) The carbon can be added as a premixed slurry or by means of a dry feed machine as long as the carbon is properly wetted.
(c) Continuous agitation or resuspension equipment is necessary to keep the carbon from depositing in the slurry storage tank.
(d) Provision shall be made for adequate dust and explosion control.
(e) The required rate of feed of carbon in a water treatment plant depends upon the tastes and/or odors involved, but provision should be made for adding from 0.1 milligrams per liter to at least 40 milligrams per liter.
(f) Powdered activated carbon shall be handled as a potentially combustible material. It should be stored in a building or compartment as nearly fireproof as possible. Other chemicals should not be stored in the same compartment. Carbon feeder rooms should be equipped with explosion-proof electrical outlets, lights and motors.
4.8.5 Granular activated carbon adsorption units

See Subpart 4.2.1.6 of this appendix.

4.8.6 Copper sulphate and other copper compounds

Continuous or periodic treatment of water with copper compounds to kill algae or other growths shall be controlled to prevent copper in excess of 1.3 milligrams per liter as copper in the plant effluent or distribution system. Care shall be taken to assure an even distribution. A permit shall be obtained from the Secretary prior to any such treatment. (See 10 V.S.A., § 1263(a))

4.8.7 Aeration

See Appendix A Subpart 4.4.

4.8.8 Potassium permanganate

Application of potassium permanganate may be considered, providing the treatment shall be designed so that the products of the reaction are not visible in the finished water.

4.8.9 Ozone

Ozonation can be used as a means of taste and odor control. Adequate contact time must be provided to complete the chemical reactions involved. Ozone is generally more desirable for treating water with high threshold odors.

4.8.10 Other Methods

The decision to use any other methods of taste and odor control should be made only after careful laboratory and/or pilot plant tests and on consultation with the Secretary.

4.9 Microscreening

A microscreen is a mechanical supplement of treatment capable of removing some of the suspended matter from the water by straining. It may be used to reduce nuisance organisms, leaves, weeds and organic matter. It shall not be used in place of:

(a) filtration, when filtration is necessary to provide a satisfactory water, or
(b) coagulation, in the preparation of water for filtration.
4.9.1 Design
(a) Design shall give due consideration to:
(1) nature of the suspended matter to be removed
(2) corrosiveness of the water
(3) effect of chlorination, when required as a pretreatment
(4) duplication of units for continuous operation during equipment maintenance
(b) Design shall provide:
(1) a durable, corrosion-resistant screen
(2) by-pass arrangements
(3) protection against back-siphonage when potable water is used for washing
(4) proper disposal of wash waters (see Appendix A Subpart 4.10).
4.10 Waste Handling & Disposal

Provisions must be made for proper disposal of water treatment plant waste such as sanitary, laboratory, clarification sludge, iron sludge, filter backwash water, and brine. All waste discharges shall be permitted by the Secretary. In locating waste disposal facilities, due consideration shall be given to preventing potential contamination of the water supply and groundwater. The Department of Environmental Conservation's Permit Specialists should be contacted (see Rule Introduction) for assistance with regulatory jurisdiction with sludge disposal.

Alternative methods of water treatment and chemical use should be considered as a means of reducing waste handling and disposal problems.

4.10.1 Sanitary waste

The sanitary waste from water treatment plants, pumping stations, etc., must receive treatment. Waste from these facilities must be discharged directly to a sanitary sewer system, when feasible, or to an on-site waste treatment facility approved by the Secretary.

4.10.2 Alum sludge

Lagooning may be used as a method of handling alum sludge. Lagoon size can be calculated using total chemicals used plus a factor for turbidity. Mechanical concentration may be considered. A pilot plant study is required before the design of a mechanical dewatering installation. Freezing changes the nature of alum sludge so that it can be used for fill. Alum sludge can be discharged to a sanitary sewer. However, approval of this method will depend on obtaining approval from the owner of the sewerage system as well as from the Secretary before final designs are made.

Lagoons should be designed to produce an effluent satisfactory to the Secretary and should provide for:

(a) location free from flooding
(b) where necessary, dikes, deflecting gutters or other means of diverting surface water so that it does not flow into the lagoon
(c) a minimum usable depth of five feet
(d) adequate freeboard
(e) adjustable decanting device
(f) effluent sampling point, and
(g) adequate safety provisions
4.10.3 "Red water" waste

Waste filter wash water from iron and manganese removal plants must be disposed of according to the Secretary's requirements.

4.10.4 Waste filter wash water

Waste filter wash water from surface water treatment plants should have suspended solids reduced to a level acceptable to the Secretary before being discharged. Many plants have constructed holding tanks and returned this water to the inlet end of the plant.

The holding tank should be of such a size that it will contain the anticipated volume of waste wash water produced by the plant when operating at design capacity. A plant that has two filters should have a holding tank that will contain the total waste wash water from both filters calculated by using a 15 minute wash at 20 gallons per minute per square foot. In plants with more filters, the size of the holding tank will depend on the anticipated hours of operation. It is recommended that waste filter wash water be returned at a rate of less than 10 percent of the raw water entering the plant. Filter backwash water should not be recycled when the raw water contains excessive algae, when finished water taste and odor problems are encountered, or when trihalomethane levels in the distribution system may exceed allowable levels. As such, a discharge permit, or municipal sewer connection or alternate means of treatment shall be required for waste filter wash water.

4.11 Granular Carbon Filtration

Granular activated carbon (GAC) filtration of contaminants in drinking water that exceed the maximum contaminant levels shall meet the following specifications.

4.11.1 Engineer's report requirements

Every construction permit application that proposes installation of GAC treatment at a Public

Water System shall include an Engineer's Report that meets the Requirements of Appendix A, Part 1 of the Rule. The Engineer's Report shall describe the design basis for the proposed treatment, which shall include the following technical information:

(a) Water quality characteristics of the water to be treated by the proposed GAC units. Report must include characterization of the contaminants that the proposed treatment is designed to remove, characterization of water quality constituents that may interfere with granular activated carbon treatment (including, for example, calcium, iron, magnesium, manganese, turbidity, organic carbon), discussion of pilot study results (if a pilot study is performed), and discussion of expected treated water quality characteristics. This water quality characterization shall be developed based on laboratory data obtained from representative sample locations in the water system within the past two years, obtained by samples collected and analyzed in accordance with requirements of Subchapter 21-6.
(b) Empty bed contact time for each carbon unit, including justification for the selected value.
(c) Expected useful life of the carbon media, including breakthrough curve for proposed carbon media and contaminants to be treated.
(d) Description of filter to waste and backwash provisions
(e) Description of provisions for carbon media replacement.
(f) Description of the expected pressure loss across each unit.
(g) Equipment manufacturer's specifications, including:
(1) mass of media contained in each unit;
(2) unit dimensions;
(3) arrangement of piping, including lateral header and drain pipes installed within units; and
(4) material specifications for units, including maximum operating pressures and operating temperature ranges
(h) Evaluation of existing public water system disinfection treatment infrastructure (if applicable), including discussion of any improvements that are necessary to ensure disinfection treatment will meet requirements of Appendix A, Subpart 4.3 and 40 CFR Part 141.
(i) Discussion of the hydraulic loading rate designed for each unit.
(j) Discussion of the provisions to protect equipment from weather elements and provide freeze protection.
(k) Discussion of provisions to precondition new carbon media in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
4.11.2 Technical Standards for Design of Granular Activated Carbon
(a) For Non-Transient Non-Community and Domestic Bottled water systems, at least two GAC units shall be provided, plumbed in series.
(b) For Public Community water systems, at least three GAC units shall be provided, plumbed in a series.
(c) Each GAC unit shall be capable of treating the maximum day demand flow for the Water System.
(d) GAC units shall be provided with piping and valves as necessary to facilitate ease of operational adjustments to modify the configuration of primary (lead) and secondary (lag) carbon units, and to remove a unit from service while maintaining functionality of treatment process.
(e) Pressure gauges shall be located at inlet and outlet of each unit
(f) Sample ports shall be provided for the inlet and outlet of each unit
(g) GAC media shall meet AWWA B604, Standard for Granular Activated Carbon.
(h) All wetted components and materials shall be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation for use in drinking water.
(i) Hydraulic loading rate for each unit shall not exceed 7 gallons per minute per square foot of bed area.
(j) Empty Bed Contact Time for each unit shall be at least 10 minutes for each unit in series. The Secretary must explicitly approve a modified design that includes a proposed empty bed contact time less than a total of 20 minutes.
(k) GAC media depth shall be at least 30 inches for every unit.
(l) GAC units shall be housed in enclosures that provide for adequate room for routine operation and maintenance and protection from weather elements (control of condensation, ventilation, and freeze protection shall be provided). Units shall not be located in a confined space.
(m) Design shall include provisions to add an oxidant before the carbon units.
(n) Disinfection Treatment that meets the requirements of Appendix A Part 4.3 and 40 CFR Part 141 shall be provided to treat all water treated by granular activated carbon. This disinfection treatment shall be provided prior to the entry point to the distribution system.
(o) Pretreatment shall be provided for the presence of any water quality constituent that may interfere with operation or performance of the proposed carbon treatment. Pretreatment shall be provided in the proposed design as necessary to ensure that calcium, magnesium, iron, and manganese concentrations are consistently and reliably less than the SMCLs established in 21-6.
(p) Units shall be regenerated or replaced when break-through occurs.
(q) When GAC treatment is being proposed to replace anthracite components of existing, permitted surface water filtration components, the GAC treatment shall also meet the basic specifications for filter material as given in Appendix A Subpart 4.2.1.6(a) through (d).
Part 5 CHEMICAL APPLICATION

Introduction

This Part applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems;
(b) Public Non-transient water systems;
(c) Public Transient water systems; and
(d) Domestic Bottled water systems.
5.0 General

No chemicals shall be applied to treat drinking waters unless specifically allowed by the Secretary.

5.0.1 Plans and specifications

Plans and specifications shall be submitted for review and approval, as provided for in Subpart 2, and shall include:

(a) description of feed equipment, including maximum and minimum feed ranges;
(b) location of feeders, piping layout and points of application;
(c) storage and handling facilities;
(d) specifications for chemicals to be used and dilution level, if any;
(e) operating and control procedures including proposed application rates; and
(f) descriptions of testing equipment and procedures.
5.0.2 Chemical application

Chemicals shall be applied to the water at such points and by such means as to:

(a) assure maximum efficiency of treatment;
(b) assure maximum safety to consumer;
(c) provide maximum safety to operators;
(d) assure satisfactory mixing of the chemicals with the water;
(e) provide maximum flexibility of operation through various points of application, when appropriate; and
(f) prevent backflow or back-siphonage between multiple points of feed through common manifolds.
5.0.3 General equipment design

General equipment design shall be such that:

(a) feeders will be able to supply, at all times, the necessary amounts of chemicals at an accurate rate throughout the range of water delivery;
(b) chemical feed pumps shall be installed so they can be easily calibrated;
(c) chemical contact materials and surfaces are resistant to the aggressiveness of the chemical solution;
(d) corrosive chemicals are introduced in such a manner as to minimize potential for corrosion;
(e) chemicals that are incompatible are not stored or handled together;
(f) all chemicals are conducted from the feeder to the point of application in separate conduits;
(g) chemical feeders are as near as practical to the feed point; and
(h) chemical feeders and pumps operate at no lower than 20 percent of the feed range.
5.1 Facility Design
5.1.1 Number of feeders
(a) Where chemical feed is necessary for the protection of the supply such as chlorination, coagulation, or other essential processes:
(1) a minimum of two feeders shall be provided;
(2) the standby unit or a combination of units of sufficient capacity should be available to replace any unit during shutdowns; and
(3) where a booster pump is required, duplicate equipment should be provided and, when necessary, standby power.
(b) A separate feeder shall be used for each chemical applied.
(c) Spare parts shall be available for all feeders to replace parts which are subject to wear and damage.
5.1.2 Control
(a) Feeders may be manually or automatically controlled, with automatic controls being designed so as to allow override by manual controls.
(b) Chemical feed rates shall be proportional to flow.
(c) A means to measure water flow must be provided in order to determine chemical feed rates.
(d) Provisions shall be made for measuring the quantities of chemicals used.
(e) Weighing scales:
(1) shall be provided for weighing cylinders, at all plants utilizing chlorine gas;
(2) may be required for fluoride solution feed;
(3) should be provided for volumetric dry chemical feeders; and
(4) should be accurate to measure increments of 0.5 percent of load.
5.1.3 Dry chemical feeders

Dry chemical feeders shall:

(a) measure chemicals volumetrically or gravimetrically;
(b) provide adequate solution water and agitation of the chemical in the solution pot;
(c) provide gravity feed from solution pots where possible;
(d) completely enclose chemicals to prevent emission of dust to the operating room; and
(e) be specified as to make, model and design characteristics.
5.1.4 Positive displacement solution pumps

Positive displacement type solution feed pumps should be used to feed liquid chemicals, but shall not be used to feed chemical slurries. Pumps must be sized to match or exceed maximum head conditions found at the point of injection. Specify make and model number of pump for all pumps used.

5.1.5 Liquid chemical feeders - siphon control

Liquid chemical feeders shall be such that chemical solutions cannot be siphoned into the water supply by assuring discharge at a point of positive pressure; and

(a) providing vacuum relief;
(b) providing a suitable air gap; or
(c) other suitable means or combinations as necessary to prevent siphoning.
5.1.6 Cross connection control

Cross connection control meeting current AWWA Standard C-506 must be provided to assure that:

(a) the service water lines discharging to solution tanks shall be properly protected from backflow as required by the Secretary;
(b) liquid chemical solutions cannot be siphoned through solution feeders into the water supply as required in Appendix A Subpart 5.1.5; and
(c) no direct connection exists between any sewer, and a drain or overflow from the feeder, solution chamber or tank by providing that all drains terminate at least six inches or two pipe diameters, whichever is greater, above the overflow rim of a receiving sump, conduit or waste receptacle.
5.1.7 Chemical feed equipment location

Chemical feed equipment shall:

(a) be located in a separate room to reduce hazards and dust problems;
(b) be conveniently located near points of application to minimize length of feed lines;
(c) be readily accessible for servicing, repair and observation of operation; and
(d) shown in schematic lay out for location and method of control and operation.
5.1.8 In Plant water supply

In plant water supply shall be:

(a) ample in quantity and adequate in pressure;
(b) provided with means for measurement when preparing specific solution concentrations by dilution;
(c) properly treated for hardness, when necessary;
(d) properly protected against backflow; and
(e) obtained from a location sufficiently downstream of any chemical feed point to assure adequate mixing and contact time if necessary.
5.1.9 Storage of chemicals
(a) Space should be provided for:
(1) at least 30 days of chemical supply;
(2) convenient and efficient handling of chemicals;
(3) dry storage conditions; and
(4) a minimum storage volume of 1.5 truck loads where purchase is by truck load lots.
(b) Storage tanks and pipelines for liquid chemicals shall be specific to the chemicals and not for alternates.
(c) Chemicals shall be stored in covered or unopened shipping containers, unless the chemical is transferred into an approved storage unit.
(d) Liquid chemical storage tanks must:
(1) have a liquid level indicator; and
(2) have an overflow and a receiving basin or drain capable of receiving accidental spills or overflows (meeting OSHA and VOSHA regulations).
5.1.10 Solution tanks
(a) A means which is consistent with the nature of the chemical solution shall be provided in a solution tank to maintain a uniform strength of solution. Continuous agitation shall be provided to maintain slurries in suspension.
(b) Two solution tanks of adequate volume may be required for a chemical to assure continuity of supply in servicing a solution tank.
(c) Means shall be provided to measure the solution level in the tank.
(d) Chemical solutions shall be kept covered. Large tanks with access openings shall have such opening curbed and fitted with overhanging covers.
(e) Subsurface locations for solution tanks shall;
(1) be free from sources of possible contamination; and
(2) assure positive drainage for groundwaters, accumulated water, chemical spills and overflows.
(f) Overflow pipes, when provided should:
(1) be turned downward, with the end screened;
(2) have a free fall discharge; and
(3) be located where noticeable.
(g) Acid storage tanks must be vented to the outside atmosphere, but not through vents in common with day tanks.
(h) Each tank shall be provided with a valved drain, protected against backflow in accordance with Appendix A Subpart 5.1.5. and Appendix A Subpart 5.1.6.
(i) Solutions tanks shall be located and protective curbings provided so that chemicals from equipment failure, spillage or accidental drainage shall not enter the water in conduits, treatment or storage basins.
5.1.11 Day tanks
(a) Day tanks should be provided where bulk storage of liquid chemical is provided.
(b) Day tanks shall meet all the requirements of Appendix A Subpart 5.1.10.
(c) Day tanks should be scale-mounted, or have a calibrated gauge painted or mounted on the side if liquid level can be observed in a gauge tube or through translucent sidewalls of the tank. In opaque tanks, a gauge rod extending above a reference point at the top of the tank, attached to a float, may be used. The ratio of the area of the tank to its height must be such that unit readings are meaningful in relation to the total amount of chemical fed during a day.
(d) Hand pumps may be provided for transfer from a carboy or drum. A tip rack may be used to permit withdrawal into a bucket from a spigot. Where motor driven transfer pumps are provided a liquid level limit switch and an overflow from the day tank, must be provided.
(e) A means which is consistent with the nature of the chemical solution shall be provided to maintain uniform strength of solution in a day tank. Continuous agitation shall be provided to maintain chemical slurries in suspension.
(f) Day tanks shall be properly labeled to designate the chemical contained.
(g) Labels shall also specify size, make, model and material of each tank.
5.1.12 Feed lines:
(a) should be as short as possible, and:
(1) of durable, corrosion resistant material;
(2) easily accessible throughout the entire length;
(3) protected against freezing, and
(4) readily cleanable;
(b) should slope upward from the chemical source to the feeder when conveying gases;
(c) shall be designed consistent with scale-forming or solids depositing properties of the water, chemical, solution or mixtures conveyed; and
(d) shall be color coded. (See Appendix A Subpart 2.14)
5.1.13 Handling
(a) Carts, elevators and other appropriate means shall be provided for lifting chemical containers to minimize excessive lifting by operators.
(b) Provision must be made for the proper transfer of dry chemicals from shipping containers to storage bins or hoppers, in such a way as to minimize the quantity of dust which may enter the room in which the equipment is installed.
(c) Provision shall be made for measuring quantities of chemical used to prepare feed solutions.
5.1.14 Housing
(a) Floor surfaces shall be smooth, impervious, slip proof and well drained with a positive slope to floor drains.
(b) Vents from feeders, storage facilities and equipment exhaust shall discharge to the outside atmosphere above grade and remote from air intakes.
5.2 Chemicals
5.2.1 Shipping containers

Chemical shipping containers shall be fully labeled to include:

(a) chemical name, purity and concentration; and
(b) supplier name and address.
5.2.2 Specifications

All products or chemicals which may come in contact with water intended for use in a Public water system shall meet American National Standards Institute/NSF International Standards, specifically ANSI/NSF Standards 60 and 61.

5.2.3 Assay

Provisions may be required for assay of chemicals delivered.

5.2.4 Material Safety Data Sheets

A Material Safety Data Sheet must be obtained from each vendor for each chemical used and readily available for in plant review by operating personnel.

5.3 Operator Safety
5.3.1 Ventilation

Special provisions shall be made for ventilation of chlorine feed and storage rooms.

5.3.2 Respiratory protection equipment

Respiratory protection equipment, meeting the requirements the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), shall be available where chlorine gas is handled, and shall be stored at a convenient location, but not inside any room where chlorine is used or stored. The units shall use compressed air, have at least a 30 minute capacity, and be compatible with or exactly the same as units used by the fire department responsible for the plant.

5.3.3 Chlorine leak detection

A bottle of ammonium hydroxide, 56 percent ammonia solution, shall be available for chlorine leak detection; where ton containers are used, a leak repair kit approved by the Chlorine Institute shall be provided. Continuous chlorine leak detection equipment is recommended. Where a leak detector is provided it shall be equipped with both an audible alarm and a warning light.

5.3.4 Protective equipment
(a) At least one pair of rubber gloves, dust respirator of a type certified by NIOSH for toxic dusts, an apron or other protective clothing and goggles or face mask shall be provided for each operator as required by the Secretary. A deluge shower and/or eyewashing device should be installed where strong acids and alkalis are used or stored.
(b) Other protective equipment should be provided as necessary.
5.4 Specific Chemicals
5.4.1 Chlorine gas
(a) Chlorine gas feed and storage shall be enclosed and separated from other operating areas. The chlorine room shall be:
(1) provided with a shatter resistant inspection window installed in an interior wall;
(2) constructed in such a manner that all openings between the chlorine room and the remainder of the plant are sealed; and
(3) provided with doors equipped with panic hardware, assuring ready means of exit and opening outward only to the building exterior.
(b) Full and empty cylinders of chlorine gas should be:
(1) isolated from operating areas;
(2) restrained in position to prevent upset;
(3) stored in rooms separate from ammonia storage; and
(4) stored in areas not in direct sunlight or exposed to excessive heat.
(c) Where chlorine gas is used, the room shall be constructed to provide the following:
(1) each room shall have a ventilating fan with a capacity which provides one complete air change per minute when the room is occupied;
(2) the ventilating fan shall take suction near the floor as far as practical from the door and air inlet, with the point of discharge so located as not to contaminate air inlets to any rooms or structures;
(3) air inlets should be through louvers near the ceiling;
(4) louvers for chlorine room air intake and exhaust shall facilitate airtight closure;
(5) separate switches for the fan and lights shall be located outside of the chlorine room and at the inspection window. Outside switches shall be protected from vandalism. A signal light indicating fan operation shall be provided at each entrance when the fan can be controlled from more than one point;
(6) vents from feeders and storage shall discharge to the outside atmosphere, above grade;
(7) the room location should be on the prevailing downwind side of the building away from entrances, window louvers, walkways, etc.; and
(8) floor drains are discouraged. Where provided, the floor drains shall discharge to the outside of the building and shall not be connected to other internal or external drainage systems.
(d) Chlorinator rooms should be heated to 60 degrees Fahrenheit, and be protected from excessive heat. Cylinders and gas lines should be protected from temperatures above that of the feed equipment.
(e) Pressurized chlorine feed lines shall not carry chlorine gas beyond the chlorinator room.
5.4.2 Acids and caustics
(a) Acids and caustics shall be kept in closed corrosion-resistant shipping containers or storage units.
(b) Acids and caustics shall not be handled in open vessels, but should be pumped in undiluted form from original containers through suitable hose, to the point of treatment or to a covered day tank.
5.4.3 Sodium chlorite for chlorine dioxide generation

Proposals for the storage and use of sodium chlorite must be approved by the Secretary prior to the preparation of final plans and specifications. Provisions shall be made for proper storage and handling of sodium chlorite to eliminate any danger of explosion.

(a) Storage
(1) Sodium chlorite shall be stored by itself in a separate room and preferably shall be stored in an outside building detached from the water treatment facility. It must be stored away from organic materials which would react violently with sodium chlorite.
(2) The storage structures shall be constructed of noncombustible materials.
(3) If the storage structure must be located in an area where a fire may occur, water must be available to keep the sodium chlorite area cool enough to prevent decomposition from heat and the resultant explosive conditions.
(b) Handling
(1) Care should be taken to prevent spillage.
(2) An emergency plan of operation should be available for the clean up of any spillage.
(3) Storage drums must be thoroughly flushed prior to recycling or disposal.
(c) Feeders
(1) Positive displacement feeders shall be provided.
(2) Tubing for conveying sodium chlorite or chlorine dioxide solutions shall be Type 1 PVC, polyethylene or materials recommended by the manufacturer.
(3) Chemical feeders may be installed in chlorine rooms if sufficient space is provided or facilities meeting the requirements of Appendix A Subpart 5.4.1 shall be provided.
(4) Feed lines shall be installed in a manner to prevent formation of gas pockets and shall terminate at a point of positive pressure.
(5) Check valves shall be provided to prevent the backflow of chlorine into the sodium chlorite line.
Part 6 PUMPING FACILITIES

Introduction

This Part applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems; and
(b) Domestic Bottled water systems.
6.0 General

Pumping facilities shall be designed to maintain the sanitary quality of pumped water. Subsurface pits or pump rooms and inaccessible installations should be avoided. No pumping station shall be subject to flooding. Any below grade electrical installation must be provided with a ground fault interrupted electrical service, within 50' of equipment and on all 15-20 amp receptacles.

6.1 Location

The pumping station shall be so located that the proposed site will meet the requirements for sanitary protection of water quality, hydraulics of the system and protection against interruption of service by fire, flood or any other hazard.

6.1.1 Site protection

The station shall be:

(a) elevated to a minimum of three feet above the 100- year flood elevation, or three feet above the highest recorded flood elevation, whichever is higher, or protected to such elevations;
(b) readily accessible at all times unless permitted to be out of service for the period of inaccessibility;
(c) graded around the station so as to lead surface drainage away from the station; and
(d) protected to prevent vandalism and entrance by animals or unauthorized persons.
6.2 Pumping Stations

Both raw and finished water pumping stations shall:

(a) have adequate space for the installation of additional units if needed, and for the safe servicing of all equipment;
(b) be of durable construction, fire and weather resistant and with outward-opening doors;
(c) have a floor elevation of at least six inches above finished grade;
(d) have underground structure waterproofed;
(e) have all floors drained in such a manner that the quality of the potable water will not be endangered. All floors shall be well drained with a positive slope to a floor drain; and
(f) provide a suitable outlet for drainage from pump glands without discharging onto the floor.
6.2.1 Suction well

Suction wells shall:

(a) be watertight;
(b) have floors sloped to permit removal of water and entrained solids; and
(c) be covered or otherwise protected against contamination.
6.2.2 Equipment servicing

Pump stations shall be provided with:

(a) craneways, hoist beams, eyebolts, or other adequate facilities for servicing or removal of pumps, motors or other heavy equipment;
(b) openings in floors, roofs, or wherever else needed for removal of heavy or bulky equipment; and
(c) a convenient tool board, or other facilities as needed, for proper maintenance of the equipment.
6.2.3 Stairways and ladders

Stairways or ladders shall:

(a) be provided between all floors, and in pits or compartments which must be entered;
(b) have handrails on both sides, and treads of non-slip material. Stairs are preferred in areas where there is frequent traffic or where supplies are transported by hand. They shall have risers not exceeding nine inches and treads wide enough for safety; and
(c) conform to OSHA and VOSHA regulations covering these fixtures
6.2.4 Heating

Provisions shall be made for adequate heating for:

(a) the comfort of the operator; and
(b) the safe and efficient operation of the equipment.

In pump houses not occupied by personnel, only enough heat need be provided to prevent freezing of equipment or treatment processes.

6.2.5 Ventilation

Ventilation shall conform to existing local and/or state codes. Adequate ventilation shall be provided for all pumping stations. Forced ventilation of at least six changes of air per hour shall be provided for:

(a) all rooms, compartments, pits and other enclosures below ground floor; and
(b) any areas where unsafe atmosphere may develop or where excessive heat may be built up.
6.2.6 Dehumidification

In areas where excess moisture could cause hazards to safety or damage to equipment, means for dehumidification should be provided.

6.2.7 Lighting

Pump stations shall be adequately lighted throughout. All electrical work shall conform to the requirements of the American Insurance Associations and related agencies and to the relevant state and/or local codes.

6.2.8 Sanitary and Other Conveniences

All pumping stations that are regularly occupied for extended periods should be provided with potable water, lavatory and toilet facilities. Plumbing must be so installed to prevent contamination of a Public water system. Wastes shall be discharged in accordance with Appendix A Subpart 4.10 and with other applicable regulations.

6.3 Pumps

At least two pumping units shall be provided. With any pump out of service, the remaining pump or pumps shall be capable of providing the maximum daily pumping demand of the system. Pumping stations for Public Non-Community systems may be designed with one pumping unit. The pumping unit(s) shall:

(a) have ample capacity to supply the peak demand without dangerous overloading. The calculated peak demand should be no less than the total gpm obtained by using fixture methods outlined in, AWWA Manual M22, Sizing Water Service Lines and Meters, or the required fire flows if fire hydrants are provided for the system;
(b) be driven by a prime mover able to operate against the maximum head;
(c) have spare parts and tools readily available; and
(d) be served by control equipment that has proper heater and overload protection for air temperature encountered.
6.3.1 Suction Lift

Suction lift should:

(a) be avoided, if possible; and
(b) be within allowable limits, preferably less than 15 feet.

If suction lift is necessary, provision shall be made for priming the pumps.

6.3.2 Priming

Prime water must not be of lesser sanitary quality than that of the water being pumped. Means shall be provided to prevent back siphonage. When an air operated ejector is used, the screened intake shall draw clean air from a point at least 10 feet above the ground or other source of possible contamination, unless the air is filtered by an apparatus approved by the Secretary. Vacuum priming may be used.

6.4 Booster Pumps (Main Line)

Booster pumps shall be located or controlled so that:

(a) they will not produce negative pressure in their suction lines;
(b) the intake pressure shall be at least 20 psi when the pump is in normal operation;
(c) automatic cutoff pressure shall be at least 10 psi in the suction line;
(d) automatic or remote control devices shall have a range between the start and cutoff pressure which will prevent excessive cycling; and
(e) a bypass is available.
6.4.1 Duplicate Pumps

Each booster pumping station should contain not less than two pumps with capacities such that peak demand can be satisfied with the largest pump out of service.

6.4.2 Metering

All booster pumping stations should contain a totalizer meter.

6.4.3 Inline Booster Pumps

In addition to the other requirements of this part, inline booster pumps shall be accessible for servicing and repairs.

6.5 Automatic amp; Remote Controlled Stations

All automatic stations should be provided with automatic signaling apparatus which will report when the station is out of service. All remote controlled stations shall be electrically operated and controlled and shall have signaling apparatus of proven performance. Installation of electrical equipment shall conform with the applicable state and local electrical codes and the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.

6.6 Appurtenances
6.6.1 Valves

Pumps shall be adequately valved to permit satisfactory operation, maintenance and repair of the equipment. If foot valves are necessary, they shall have a net valve area of at least 2.5 times the area of the suction pipe and they shall be screened. Each pump shall have a positive-acting check valve on the discharge side between the pump and the shutoff valve.

6.6.2 Piping

In general, piping shall:

(a) be designed so that the friction losses will be minimized;
(b) not be subject to contamination;
(c) have watertight joints;
(d) be protected against surge or water hammer; and
(e) be such that each pump has an individual suction line or that the lines shall be so manifolded that they will insure similar hydraulic and operating conditions.
6.6.3 Gauges and Meters

Each pump:

(a) shall have a standard pressure gauge on its discharge line;
(b) shall have a compound gauge on its suction line;
(c) shall have recording gauges in the larger stations; and
(d) should have a means for measuring the discharge.

The station should have indicating, totalizing, and recording metering of the total water pumped.

6.6.4 Water Seals

Water seals shall not be supplied with water of a lesser sanitary quality than that of the water being pumped. Where pumps are sealed with potable water and are pumping water of lesser sanitary quality, the seal shall:

(a) be provided with a break tank open to atmospheric pressure; and
(b) have an air gap of at least six inches or two pipe diameters, whichever is greater, between the feeder line and the spill line of the tank.
6.6.5 Controls

Pumps, their prime movers and accessories, shall be controlled in such a manner that they will operate at rated capacity without dangerous overload. Where two or more pumps are installed, provision shall be made for alteration. Provision shall be made to prevent energizing the motor in the event of a backspin cycle. Electrical controls shall be located above grade.

6.6.6 Water Prelubrication

When automatic pre lubrication of pump bearings is necessary and an auxiliary direct drive power supply is provided, the pre-lubrication line shall be provided with a valved bypass around the automatic control so that the bearings can, if necessary, be lubricated manually before the pump is started or the pre lubrication controls shall be wired to the auxiliary power supply.

6.6.7 Standby power

To ensure continuous service when the primary power has been interrupted, a power supply shall be provided from at least two independent sources or a standby or an auxiliary source shall be provided. If standby power is provided by onsite generators or engines the fuel storage and fuel line must be designed to protect the water system from contamination. Natural gas or bottled gas is the preferred fuel. This requirement may be waived for small sized systems on a case by case basis.

Part 7 FINISHED WATER STORAGE

Introduction

This Part applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems; and
(b) Domestic Bottled water systems.
7.0 General

The materials and designs used for finished water storage structures shall provide stability and durability as well as protect the quality of the stored water. Steel structures shall follow the current AWWA standards concerning steel tanks, standpipes, reservoirs, and elevated tanks wherever they are applicable. Other materials of construction are acceptable when properly designed to meet the requirements of Appendix A Part 7. Design for cast-in-place and pre-cast concrete structures must show the placement of structural steel and specify the material for sealing the joints.

7.0.1 Sizing

Storage facilities shall have sufficient capacity, as determined from engineering studies, to meet average daily domestic demands, and where fire protection is provided, fire flow demands.

(a) When fire protection is provided, the minimum flow requirement shall be 500 gpm at 20 p.s.i. system residual pressure for a 2-hour duration for residential structures. If the Insurance Services Office or a other responsible agency (e.g., local fire department) recommends a higher flow rate than this minimum, the higher flow rate should be considered.
(b) The minimum storage capacity (or equivalent capacity) for systems not providing fire protection shall be equal to the average daily demand. This requirement may be reduced when the source and treatment facilities have sufficient capacity with standby power to supplement peak demands of the system.
(c) Level control is recommended but low water level alarm is required for Public Community water systems. (See Appendix A Subpart 7.3.3)
7.0.2 Location of ground level reservoirs
(a) The bottom of reservoirs and standpipes shall be above maximum flood level. Steel and glass fused to steel water storage tanks shall be placed at the normal ground surface. Cast in place and pre-cast, prestressed concrete storage structures may be partially buried. In order to determine the location of other materials, consult with the Secretary's staff.
(b) The bottom of any reservoir or standpipe shall be placed above the groundwater table. Artificially lowering the groundwater table is acceptable. Sewers, drains, standing water, and similar sources of possible contamination must be kept at least fifty feet from the reservoir. Water main pipe, pressure tested in place to 50 psi without leakage, may be used for gravity sewers at distances greater than 20 feet and less than 50 feet.
(c) The top of a reservoir shall not be less than two feet above normal ground surface. Clear wells constructed under filters may be exempted from this requirement when the total design gives the same protection.
7.0.3 Location of Below Grade Reservoirs

Below grade installation may be acceptable for reservoirs. Provisions shall be made to minimize the risk of reservoir damage and the tendency of the tank to float during high groundwater conditions. The top of any earth covered reservoir shall be covered with a flexible waterproof membrane as approved by the Secretary.

7.0.4 Protection

All finished water storage structures shall have suitable watertight roofs which exclude birds, animals, insects, and excessive dust and shall have a perimeter drain at least 4" in diameter, if determined to be necessary, on a case-by-case basis.

7.0.5 Protection from Trespassers

Necessary precautions shall be provided to deter trespassing, vandalism, and sabotage.

7.0.6 Inflow and Outflow

Inflow and outflow shall be positioned so as to maximize chlorine contact time, if applicable.

7.0.7 Drains

No drain on a water storage structure may have a direct connection to a sewer or storm drain. The design shall allow draining the storage facility for cleaning or maintenance without causing loss of pressure in the distribution system.

7.0.8 Overflow

All water storage structures shall be provided with an overflow which should terminate 12 to 24 inches above the ground surface, and discharges over a drainage inlet structure or a splash plate. No overflow may be connected directly to a sewer or storm drain. All overflow pipes shall be located so that any discharge is visible.

(a) The overflow shall be constructed of metallic pipe open downward and be screened with 24 mesh non-corrodible screen installed within the pipe at a location least susceptible to damage by vandalism.
(b) The overflow pipe shall be of sufficient diameter to permit discharge of water in excess of the filling rate.
(c) When an internal overflow pipe is used on elevated tanks it shall be located in the access tube. For vertical drops on the other types of storage facilities, the over flow pipe shall be located on the outside of the structure.
7.0.9 Access

Finished water storage structures shall be designed with reasonably convenient access to the interior floor for cleaning and maintenance. Entrances above the water line shall:

(a) be framed at least four inches, and preferably six inches, above the surface of the roof at the opening. On ground level structures, entrances should be elevated at least 18 inches above the top or covering sod;
(b) be fitted with a solid watertight cover which overlaps the framed opening and extends down around the frame at least two inches;
(c) be hinged at one side; and
(d) have a locking device.
7.0.10 Vents

Finished water storage structures shall be vented. Overflows shall not be considered as vents. Open construction between the sidewall and roof is not permissible. Vents shall:

(a) be made of metallic or other durable pipe;
(b) prevent the entrance of surface water and rainwater;
(c) exclude birds and animals;
(d) will exclude insects and dust, as much as this function can be made compatible with effective venting, (for elevated tanks and standpipes, four mesh non-corrodible screen may be used);
(e) on ground level structures, terminate in an inverted J construction with the opening 24 to 36 inches above the roof or sod and protected with 24 mesh non-corrodible screen installed within the pipe at a location least susceptible to vandalism; and
(f) be adequately sized to keep the effects of negative pressure safely within the design load of the structure.
7.0.11 Roof and sidewall

The roof and sidewalls of all structures must be watertight with no openings except properly constructed vents, manholes, overflows, risers, drains, pump mountings, control ports, or piping for inflow and outflow.

(a) Any pipes running through the roof or sidewall of a finished water storage structure must be welded, or properly gasketed in metal tanks. In concrete tanks, these pipes shall be connected to standard wall castings which were poured in place during the forming of the concrete. These wall castings should have seepage rings imbedded in the concrete.
(b) Openings in a storage structure roof or top, designed to accommodate control apparatus or pump columns, shall be curbed and sleeved with proper additional shielding to prevent the access of surface or floor drainage water into the structure.
(c) Valves and controls should be located outside the storage structure so that the valve stems and similar projections will not pass through the roof or top of the reservoir.
(d) The roof of concrete reservoirs with earthen cover shall be sloped to facilitate drainage. Consideration shall be given to installation of an impermeable roof covering.
7.0.12 Drainage of roof

The roof of the storage structure shall be well drained. Down spout pipes shall not enter or pass through the reservoir parapets, or similar construction which would tend to hold water and snow on the roof, will not be approved unless adequate waterproofing and drainage are provided.

7.0.13 Safety

The safety of employees must be considered in the design of the storage structure. As a minimum, such matters shall conform to pertinent laws and regulations of the area where the reservoir is constructed.

(a) Ladders, ladder guards, balcony railings, and safely located entrance hatches shall be provided where applicable.
(b) Elevated tanks with riser pipes over eight inches in diameter shall have protective bars over the riser openings inside the tank.
(c) Railings or handholds shall be provided on elevated tanks where persons must transfer from the access tube to the water compartment.
7.0.14 Freezing

All finished water storage structures and their appurtenances, especially the riser pipes, overflows, and vents, shall be designed to prevent freezing which could interfere with proper functioning.

7.0.15 Internal catwalk

Every catwalk over finished water in a storage structure shall have a solid floor with raised edges so designed that shoe scrapings and dirt will not fall into the water.

7.0.16 Silt stop

The discharge pipes from all reservoirs shall be located in a manner that will prevent the flow of sediment into the distribution system. Removable silt stops should be provided.

7.0.17 Grading

The area surrounding a ground level structure shall be graded in a manner that will prevent surface water from standing within 50 feet of it.

7.0.18 Painting and/or cathodic protection

Proper protection shall be given to metal surfaces by paints or other protective coatings, by cathodic protective devices, or by both.

(a) Paints systems shall be acceptable to the Secretary (either EPA or NSF approved). Interior paint must be properly applied and cured. After curing, the coating shall not transfer any substances to the water which will be toxic or cause tastes or odors. Prior to placing in service, an analysis for volatile organic compounds is required to establish that the coating is properly cured.
(b) Wax coatings for the tank interior should not be used on new tanks. Re coating with a wax system is discouraged; however, the old wax coating must be completely removed to use another tank coating.
(c) Cathodic protection should be designed and installed by competent technical personnel; a maintenance contract should be provided.
7.0.19 Disinfection
(a) Finished water storage structures shall be disinfected in accordance with current AWWA Standard C652. Two or more successive sets of samples, taken at 24 hour intervals, shall indicate microbiologically satisfactory water before the facility is placed into operation.
(b) Disposal of heavily chlorinated water from the tank disinfection process shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Secretary.
(c) The disinfection procedure (AWWA chlorination method 3, section 4.3 C652) which allows use of the chlorinated water held in the storage tank for disinfection purposes is not recommended. When that procedure is used, it is required that the initial heavily chlorinated water be properly disposed in order to prevent release of water which may contain various chlorinated organic compounds into the distribution system.
7.1 Plant Storage

The applicable design standards of Appendix A Subpart 7.0 shall be followed for plant storage.

7.1.1 Washwater tanks

Washwater tanks shall be sized, in conjunction with available pump units and finished water storage, to provide the backwash water required by Appendix A Subpart 4.2.1.10. Consideration shall be given to the backwashing of several filters in rapid succession.

7.1.2 Clear well

Clear well storage should be sized, in conjunction with the distribution system storage, to relieve the filters from having to follow fluctuations in water use.

(a) When finished water storage is used to provide contact time for chlorine (see Appendix A Subpart 4.3.2) special attention shall be given to size and baffling.
(b) An overflow shall be provided.
7.1.3 Adjacent compartments

Finished water must not be stored or conveyed in a compartment adjacent to unsafe water when the two compartments are separated by a single wall.

7.1.4 Basins and wet wells

Receiving basins and pump wet wells for finished water shall be designed as finished water storage structures.

7.2 Hydropneumatic Tanks

Hydropneumatic (pressure) tanks, when provided as the only storage facility, are acceptable only in very small water systems. When serving more than 150 living units, ground or elevated storage designed in accordance with Appendix A Subpart 7.0.1 should be provided. Pressure tank storage is not to be considered for fire protection purposes. Pressure tanks shall meet ASME code requirements.

7.2.1 Location

The tank should be located above the normal ground surface and be completely housed, except that a pressure tank may be placed below grade within a building served by the system if adequate drainage and access are provided.

7.2.2 Sizing
(a) The capacity of the pumps in a hydropneumatic system should be at least ten times the average daily consumption rate or capable of meeting the peak instantaneous demand (See Appendix A Subpart 6.3). The usable volume of the hydropneumatic tank, in gallons, should be chosen from the following table based upon the type, horsepower and average capacity rated in gallons per minute of the largest pump in the system. For example, a 3/4 horsepower, single phase submersible pump rated at 20 gpm would require a pressure tank with a usable volume of 24 gallons.

Submersible Pumps

Pump Motor Rating

Cycles per Hour

Usable Tank Volume

Up to: 3/4 HP single phase or5 HP three phase

12.5

1.2 x PC

1 to 5 HP single phase or 7 1/2 HP & over three phase

4.17

3.6 x PC

7 1/2 HP & over single phase

2

7.5 x PC

Non-submersible Pumps

Pump Motor Rating

Cycles per Hour

Usable Tank Volume

All horsepower and phases

2

2.5 x PC

* PC = capacity of largest pump in gpm

(b) Sizing of hydropneumatic storage tanks must consider the need for chlorine detention time, as applicable, independent of the requirements in Appendix A Subpart 7.2.2.a above.
7.2.3 Piping

The tank shall have bypass piping to permit operation of the system while it is being repaired or painted.

7.2.4 Appurtenances

Each tank without a separate air bladder shall have an access hole, a drain, and control equipment consisting of pressure gauge, water sight glass, automatic or manual air blow-off, means for adding air, and pressure operated start-stop controls for the pumps. Where practical the access manhole should be 24 inches in diameter.

7.3 Distribution Storage

The applicable design standards of this subpart shall be followed for distribution system storage.

7.3.1 Pressures

The maximum variation between high and low levels in storage structures providing pressure to a distribution system should not exceed 30 feet. The minimum working pressure in the distribution system should be 35 psi and the normal working pressure should be approximately 60 psi.

When static pressures exceed 100 psi, pressure reducing devices should be provided on mains in the distribution system.

7.3.2 Drainage

Storage structures which provide pressure directly to the distribution system shall be designed so they can be isolated from the distribution system and drained for cleaning or maintenance without necessitating loss of pressure in the distribution system. The drain shall discharge to the ground surface with no direct connection to a sewer or storm drain.

7.3.3 Level Controls

Controls shall be provided to maintain levels in distribution system storage structures. Level indicating devices should be provided at a central location. Low level alarms are required.

(a) Pumps should be controlled from tank levels with the signal transmitted by telemetering equipment when any appreciable head loss occurs in the distribution system between the source and the storage structure.
(b) Altitude valves or equivalent controls may be required for second and subsequent structures on the system.
(c) Overflow and low-level warnings or alarms shall be located at places in the community where they will be under responsible surveillance 24 hours a day. This requirement does not apply to Public NonCommunity water systems.
(d) The low water level control shall be high enough so that the water system operator has time to correct the problem before a water shortage occurs.
Part 8 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

Introduction

This Part applies to:

(a) Public Community water systems; and
(b) Domestic Bottled water systems.
8.0 Materials
8.0.1 Standards, Materials Selection

Pipe, fittings, valves and fire hydrants shall conform to the latest standards issued by the AWWA. Special attention shall be given to selecting pipe materials which will protect against both internal and external pipe corrosion.

8.0.2 Used materials

Water mains which have been used previously for conveying potable water may be reused provided they meet the above standards and have been restored practically to their original condition.

8.0.3 Joints

Packing and jointing materials used in the joints of pipe shall meet the standards of the AWWA, C-111. Pipe having mechanical joints or slip-on joints with rubber gaskets is preferred.

8.1 Water Main Design
8.1.1 Pressure

All water mains, including those not designed to provide fire protection, shall be sized after a hydraulic analysis based on flow demands and pressure requirements. The system shall be designed to maintain a minimum pressure of 20 psi at ground level at all points in the distribution system under all conditions of flow. The normal working pressure in the distribution system should be approximately 60 psi and not less than 35 psi.

8.1.2 Diameter

The minimum size of water main for providing fire protection and serving fire hydrants shall be eight inch diameter. Larger size mains will be required if necessary to allow the withdrawal of the required fire flow while maintaining the minimum residual pressure specified in Appendix A Subpart 8.1.1.

8.1.3 Fire Protection

When fire protection is to be provided, system design shall meet the minimum flow standards in Appendix A, Part 7.0.1.

8.1.4 Small Mains

Any departure from minimum requirements shall be justified by hydraulic analysis and future water use, and will be considered only in special circumstances.

8.1.5 Hydrants

Water mains not designed to carry fire flows shall not have fire hydrants connected to them.

8.1.6 Dead ends

Dead ends shall be minimized by looping of all mains whenever practical.

8.1.7 Flushing

Where dead end mains occur they shall be provided with a fire hydrant if flow and pressure are sufficient, or with an approved flushing hydrant or blow off for flushing purposes. Flushing devices should be sized to provide flows which will give a velocity of at least 2.5 feet per second in the water main being flushed. No flushing device shall be directly connected to any sewer. The open end of a blow off must be capped and terminate at least 18 inches above grade.

8.2 Valves

Sufficient valves shall be provided on water mains so that inconvenience and sanitary hazards will be minimized during repairs. Valves should be located at not more than 500 foot intervals in commercial districts, at not more than one block or 800 foot intervals in other districts, and at not more than 5000 foot intervals on transmission lines.

8.3 Hydrants
8.3.1 Location and spacing

Hydrants should be provided at each street intersection and at intermediate points between intersections as recommended by the state Insurance Services Office. Generally, hydrant spacing may range from 350 to 600 feet depending on the area being served.

8.3.2 Valves and nozzles

Fire hydrants should have a bottom valve size of at least five inches in diameter, one 4.5 inch diameter pumper nozzle and two 2.5 inch diameter nozzles.

8.3.3 Hydrant leads

The hydrant lead shall be a minimum of six inches in diameter. Auxiliary valves shall be installed in all hydrant leads.

8.3.4 Drainage

Hydrant drains should be plugged. When the drains are plugged the barrels must be pumped dry after use during freezing weather. Where hydrant drains are not plugged, a gravel pocket or dry well shall be provided unless the natural soils will provide adequate drainage. Hydrant drains shall not be connected to or located within 10 feet of sanitary sewers or storm drains.

8.4 Air Relief Valves: Valve, Meter amp; Blow-Off Chambers
8.4.1 Air relief valves

At high points in water mains where air can accumulate, provisions shall be made to remove the air by means of hydrants or air relief valves. Automatic air relief valves shall not be used in situations where flooding of the accessway or chamber may occur.

8.4.2 Air relief valve piping

The open end of an air relief pipe from the automatic valve shall be extended to at least 1 foot above grade and provided with a screened, downward-facing elbow. The pipe from a manually operated valve shall be extended to the top of the pit.

8.4.3 Chamber drainage

Chambers, pits or manholes containing valves, blow-offs, meters, or other such appurtenances to a distribution system, shall not be connected directly to any storm drain or sanitary sewer, nor shall blowoffs or air relief valves be connected directly to any sewer. Such chambers or pits shall be drained to the surface of the ground where they are not subject to flooding by surface water, or to absorption pits underground.

8.5 Installation of Mains
8.5.1 Standards
8.5.1.1 Job specifications shall incorporate applicable provisions of the AWWA Standards. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures may be specified when they are equal to or better than AWWA procedures.
8.5.1.2 Piping, fittings and appurtenances which have been previously used for purposes other than for Public water system use shall not be used in a Public water system without the written approval of the Secretary.
8.5.2 Bedding

A continuous and uniform bedding shall be provided in the trench for all buried pipe. Back fill material shall be tamped in layers around the pipe and to a sufficient height above the pipe to adequately support and protect the pipe. Stones found in the trench shall be removed for a depth of at least six inches below the bottom of the pipe.

8.5.3 The open ends of exposed pipe shall be left plugged in excavations at the conclusions of the day's work. During periods of delay and at the conclusion of the day's work, lengths of pipe with open ends shall be tightly closed with watertight plugs, special seals or by other suitable means to prevent the entry of animals, foreign matter and trench water. Trench water shall be pumped out before the seals, plugs or other closures are removed.
8.5.4 Cover

All water mains shall be covered with at least 5.5 feet of earth. Insulation may be used in lieu of cover depth when approved in advance by the Secretary.

8.5.5 Thrust Blocks

All tees, bends, plugs and hydrants shall be provided with reaction blocking, tie rods or joints designed to prevent movement. Specifications shall include a requirement that all air be removed from the pipes before water at test pressure levels is added. Size of blocks shall be specified and design basis shown (i.e. type of soil, design water pressure used).

8.5.6 Pressure and leakage testing

All types of installed pipe shall be pressure tested and leakage tested in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA Standard C600.

8.5.7 Disinfection

All new, cleaned or repaired water mains shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA Standard C651, latest published version. The specifications shall include detailed procedures for the adequate flushing, disinfection, and microbiological testing of all water mains. If bacteriological tests show the treatment to be unsatisfactory, the disinfection procedures shall be repeated until satisfactory bacteriological sample results are obtained. The tablet method in AWWA Standard 651 is not acceptable.

8.6 Separation of Water Mains, Sanitary Sewers, Storm Sewers amp; Other Sources of Contamination
8.6.1 General

The following factors should be considered in providing adequate separation:

(a) materials and type of joints for water and sewer pipes;
(b) soil conditions;
(c) service and branch connections into the water main and sewer line;
(d) compensating variations in the horizontal and vertical separations;
(e) space for repair and alterations of water and sewer pipes; and
(f) off-setting of pipes around manholes.
8.6.2 Parallel installation

Water mains shall be laid at least 10 feet horizontally from any existing or proposed manhole or sanitary sewer. This distance can be reduced to 5 feet for storm sewers. The distance shall be measured edge to edge. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a 10 foot separation, the Secretary may allow deviation on a case-by-case basis if supported by data from the design engineer. Such deviation may allow installation of the water main closer to a sewer, provided that the water main is laid in a separate trench or on an undisturbed earth shelf located on one side of the sewer at such an elevation that the bottom of the water main is at least 18 inches above the top of the sewer. See Appendix A Subpart 8.6.4 for approval required for such exception.

8.6.3 Crossings

Water mains crossing sewers shall be laid to provide a minimum vertical distance of 18 inches between the outside of the water main and the outside of the sewer. This shall be the case where the water main is either above or below the sewer. At crossings, one full length of water pipe shall be located so both joints will be as far from the sewer as possible. If the sewer main is over the water main, the first sewer pipe joints on each side of the water main must be concrete encased. Special structural support for the water and sewer pipes may be required. Water mains shall not pass through sewer manholes or be submerged in basins containing sewage or other grossly contaminated or hazardous material. Stream crossings shall meet the provisions of Appendix A Subpart 8.7.

8.6.4 Exception

The Secretary must specifically approve any variance from the requirements of Appendix A Subparts 8.6.2, 8.6.3, 8.6.6 and 8.6.7 when it is impossible to obtain the specified separation distances. Where sewers are being installed and Appendix A Subparts 8.6.2 and 8.6.3 cannot be met, the sewer materials shall be water main pipe or equivalent and shall be pressure tested to ensure water tightness.

8.6.5 Force mains

There shall be at least a 10 foot horizontal separation between water mains and sanitary sewer force mains. There shall be an 18 inch vertical separation at crossings as required in Appendix A Subpart 8.6.3.

8.6.6 Septic Tanks and Leach Fields

Distribution lines shall be placed not closer than fifty (50) feet horizontal distance from any septic tank or leach field except as provided in Appendix A Subpart 8.6.4.

8.6.7 Other underground storage tanks

Distribution lines shall be placed not closer than twenty five (25) feet horizontal distance from underground storage tanks. Fifty (50) feet separation is preferable except as provided in Appendix A Subpart 8.6.4.

8.7 Surface Water Crossings

Surface water crossings, whether over or under water, present special problems. The Secretary shall be consulted before final plans are prepared.

8.7.1 Above-water crossings

The pipe shall be adequately supported and anchored, protected from damage and freezing, and accessible for repair or replacement.

8.7.2 Underwater crossings

A minimum cover of two feet shall be provided over the pipe. When crossing water courses greater than 15 feet in width, the following shall be provided:

(a) the pipe shall be of special construction, having flexible water tight joints;
(b) valves shall be provided at both ends of water crossings so that the section can be isolated for testing or repair; the valves shall be easily accessible, and not subject to flooding; and the valve closest to the supply source shall be in a manhole; and
(c) permanent taps shall be made on each side of the valve within the manhole to allow insertion of a small meter to determine leakage and for sampling purposes.
8.8 Cross-Connections amp; Interconnections
8.8.1 Cross-connections

There shall be no connection between the distribution system and any pipes, pumps, hydrants, or tanks whereby unsafe water or other contaminating materials may be discharged or drawn into the system. This does not preclude approved cross connection control devices.

8.8.2 Cooling water; Heating Water
(a) Neither steam condensate nor cooling water from engine jackets or other heat exchange devices shall be returned to a public water supply.
(b) Notwithstanding subsection (a) of this section, standing column geothermal systems are allowed provided that:
(1) No additive is added to the re-circulated groundwater:
(2) The heat exchange medium in the system is R-410A or a different heat exchange medium approved by the Secretary;
(3) The system has a low pressure safety cutout circuit that will turn off the system when there is a pressure leak in the heat exchange medium containment vessel;
(4) All electrical components of the system are properly grounded to prevent potential electrolysis of metals; and
(5) In the event that the heat exchange unit is disconnected as a heating or cooling source, all piping associated with the unit shall either be capped and labeled or removed.
(c) For the purposes of this section, a standing column geothermal system is one where groundwater is taken from a public water supply well for heating and/or cooling purposes and re-circulated back into the same well below the estimated low water elevation of the well.
8.8.3 Interconnections

Drains from the fire hydrants, air relief pits and blow off valve pits shall not connect directly to sewer lines or discharge at a point which will permit possible back siphonage conditions. The approval of the Secretary shall be obtained for interconnections between potable water systems.

8.9 Service Meters

Each service connection should be individually metered.

8.10 Water Loading Stations

Water loading stations present special problems since the fill line may be used for filling both potable water vessels and other tanks or contaminated vessels. To prevent contamination of both the Public system and potable water vessels being filled, the following principles shall be met in the design of water loading stations:

(a) there shall be no backflow to the Public water system;
(b) the piping arrangement shall prevent contaminant being transferred from a hauling vessel to others subsequently using the station; and
(c) hoses shall not be contaminated by contact with the ground.
Part 9 (RESERVED)
Part 10 (RESERVED)
Part 11 NON-COMMUNITY WATER SYSTEMS
11.1 Introduction and Definitions
11.1.0 General

This part provides regulation and guidance for potable water sources, storage, and distribution systems serving Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems and Public Transient Non-Community water systems. Information to be submitted with permit applications, methodologies to be used in source evaluation, and minimum standards for construction and operation of such systems are provided.

Public Transient Non-Community water systems are administered by the Department's Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division.

These standards and limits represent minimum criteria. Designers should note that the use of this part requires professional judgement. The standards are minimal and the safety factors are marginal, and will not yield satisfactory designs, by themselves, in all situations.

These regulations have two principal goals:

(a) the prevention of health hazards caused by water sources of inadequate quality and quantity; and
(b) the assurance that water sources and distribution systems are adequate for the needs of a project.
11.1.1 Alternative Designs

The professional engineer may propose alternative engineering designs for water systems and justify the design based on its reliability in providing water of adequate quality and quantity for the size and nature of the project.

11.1.2 Definitions

The following definitions apply for the purposes of this Part (Appendix A Part 11); additional definitions are contained in Subchapter 21-2.

AVERAGE DAY DEMAND - The volume of water anticipated to be used by a particular building or project in a 24 hour period; expressed in gallons per day (gpd).

CONSTANT DISCHARGE PUMPING TEST - A test of a water source in which the well is pumped for a specified duration at one flow rate to determine the yield of the well, aquifer characteristics and/or well interference.

FLOOD PLAIN - Any area which is flooded with an average frequency of once or more in each 100 years as determined by the Secretary.

FLOODWAY - The channel of a river or other water course and the adjacent land areas that must be reserved in order to discharge a 100 year frequency flood without cumulatively increasing the water surface elevation more than one foot.

HYDROFRACTURING - A method of bedrock well development used to increase the yield of wells, in which high pressures are generated in the well to open fractures. Propping agents may be introduced to keep the fractures open.

HYDROGEOLOGIC CONNECTION - A situation where a water source is down- gradient of a potential source of contamination under either natural groundwater flow conditions or pumping conditions.

INSTANTANEOUS PEAK DEMAND - The instantaneous flow rate that the system must satisfy. This is determined by the number and type of plumbing fixtures on it.

LICENSED WELL DRILLER - An individual licensed under the Vermont Well Driller Licensing Rules and Standards.

LONG-TERM YIELD - The amount of water that the source is capable of providing on a daily basis over the design life of the project; expressed in gallons per minute (gpm).

MAXIMUM DAY DEMAND - For Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems and Public Transient Non-Community water systems, the rate at which the average day demand is to be used by a particular building or project divided by not more than 720 minutes; expressed in gallons per minute (gpm).

QUALIFIED CONSULTANT - Certified Site Technician, or Vermont Registered Professional Engineer, working within the scope of his or her certification and expertise.

SHALLOW WATER SOURCE - A developed structure to collect groundwater, generally less than 20 feet deep. This includes springs, dug wells, jetted wells, drilled wells, and well points, and other water intake structures which may or may not be under the jurisdiction of the Vermont Well Driller's Rules and Construction Standards.

SOURCE INTERFERENCE - Public water systems and potable water supplies affected by the pumping of other proposed or existing sources.

STATE ELECTRICAL CODE - State of Vermont Electrical Safety Rule adopted by the Vermont Department of Public Safety per 26 V.S.A. § 891.

STATE PLUMBING CODE - State of Vermont Plumbing Rule, adopted by the Vermont Department of Public Safety per 26 V.S.A. § 2173.

TOTAL AVAILABLE HEAD - The difference in elevation between the static water level and the hydraulic base of a well.

WATER SOURCE - An existing or permitted water well or shallow water source designed to collect potable groundwater.

WATER SYSTEM - The source, pumping facility, storage, distribution system and related appurtenances used to provide potable water.

11.2 Preconstruction Requirements
11.2.0 General

For all Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems and Public Transient Non-Community water systems, a water source site plan, basis of design statement, and design plans and specifications, along with all available information on the source, must be submitted with the permit application. In addition, a Long Range Plan, Source Protection Plan, and Engineer's Report, as required by Subchapters 4.2.2, 5.5(e), 15.1, and 16.1, must be submitted for new Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems. Some of this information may be developed in pre-application work and may require review and approval by the Secretary before an application will be considered complete.

Increased demands to existing or previously approved Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems and Public Transient Non-Community water systems will require analysis of additional maximum day demand and/or instantaneous peak demand.

11.2.1 Basis of Design
A statement of the basis of design, and supporting calculations, shall include:
(a) Average Day Demand;
(b) Maximum Day Demand;
(c) Instantaneous Peak Demand;
(d) Source Capacity;
(e) Storage Capacity;
(f) Pump Capacities;
(g) Operating Pressure Ranges; and
(h) reference to the flood plain
11.2.2 Water Source Site Plan

A water source site plan shall include:

(a) plan view at a scale of 1" = 200', or larger;
(b) surface drainage features and general topography;
(c) potential sources of contamination within the distances listed in Appendix A Part 11 Tables 11-1 and 11-2;
(d) neighboring wells as shown in the interference monitoring distance table; and
(e) minimum separation zones per Appendix A Subpart 11.4.1.
11.2.3 Design Plans and Specifications

The design plans and specifications shall include:

(a) source development, transmission, storage and distribution;
(b) system component site plan at a scale of 1" = 100', or larger;
(c) piping, valving and standard pressure; and
(d) specific construction instructions.
11.2.4 Source Development and Testing
11.2.4.1 Projects with Maximum Day Demand of 5 gpm or less

These projects will be permitted prior to water source development unless there is reason to suspect that sufficient water may not be available, in which case the Secretary may:

(a) require that the water source be developed and tested before the permit is issued; or
(b) issue a permit with a condition that the water source be developed and tested before a subdivision is created, a building is constructed or a mobile home park is established.
11.2.4.2 Projects with Maximum Day Demand of More Than 5 gpm

These projects will not normally be permitted before the source is developed and tested, unless:

(a) the applicant demonstrates a high probability of adequate yield and quality from the proposed water source. In such a case the source must be developed, tested and analyzed in accord with Subpart 11.6 prior to the creation of subdivision lots, construction of buildings or the establishment of a mobile home park.
11.2.4.3 Subdivision With Individual On-Site Sources

These projects are normally approved prior to source development. Multiple lot subdivisions may need to show evidence that adequate yields are likely to be available, and/or that proposed sources are not likely to cause unacceptable interference in nearby existing or permitted water sources.

11.3 Water System Demand
11.3.0 Average Day Demand
(a) For Public water systems, the average day demand shall be determined according to the design flows per Appendix A, Part 2, Table A2-1 of this rule.
(b) For residential units average day demand shall be 90% of the design flow.
(c) Installation of low flow plumbing fixtures, 3.5 gallon or less flush toilets, 3.0 gallon per minute or fewer showerheads, and faucet aerators will allow for a 10% reduction in design flows as calculated from Table A2-1.
11.3.1 Maximum Day Demand

The maximum day demand is calculated by dividing the average day demand by not more than 720 minutes. The resulting flow rate is expressed in gallons per minute.

11.3.2 Instantaneous Peak Demand

The instantaneous peak demand, expressed in gallons per minute (gpm), shall be calculated as follows:

(a) determined by the State Plumbing Code; or
(b) for residential units only, the instantaneous peak demand equals 5 gpm multiplied by the number of units.
11.4 Isolation and Separation Distances
11.4.0 General

The proposed site of the water source for the building or project shall be approved by the Secretary before the source is developed.

Adequate horizontal isolation distances between wells and potential sources of contamination are required. The required horizontal minimum distances are listed in Tables A11-1 and A11-2 below. Qualified consultants, Site Technicians, Professional Engineers or Hydrogeologists, as appropriate, are responsible for assuring that these minimums are adequate for individual cases, and should increase them as they deem appropriate in their professional judgement. The Secretary may increase the minimum horizontal isolation distances in Tables A11-1 and A11-2 or prescribe any additional safeguards it deems necessary when the depth to the aquifer or the nature of overburden material is not sufficient to protect the water source from pollution. The Secretary will consider permitting reductions of these individual cases only on the written request of the qualified consultants, which technically justifies the reduction in a particular case.

The minimum recommended horizontal isolation distances in these regulations from water systems to sewage systems are based on sewage treatment in soils, pathogen attenuation, effluent travel time in soil and dispersion, without site specific hydrogeologic information. Site specific data may be collected and justification made for reducing the distances listed in Tables A11-1 and A 11-2.

Table A11-1 -REQUIRED HORIZONTAL MINIMUM SEPARATION DISTANCES

POTENTIAL SOURCE OF CONTAMINATION AND OTHER SITING LIMITATIONS

SEPARATION DISTANCE

Roadway, Parking Lot (outer edge of shoulder)

25 Feet

Driveway (Fewer than 3 residences)

15 Feet

Sewage System Disposal Fields

(See a.)

Subsurface Wastewater Piping and Related Tanks

50 Feet

Property Line

10 Feet (See b.)

Limit of Herbicide Application on utility R O W

100 Feet (See c.)

Surface Water

10 Feet (See d.)

Flood ways

(See e.)

Buildings

10 Feet

Concentrated Livestock Holding Areas and Manure Storage Systems

200 Feet

Hazardous or Solid Waste Disposal Site

(See f.)

Non-sewage Wastewater Disposal Fields

(See f.)

a. See Table A11-2
b. Increased to 50' when adjacent to agricultural cropland.
c. Applies to rights-of-way (ROW) where herbicides have been applied in the past 12 months or may be applied in the future. This distance may be increased to 200' depending on the active ingredient in the herbicide according to Vermont Regulations for Control of Pesticides.
d. For Public water sources, see Appendix A, Part 3, Subpart 3.4.
e. Water sources shall not be located in a flood way.
f. If a water source is potentially downgradient of a source of contamination, then the Secretary shall apply the criteria in Appendix A Subpart 11.4.2.2.

Table A11-2 -REQUIRED MINIMUM HORIZONTAL SEPARATION DISTANCES TO SEWAGE SYSTEM DISPOSAL FIELDS

[1,] [2] (Feet)

Design Flow of Domestic Sewage System Disposal Field (GPD) Fewer than 2,000 2,000 through 6,499 Equal to or Greater than 6,500

Water Source Maximum Daily Demand (GPM)

0-1.9

2.0-4.9

5.0-7.9

8.0

100

150

200

200+ a

150

150

200

200+a

200++ b

200++b

200++b

200+a

1 The minimum separation distance, (X), is used to determine the minimum separation zone (see Appendix A Subpart 11.4.1 and Figure 11-1).
2 For shallow water sources the minimum separation distance, X, per Subpart 11.4.1, shall not be less than 150 feet, and the minimum upslope separations distance shall be 500 feet instead of 2X regardless of the minimum separation distance, X, listed. If the bottom of the well or spring is higher than the ground surface at the disposal field then the minimum separation distance, X, may be reduced to 50 feet.
a Hydrogeologic evaluation required to define potential recharge area of the source and two year time of travel.
b For all water sources with less than 8 gpm maximum daily demand, the minimum presumptive upslope separation distance to greater than 6,500 gpd leachfields, per Appendix A Subpart 11.4.1, shall be 1,000 feet instead of 2X.

FIGURE 11-1.

Click to view image

11.4.1.0 Separation Distances to Sewage System Disposal Fields

Wells and sewage system disposal fields should be located to optimize the hydrogeologic separation within the project limitations. The applicant's designer must establish a separation zone around the water source which defines the probable area of groundwater recharge to the water source. The separation zone may be established by a presumptive method which uses ground surface topography and minimum distances.

The minimum separation distances for leachfields can be also estimated by using methods to define Source Protection Areas in accord with procedures defined in this rule (see Appendix A Part 3), or with other methods approved by the Secretary.

11.4.1.1 Presumptive Minimum Separation Zone Methods for a Water Well

To determine the size and shape of the required minimum separation zone between sewage disposal fields and a water well the following steps should be taken (see Figure 11-1):

(a) draw a circle with a radius equal to the required minimum separation distance, X, from Table A11-2, around the well head or water source;
(b) now either:
(1) if the circle drawn intersects with the contour elevation of the source, then draw lines beginning at these intersections, extending upslope and perpendicular to the contours, until these lines intersect an arc with a radius equal to twice the minimum separation distance (2X) from the source. If necessary, to provide closure of the area draw an arc with radius 2X from the source; or
(2) if the circle drawn in Step 1 is in all cases at a lower elevation than the source elevation, no further delineation may be required (resulting in the smallest possible minimum separation zone of a circle with radius X); or,
(3) if the circle drawn in Step 1 is in all cases is above the elevation of the well, the water shed area or a circle with a radius of 2X, whichever is smaller, shall represent the minimum separation zone (resulting in the largest possible minimum separation zone of a circle with a radius 2X).
11.4.1.2 Presumptive Minimum Separation Zone Methods for a Shallow Water Source

To determine the size and shape of the required minimum separation zone between sewage disposal fields and a shallow water source, the following steps should be taken (see Figure A11-1):

(a) draw a circle with a radius equal to the required minimum separation distance, X, from Table A11-2, around the well head or water source;
(b) now either:
(1) if the circle drawn intersects with the contour elevation of the source, then draw lines beginning at these intersections, extending upslope and perpendicular to the contours, until these lines intersect an arc with a radius equal to 500 feet from the source. If necessary, to provide closure of the area draw an arc with radius of 500 feet from the source; or
(2) if the circle drawn in Step 1 is in all cases at a lower elevation than the source elevation, no further delineation may be required (resulting in the smallest possible minimum separation zone of a circle with radius X); or
(3) if the circle drawn in Step 1 is in all cases above the elevation of the well, the water shed area or a circle with a radius of 500 feet, whichever is smaller, shall represent the minimum separation zone (resulting in the largest possible minimum separation zone of a circle with a radius of 500 feet).
11.4.2.0 Requirements for Investigation of Potential Hydrogeologic Connections Between Water Sources and Sewage Disposal Fields

This subpart applies when a hydrogeologic connection may exist between a sewage system disposal field and a potable water source.

These distances listed in Table A11-1 amp; A11-2 provide a minimal level of protection for water sources. These distances may be increased or reduced based on site specific data.

11.4.2.0.1 Increasing the Minimum Separation Zone

These distances may be increased up to a maximum of 500 feet if a sewage disposal field is discharging upgradient of a water source and to the same unconsolidated, unconfined aquifer from which the water source is withdrawing.

11.4.2.0.2 Reduction of the Minimum Separation Zone

These distances may be reduced with the use of site specific data under the following conditions:

(a) If there is a continuous impeding layer from the sewage system disposal field to the well head, and the well is properly sealed to prevent contaminant migration along the well casing then the minimum separation zone around the well head may be reduced to a radius of not less than 100 feet; or
(b) If the groundwater flow from beneath the sewage system disposal fields is not toward a minimum separation zone around the well head that has a radius of X; or
(c) If a detailed hydrogeologic investigation reveals that groundwater flow from beneath the sewage system disposal field does not flow toward the source under pumping conditions the minimum separation zone around the well head may be reduced to a radius of not less than 100 feet; or
(d) If a detailed hydrogeologic investigation demonstrates a time of travel exceeding two years in accordance with Appendix A Subpart 11.4.2.1, then the minimum separation zone around the well head may be reduced to a radius of not less than 100 feet.
11.4.2.1 Two Year Time of Travel

If required elsewhere in Appendix A Subpart 11.4.2, then a minimum travel time of two years must exist in the materials between a potential source of contamination that may contain pathogenic microorganisms and the drinking water source. The two year travel time is based on the reasonable assurance of pathogen attenuation. Calculations of travel time must take into

account hydraulic gradient, porosity, saturated hydraulic conductivities in the materials with the largest saturated hydraulic conductivity, the cone of influence of production wells or the recharge area of springs being considered, and mounding of the water table due to groundwater recharge by discharge of the sewage effluent.

11.4.2.2 Increased Level of Contamination

The potential source(s) of contamination may not increase the level of contamination in any drinking water source to more than the Maximum Contaminant Levels (MCL) of the Drinking Water Standards in Subchapter 21-6 of this rule. Nitrate (expressed as N) may be used as an indicator when dealing with domestic (non-industrial) wastes. Calculations must take into account the concentration of nitrate-nitrogen at the base of the leachfield, which is assumed to be 40 mg/l, dilution by precipitation and groundwater flow, dispersion, background concentrations of nitrate-nitrogen, and other existing sources of nitratenitrogen, including fertilizers, in the subsurface drainage basin, using the assumption that no denitrification takes place in the subsoil. Methods of calculation and evaluation must closely approximate actual conditions and should be determined in consultation with the Secretary before any work is done.

The minimum separation distances for leachfields can be also estimated by using methods to define Source Protection Areas as contained in Appendix A Part 3 or with other methods approved by the Secretary.

11.5 Well and Spring Construction Standards
11.5.0 Water Well

The requirements of this subpart presume that water wells are constructed in compliance with Appendix A, Part 12 (Construction and Isolation Standards for Wells).

11.5.1 Spring and Shallow Well Construction
11.5.1.1 Materials

Acceptable materials include:

(a) concrete tiles (grouted together);
(b) poured in place concrete;
(c) well casing; and
(d) other metallic or plastic casing as approved by the Secretary.
11.5.1.2 Site Work

Spring and shallow well site construction shall include the following:

(a) screened ventilation or overflow openings;
(b) surface water diversion berm at least 50 feet upslope when feasible;
(c) back fill material of high clay content sloping away from source;
(d) minimum of 4 inches of top soil over the clay;
(e) a watertight, rodent-proof sanitary cover; and
(f) for public water systems, an entrance access hatch and lock.
11.6 Water Quantity Testing
11.6.0 Water Sources
11.6.0.1 Projects with a Maximum Day Demand of 5 gpm or less:

These projects:

(a) may use 50 percent of the well drillers estimated yield as long term yield; and
(b) if project maximum day demand is greater than 50 percent of the well drillers estimated yield, a constant discharge pumping test as defined in Appendix A Subpart 11.6.1 is required.
11.6.0.2 Projects with Maximum Day Demand of more than 5 gpm

These projects shall conduct a constant discharge pumping test in accord with Subpart 11.6.1 to determine the long term yield of the well.

11.6.0.3 Springs
A spring source shall require that the yield be determined by hydrogeologic flow analysis per Appendix A Subpart 11.6.1.2. Single family residences and projects classified as home occupations, shall be exempt from this requirement.
11.6.1 Long Term Yield Testing
11.6.1.1 Water Wells

When a constant discharge test is required by the provisions of Appendix A Subpart 11.6.0, the following conditions shall be met:

(a) the test shall be designed and analyzed by a qualified hydrogeologist, or a professional engineer, who is proficient in well testing and analyses;
(b) the test shall be conducted for the durations listed in Table A11-3 at a pumping rate greater than or equal to the required maximum day demand of the well;
(c) water level drawdown and rate of discharge shall be measured using accepted methods at intervals that will plot evenly on a logarithmic scale graph;
(d) the draw down measurements shall continue into the recovery period for two days or until a minimum of 90% recovery is achieved whichever occurs first.
(e) alternate testing methods may be considered by the Secretary; and
(f) monitoring for interference shall be performed as required in Appendix A Subpart 11.6.3.

Table A11-3 - CONSTANT DISCHARGE PUMPING TEST DURATION

MAXIMUM DAY DEMAND OF WELLa

MINIMUM TEST LENGTH, HOURS

0.0 - 1.9 gpm

24

2.0 - 4.9 gpm

36

5.0 - 7.9 gpm

48 b

8.0 - 49.9 gpm

72

50.0 - 99.9 gpm

96

100 gpm or Greater

120

a. Rounded to nearest tenth.

b. This duration may be increased to 72 hours if interference or special studies are required.

11.6.1.2 Shallow Water Sources
11.6.1.2.1 Springs
(a) A proposal for adequately determining long term yield of springs shall be prepared by a qualified hydrogeologist or professional engineer and submitted to the Secretary for approval prior to testing; and
(b) Long term yield tests for springs shall normally include monitoring during low flow periods.
11.6.1.2.2 Shallow Water Sources Excluding Springs

These sources shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Appendix A Subpart 11.6.1.1. and take into account seasonal fluctuations in water level.

11.6.2 Long Term Yield Analysis

The following material shall be submitted to the Secretary for approval:

(a) "as-built" water source site plans;
(b) pumping test data;
(c) predicted long-term yield and method of analysis;
(d) predicted interference; and
(e) all supporting graphs and calculations.
11.6.2.1 Water Wells

The analysis shall predict the long term yield that shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

(a) constant withdrawal at the Average Day Demand for 180 days; and
(b) drawdown shall not exceed 90 percent of the total available head.
11.6.2.2 Springs

Analysis of monitoring data shall follow accepted hydrogeologic methods such as low flow analyses or other suitable methods.

11.6.2.3 Shallow Water Sources Excluding Springs

Analyses shall be in accordance with Appendix A Subpart 11.6.2.1 and take into account seasonal low static water level.

11.6.3 Interference Testing and Analysis
(a) Any existing water source for a public or private potable water system, located within the distances specified in Table A11-4 shall be located and reported with the application. The Secretary may require interference testing to assess the impact of the project well or wells on, and/or from, other water sources.
(b) Water sources within the distances specified in Table A11-4 shall be monitored for interference during long term yield pumping tests, unless the consultant demonstrates that it is not feasible or necessary to monitor those wells.
(c) If any Public Community water systems exist within the distances given in Table A11-4, then the consultant shall notify the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division. The Division may require additional testing or testing on additional wells to assess the impact of wells on each other.
(d) Other methods to address the potential for interference may be submitted to the Secretary by a qualified hydrogeologist, or a professional engineer, who is proficient in aquifer analysis.
(e) Water sources must not cause unacceptable interference on other water sources, unless resolved in accordance per Appendix A Subpart 11.6.3.2.
11.6.3.1 Unacceptable Interference

Public and private water systems affected by the pumping of other proposed or existing groundwater sources shall be able to meet their average day demand while the proposed water system is operated at the proposed pumping rates. If, as a result of predicted source interference, existing water systems cannot meet their design demands, then unacceptable interference exists. Unacceptable interference may also include water quality problems resulting from source testing.

11.6.3.2 Resolution of Unacceptable Interference
(a) The applicant must resolve all source interference problems prior to issuance of a Source Permit for proposed water sources. Any agreement between the applicant and the affected party will be reviewed by the Secretary. The applicant is responsible for identification of all sources in use within the monitoring radius defined in Table A11-4. The Secretary may either reduce the approved yield or require additional testing or analysis to determine the impact upon the unmonitored source. A Source Permit will not be granted if unacceptable interference cannot be resolved or if the owner of the affected source does not accept a proposed solution.
(b) Solutions may include:
(1) drill affected source deeper and test for water quantity;
(2) test affected source or re-evaluate existing data;
(3) connect affected water source onto acceptable Public water system;
(4) develop an alternative water source for the affected source;
(5) for some private water system, additional storage may be developed to offset the source interference; and
(6) hydrofracture the well or redevelop by other methods.

Table A11-4 -MONITORING DISTANCES FROM TEST WELLS

MONITORING DISTANCE FROM TEST WELL TO A POTABLE WATER SOURCE

MAXIMUM DAILY DEMAND OF TESTED WELL, GPM

DISTANCE, FT.

0 - 1.9

0 - 200

2 - 4.9

0 - 500

5 - 19.9

0 - 1000

20 - 49.9

0 - 2000

50 - 99.9

0 - 2500

100 or greater

0 - 3000

11.7 Water Quality
11.7.0 Water Quality Requirements for Public Transient Non-Community

Public Transient Non-Community water systems shall be designed to provide potable water. The requirements for water quality testing are as follows:

(a) All Public Transient Non-Community water systems shall monitor initially for contaminants as follows:
(1) Public Transient Non-Community water systems shall initially monitor for all the contaminants identified in Tables A11-5 and A11-6.

Table A11-5 - SECONDARY CONTAMINANT STANDARDS FOR

Public Transient Non-Community water systems

Secondary Contaminant Standards

Secondary Maximum Contaminant Level

Chloride

250 mg/l

Sodium

250 mg/l

Iron

0.3 mg/l

Manganese

0.05 mg/l

Odor

3 threshold odor number

pH

6.5 to 8.5

Table A11-6 - PRIMARY CONTAMINANT STANDARDS FOR PUBLIC TRANSIENT NON-COMMUNITY WATER SYSTEMS

Primary Contaminant Standards

Maximum Contaminant Level

Arsenic

0.010 mg/l

Nitrate

10 mg/l

Nitrite

1.0 mg/l

Total Coliform Bacteria

Absent

Uranium

20 ug/1

(b) The Secretary may require the monitoring and compliance with the additional contaminants not listed in Tables A11-5, A11-6, and A11-7, as well as with the contaminants listed in these tables when there is reason to suspect their presence, or suspect a public health or welfare risk.
(c) Public Transient Non-Community water systems shall comply with the sampling and laboratory requirements as described in Subchapter 21-6.
(d) Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems and Public Transient Non- Community water systems shall comply with the water quality standards and monitoring requirements as specified in Subchapter 21-6 of this rule and in 40 CFR, Part 141 . Public Transient Non-Community water systems with contaminants exceeding the primary or secondary standards may be required to treat or abandon the sources at the discretion of the Secretary.
(e) When a water system is developed before a permit is issued, the analysis shall be part of the permit application.
(f) When a water system is developed after a permit is issued, the analysis shall be submitted as a permit condition.
11.8 Design Standards for Pumping, Storage and Distribution
11.8.0 General Considerations

The Secretary has jurisdiction over water system appurtenances including pumps, pressure tanks and water storage tanks, including those located within a building.

Service water, storage facilities and all water system appurtenances shall be located to provide adequate isolation from potential sources of contamination.

11.8.0.1 Sample Taps

Sample taps shall be provided so that water samples can be obtained from each water source and from appropriate locations in each unit of distribution.

11.8.0.2 Disinfection Prior to Use
(a) All walls, pipe, tanks, and equipment which can convey or store potable water shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA procedures; and
(b) for single family residences or public buildings with flows not exceeding 500 gallons per day, which have individual on-site water systems, shall be disinfected in accordance with Appendix A Subpart 12.
11.8.0.3 Isolation Distances

Suction water lines shall be located to comply with the isolation distances for water wells in Appendix A Subpart 11.4, Table A11-1 and be located greater than 100' from any domestic sewage disposal field.

11.8.1 Pumping Facilities
11.8.1.0 General

Pumping facilities shall be designed to maintain the sanitary quality of pumped water. Subsurface pits or pump rooms should be avoided unless there is a non-mechanical way of avoiding flooding from either groundwater, surface water, or interior pipe break. No pumping station shall be subject to flooding. Any below grade electrical installation must be provided with a ground fault interrupted electrical service. All installations shall be safely and easily accessible for monitoring, maintenance, and equipment removal.

11.8.1.1 Location

The pumping station shall be so located that the proposed site will meet the requirements for sanitary protection of water quality, hydraulics of the system and protection against interruption of service by fire, flood or any other hazard.

11.8.1.1.1 Site Protection

The station shall be:

(a) elevated to a minimum of three feet above the 100 year flood elevation, or three feet above the highest recorded flood elevation, whichever is higher, or protected to such elevations;
(b) readily accessible at all times unless permitted to be out of service for the period of inaccessibility;
(c) graded around the station so as to lead surface drainage away from the station; and
(d) protected to prevent vandalism and entrance by animals or unauthorized persons.
11.8.1.2 Pumping Stations

Both raw and finished water pumping stations shall:

(a) have adequate space for the installation of additional units if needed, and for the safe servicing of all equipment;
(b) be of durable construction, fire and weather resistant and with outward-opening doors;
(c) have floor elevation of at least six inches above finished grade;
(d) have underground structure waterproofed;
(e) have all floors drained in such a manner that the quality of the potable water will not be endangered. All floors shall slope to a suitable drain, that runs to daylight; and
(f) provide a suitable outlet for drainage from pump glands, relief valves or control valves without discharging onto the floor.
11.8.1.2.1 Equipment Servicing

Pump stations shall be provided with:

(a) crane-ways, hoist beams, eyebolts, or other adequate facilities for servicing or removal of pumps, motors or other heavy equipment that cannot be serviced or removed by other more conventional methods; and
(b) openings in floors, roofs, or wherever else needed for removal of heavy or bulky equipment.
11.8.1.2.2 Stairways and Ladders

Stairways or ladders shall:

(a) be provided between all floors, and in pits or compartments which must be entered;
(b) have handrails on both sides, and treads of non-slip material. Stairs are preferred in areas where there is frequent traffic or where supplies are transported by hand; and
(c) conform to OSHA and VOSHA regulations covering these fixtures.
11.8.1.2.3 Heating

Provisions shall be made for adequate heating for the safe and efficient operation of the equipment.

11.8.1.2.4 Ventilation

Adequate ventilation shall be provided for all areas where unsafe atmosphere may develop or where excessive heat may be built up.

11.8.1.2.5 Dehumidification

In areas where excess moisture could cause hazards to safety or damage to equipment, means for dehumidification should be provided.

11.8.1.2.6 Electrical

All electrical work shall conform to the requirements of the Vermont Code and to the relevant state and/or local codes.

11.8.1.3 Pumps

The pumping unit shall:

(a) have ample capacity to supply the instantaneous peak demand without dangerous overloading, or the required fire flow if fire demand is required from the pumping station;
(b) be driven by a prime mover able to operate against the maximum head; and
(c) be served by control equipment that has proper heater and overload protection for air temperature encountered.
11.8.1.3.1 Suction Lift

Suction lift should:

(a) be avoided, if possible; and
(b) be within allowable limits, preferably less than 15 feet.

If suction lift is necessary, provision shall be made for priming the pump.

11.8.1.3.2 Priming

Prime water must not be of lesser sanitary quality than that of the water being pumped. Means shall be provided to prevent back siphonage. When an air operated ejector is used, the screened intake shall draw clean air from a point at least 10 feet above the ground or other source of possible contamination, unless the air is filtered by an apparatus approved by the Secretary. Vacuum priming may be used.

11.8.1.4 Appurtenances
11.8.1.4.1 Valves

Pumps shall be adequately valved to permit satisfactory operation, maintenance and repair of the equipment. If foot valves are necessary, they shall have a net valve area of at least 1- 1/2 times the area of the suction pipe and they shall be screened. Each pump shall have a positive-acting check valve on the discharge side between the pump and the shut-off valve.

11.8.1.4.2 Piping

In general, piping shall:

(a) be designed so that the friction losses will be minimized;
(b) not be subject to contamination;
(c) have watertight joints;
(d) be protected against surge or water hammer; and
(e) be such that each pump has an individual suction line or that the lines shall be so manifolded that they will insure similar hydraulic and operating conditions.
11.8.1.4.3 Gauges

Each pump shall have a standard pressure gauge in its discharge line.

11.8.1.4.4 Water Seals

Water seals shall not be supplied with water of a lesser sanitary quality than that of the water being pumped. Where pumps are sealed with potable water and are pumping water of lesser sanitary quality, the seal shall:

(a) be provided with a break tank open to atmospheric pressure; and
(b) have an air gap of at least six inches or two pipe diameters, whichever is greater, between the feeder line and the spill line of the tank.
11.8.1.4.5 Controls

Pumps, their prime movers and accessories, shall be controlled in such a manner that they will operate at rated capacity without dangerous overload. Where two or more pumps are installed, provision shall be made for alternation. Provision shall be made to prevent energizing the motor in the event of a backspin cycle.

11.8.2 Finished Water Storage
11.8.2.1 Water Storage Requirements
A water system and distribution system must be capable of satisfying both the maximum day demand of a project or building and the instantaneous peak demand of the plumbing system. Unless the combination of the water source, withdrawal system and pressurization system can meet both these criteria, water storage shall be required. The following types of projects are exempt from this subpart of the rules, provided they are served by an individual water system:
(a) non-residential buildings with design flows of not more than 500 gallons per day with an instantaneous peak demand of less than 15 gallons per minute;
(b) a single family residence; or
(c) a single family residence with a one-bedroom apartment, where the average day demand is 540 gpd or less.
11.8.2.2 Instantaneous Peak Yield Testing

If the water source's long-term yield is less than the water system instantaneous peak demand, then an abbreviated peak demand test may be performed on the source by one of the following methods:

(a) pumping of the source at the water system instantaneous peak demand rate or greater for a duration at which the total volume pumped equals twice the average day demand. The pumping test must be supervised by a qualified hydrogeologist, professional engineer, licensed well driller or well servicer. The pump discharge rate shall be measured and recorded at 30 minute intervals with a minimum of three readings. If the pumping discharge rate during the test period is equal to, or greater than the water system instantaneous peak demand, and the source is not dewatered to the level of the pump, then no water storage is required to meet instantaneous peak demand, provided the well service pump is capable of delivering at a flow rate equal to, or greater than the peak demand;
(b) a three hour blow test with flow measurements at less than or equal to 30 minute intervals performed by a licensed well driller;
(c) licensed well driller's yields determined by methods which do not meet the requirements of Appendix A Subpart 11.8.2.2(a) or (b) shall be divided by two to determine flow rate for instantaneous peak; and
(d) other methods for determining instantaneous peak yield of the water source may be used if a written proposal detailing them is approved by the Secretary prior to testing.
11.8.2.3 Storage Volume

If the water system instantaneous peak demand exceeds the water source yield and/or the source pump capacity, water storage volume computed by one of the following methods shall be provided:

(a) storage equal to average day demand if the water source long term yield equals or exceeds two-thirds of the maximum day demand;
(b) storage equal to 55 percent of average day demand if the water source long term yield equals or exceeds the maximum day demand; or
(c) storage equal to the following equation if the water source yield equals or exceeds the maximum day demand:

S = D (1-Y/P)

Where S = Volume of water storage (gallons)

D = Project average day demand (gallons) (See Appendix A Subpart 11.3);

P = Project water system instantaneous peak demand (gallons/minute) (See Appendix A Subpart 11.3); and

Y = Water source yield (either long term yield per Appendix A Subpart 11.6 or peak yield per Appendix A Subpart 11.8.2.2).

11.8.2.3.1 Casing Storage
A portion of the required storage may be met by using the effective storage provided by the well casing, well tile or spring box. Calculation of the effective storage shall take into account the predicted drawdown of the water level in the casing, based on the daily usage of the water source.
(a) For water wells, the effective storage shall be determined as follows:
(1) for a source where a pumping test and analysis has been performed, the effective storage shall be the volume of water between the predicted drawdown associated with Subpart 11.6.2.1(a) of this rule and the pump cut-off level.
(2) for a source where the pumping test and analysis has not been performed, the effective storage shall be the volume of water between the predicted drawdown, as calculated below, and the pump cut-off level.

The predicted drawdown shall be based on the long term yield, the maximum day demand and the total available head as follows:

DD= SE + (TAH (MDD / Y))

where DD= depth to predicted drawdown, below ground surface (ft)

SE= depth to static water level in well, below ground surface (ft)

TAH= total available head (ft)

MDD=maximum day demand (gpm)

Y= long term yield (gpm) (per 11.6)

(b) for shallow water sources, the effective storage is one half of the volume between the annual low water level and the outlet or pump cut off level.
11.8.2.4 Reservoirs General

The materials and designs used for finished water storage structures shall provide stability and durability as well as protect the quality of the stored water. Steel structures shall follow the current AWWA standards concerning steel tanks, reservoirs, and elevated tanks wherever they are applicable. Other materials of construction are acceptable when properly designed and approved by the Secretary. Design for cast-in-place and pre-cast concrete structures must be reinforced and specify the material for sealing the joints. Reservoirs should be tested for leakage.

11.8.2.4.1 Location of Reservoirs
(a) The bottom of steel reservoirs should be placed at the normal ground surface and shall be above maximum flood level.
(b) When the bottom of a steel tank must be below normal ground surface, it shall be placed above the groundwater table. Artificially lowering the groundwater table is acceptable.
(c) For all storage reservoirs, sewers, drains, standing water, and similar sources of possible contamination must be kept at least fifty feet from the reservoir Water main pipe, pressure tested in place to 50 psi without leakage, may be used for gravity sewers at distances greater than 20 feet and less than 50 feet.
(d) The top of a reservoir access shall not be less than two feet above normal ground surface.
(e) Below grade installation of precast and poured in-place concrete reservoirs are acceptable. Provisions shall be made to eliminate the tendency of the tank to float during high groundwater conditions. All joints shall be water tight.
11.8.2.4.2 Protection
(a) All finished water storage structures, shall have suitable water tight roofs which exclude birds, animals, insects, and excessive dust. If necessary, these structures shall have a perimeter drain at least 4" in diameter.
(b) Fencing, locks on access manholes, and other necessary precautions shall be provided to prevent trespassing, vandalism, and sabotage.
11.8.2.4.3 Drains

No drain on a water storage structure may have a direct connection to a sewer or storm drain. The design shall allow draining the storage facility for cleaning or maintenance.

11.8.2.4.4 Overflow

All water storage structures shall be provided with an overflow. The discharge end of the overflow should terminate at least 18 inches above the ground surface, and discharge over either a drainage inlet structure or a splash plate. No overflow may be connected directly to a sewer or storm drain. All overflow pipes shall be located so that any discharge is visible.

(a) The above grade portion of the overflow shall be open downward and be screened with 24 mesh noncorrodible screen installed within the pipe at a location least susceptible to damage by vandalism; and
(b) the overflow pipe shall be of sufficient diameter to permit discharge of water in excess of the filling rate.
11.8.2.4.5 Access

Finished water storage structures shall be designed with reasonably convenient access to the interior floor for cleaning and maintenance.

(a) On ground level structures, manholes should be elevated at least 18 inches above the top or covering sod;
(b) shall be fitted with a solid watertight cover which overlaps the framed opening and extends down around the frame at least two inches;
(c) shall have a locking device; and
(d) drainage shall be directed away from the access.
11.8.2.4.6 Vents

Finished water storage structures shall be vented. Overflows shall not be considered as vents. Open construction between the sidewall and roof is not permissible. Finished water source vents shall:

(a) prevent the entrance of surface water and rain water;
(b) exclude birds and animals;
(c) exclude insects and dust, as much as this function can be made compatible with effective venting. For elevated tanks and standpipes, four-mesh noncorrodible screen may be used; and
(d) on ground level structures, terminate in an inverted U construction with the opening 24 mesh noncorrodible screen installed within the pipe at a location least susceptible to vandalism.
11.8.2.4.7 Roof and Sidewall

The roof and sidewalls of all structures must be watertight with no openings except properly constructed vents, manholes, overflows, risers, drains, pump mountings, control ports, or piping for inflow and outflow.

(a) Any pipes running through the roof or sidewall of a finished water storage structure must be welded, or properly gasketed in metal tanks. In concrete tanks, these pipes shall be connected to standard wall castings which were poured in place during the forming of the concrete or wall sleeves, with flexible wall penetration sleeves;
(b) openings in a storage structure roof or top, designed to accommodate control apparatus or pump columns, shall be curbed and sleeved with proper additional shielding to prevent the access of surface or floor drainage water into the structure; and
(c) valves and controls should be located outside the storage structure so that the valve stems and similar projections will not pass through the roof or top of the reservoir.
11.8.2.4.8 Drainage of Roof

The roof of above grade storage structures shall be well drained. Roofs shall not tend to hold water.

11.8.2.4.9 Safety

The safety of employees must be considered in the design of the storage structure. As a minimum, such matters shall conform to pertinent laws and regulations of the area where the reservoir is constructed.

11.8.2.4.10 Freezing

All finished water storage structures and their appurtenances, shall be designed to prevent freezing which will interfere with proper functioning.

11.8.2.4.11 Grading

The area surrounding a ground level structure shall be graded in a manner that will prevent surface water from standing within 50 feet of it.

11.8.2.4.12 Painting and/or Cathodic Protection

Proper protection shall be given to metal surfaces by paints or other protective coatings, by cathodic protective devices, or by both.

(a) Paints systems shall be acceptable to the Secretary (either EPA or NSF approved). Interior paint must be properly applied and cured. After curing, the coating shall not transfer any substances to the water which will be toxic or cause tastes or odors. Prior to placing in service, an analysis for volatile organic compounds is required to establish that the coating is properly cured; and
(b) cathodic protection should be designed and installed by competent technical personnel. A maintenance contract should be provided.
11.8.2.4.13 Disinfection
(a) Finished water storage structures shall be disinfected in accordance with correct AWWA Standard C652. Two or more successive sets of samples, taken at 24-hour intervals, shall indicate microbiologically satisfactory water before the facility is placed into operation;
(b) disposal of heavily chlorinated water from the tank disinfection process shall not be discharged to groundwater or surface water; and
(c) the disinfection procedure (AWWA chlorination method 3, section 4.3 C652) which allows use of the chlorinated water held in the storage tank for disinfection purposes is not recommended. When that procedure is used, it is required that the initial heavily chlorinated water be properly disposed in order to prevent release of water which may contain various chlorinated organic compounds into the distribution system.
11.8.2.5 Hydropneumatic Tanks

Hydropneumatic (pressure) tanks, when provided as the only storage facility, are acceptable. Pressure tank storage is not to be considered for fire protection purposes. Pressure tanks shall meet BOCA code requirements.

11.8.2.5.1 Location

The tank shall be completely housed.

11.8.2.5.2 Sizing

The capacity of the wells and pumps in a hydropneumatic storage should be such that the minimum pump on time is 2 minutes, unless the pump manufacturer certifies less is acceptable. In no case will a pump on time of less than 1 minute be acceptable. Only the available storage during the pump-on time shall be considered in meeting storage requirements.

11.8.2.5.3 Appurtenance

Each tank shall have a drain, pressure gauge, water sight glass, if applicable, automatic or manual air blow-off, means for adding air, and pressure operated start-stop controls for the pumps.

11.8.2.6 Distribution Storage

The applicable design standards of Appendix A Subpart 11.8.2 shall be followed for distribution system storage.

11.8.2.6.1 Pressures

The minimum working pressure at the hydropneumatic tank system should be set at no less than 20 psi. When static pressures exceed 100 psi, pressure reducing devices should be provided on mains in the distribution system.

11.8.2.6.2 Drainage

Storage structures which provide pressure directly to the distribution system shall be designed so they can be isolated from the distribution system and drained for cleaning or maintenance. The drain shall discharge to the ground surface with no direct connection to a sewer or storm drain.

11.8.2.6.3 Level Controls

Controls shall be provided to maintain levels in distribution system storage structures. Controls shall have the following features:

(a) low level alarm is required;
(b) pumps should be controlled from tank levels;
(c) overflow and low-level warnings or alarms shall be located at places in the community where they will be reasonably noticed by maintenance personnel;
(d) the low water level control shall be high enough so that the water system operator has time to correct the problem before a water shortage occurs.
11.8.3 Distribution Systems
11.8.3.0 Materials
11.8.3.0.1 Standards, Materials Selection

Pipe, fittings, valves and fire hydrants shall conform to the latest standards issued by AWWA. Special attention shall be given to selecting pipe materials which will protect against both internal and external pipe corrosion.

11.8.3.0.2 Used Materials

Water mains which have been used previously for conveying potable water may be reused provided they meet the above standards and have been restored practically to their original condition.

11.8.3.0.3 Joints

Packing and jointing materials used in the joints of pipe shall meet the standards of the AWWA. Pipe having mechanical joints or slip-on joints with rubber gaskets is preferred.

11.8.3.1 Service Connections

Service connection detail must be provided. Curb stops must be shown on plan drawings; they must be incapable of conveying surface loads onto the service line.

11.8.3.2 Water Main Design
11.8.3.2.1 Pressure

All water mains shall be sized after a hydraulic analysis based on flow demands and pressure requirements. The normal working pressure in the distribution system should be:

(a) 35 psi at the main;
(b) 20 psi at the ground level at the foundation wall; or
(c) 8 psi at the highest fixture.
11.8.3.2.2 Hydrants

Water mains not designed to carry fire flows shall not have fire hydrants connected to them.

11.8.3.2.3 Dead Ends

Dead ends shall be minimized by looping of all mains whenever practical.

11.8.3.2.4 Flushing

Flushing devices should be sized to provide flows which will give a velocity of at least 2.5 feet per second in the water main being flushed. No flushing device shall be directly connected to any sewer. The open end of a blow off must be capped and terminate at least 18 inches above grade.

11.8.3.3 Valves

Sufficient valves shall be provided on water mains so that inconvenience and sanitary hazards will be minimized during repairs. Valves should be located at not more than 500 foot intervals in commercial districts, at not more than one block or 800 foot intervals in other districts, and at not more than 5,000 feet on transmission lines.

11.8.3.4 Air Relief and Blow-off Chambers
11.8.3.4.1 Air Relief Valves

At high points in water mains where air can accumulate, consideration shall be made to incorporate air relief devices.

11.8.3.4.2 Chamber Drainage

Chambers, pits or manholes containing valves, blow-offs, meters, or other such appurtenances to a distribution system, shall not be connected directly to any storm drain or sanitary sewer, nor shall blowoffs or air relief valves be connected directly to any sewer. Such chambers or pits shall be drained to the surface of the ground where they are not subject of flooding by surface water, or to absorption pits underground.

11.8.3.5 Installation of Mains
11.8.3.5.1 Bedding

A continuous and uniform bedding shall be provided in the trench for all buried pipe. Back fill material shall be tamped in layers around the pipe and to a sufficient height above the pipe to adequately support and protect the pipe.

11.8.3.5.2 Cover

All water mains shall be covered with at least 5- 1/2 feet of earth. Insulation may be used in lieu of cover depth.

11.8.3.5.3 Thrust Blocks

All tees, bends, plugs and hydrants shall be provided with reaction blocking, tie rods or joints designed to prevent movement. The size and shape of the blocks shall be appropriate for the site conditions and design water pressure.

11.8.3.5.4 Disinfection

All new or reconstructed water mains shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA Standard C651-86. The specifications shall include detailed procedures for the adequate flushing, disinfection, and microbiological testing of all water mains. If bacteriological tests show the treatment to unsatisfactory, the disinfection procedures shall be repeated until satisfactory bacteriological sample results are obtained. The tablet method in AWWA Standard 651 is not acceptable.

11.8.3.5.5 Pressure Testing

All types of installed pipe shall be pressure tested and leakage tested in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA Standard C600.

11.8.3.6 Water and Sewer Mains
11.8.3.6.1 Crossings

Water mains crossing sewers shall be laid to provide a minimum vertical distance of 18 inches between the outside of the water main and the outside of the sewer. This shall be the case where the water main is either above or below the sewer. At crossings, one full length of water pipe shall be located so both joints will be as far from the sewer as possible. If the sewer main is over the water main, then the sewer main must be encased by concrete, extending beyond the first sewer pipe joints and resting on undisturbed soil on each side of the water main, or the sewer line shall be installed to meet the Secretary's sewer line standards for Source Protection Areas. Special structural support for the water and sewer pipes may be required. Water pipes shall not pass through sewer manholes or be submerged in basins containing sewage or other grossly contaminated or hazardous material. Properly constructed and approved submerged stream crossings shall be exempted from this provision of the regulations.

11.8.3.6.2 Parallel Installation

Water mains shall be laid at least 10 feet horizontally from any existing or proposed manhole or sanitary sewer. This distance can be reduced to 5 feet for storm sewers. The distance shall be measured edge to edge. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a 10 foot separation, the Secretary may allow deviation on a case by case basis if supported by data from the design engineer. Such deviation may allow installation of the water main closer to a sewer, provided that the water main is laid in a separate trench or on an undisturbed earth shelf located on one side of the sewer at such an elevation that he bottom of the water main is at least 18 inches above the top of the sewer.

11.8.3.6.3 Exception

The Secretary must specifically approve any variance from the requirements of Appendix A Subparts 11.8.3.6.1 and 11.8.3.6.2 when it is impossible to obtain the specified separation distances. Where sewers are being installed and Appendix A Subparts 11.8.3.6.1 and 11.8.3.6.2 cannot be met, the sewer materials shall be water main pipe or equivalent and shall be pressure tested to ensure water tightness.

11.8.3.7 Surface Water Crossings

Surface water crossings, whether over or under water, present special problems. The reviewing authority should be consulted before final plans are prepared.

11.8.3.7.1 Above-water Crossings

The pipe shall be adequately supported and anchored, protected from damage including flood waters, floating debris, ice and freezing, and shall be accessible for repair or replacement.

11.8.3.7.2 Underwater Crossings

A minimum cover of two feet measured from the lowest point of the stream bed, shall be provided over the pipe. When crossing water courses, the pipe shall be of special construction, having flexible water tight joints.

11.8.3.8 Cross-connections and Interconnections
11.8.3.8.1 Cross-connections

There shall be no connection between the distribution system and any pipes, pumps, hydrants, or tanks whereby unsafe water or other contaminating materials may be discharged or drawn into the system. This does not preclude approved cross connection control devices.

11.8.3.8.2 Cooling Water; Heating Water
(a) Neither steam condensate nor cooling water from engine jackets or other heat exchange devices shall be returned to a Public water system.
(b) Notwithstanding subsection (a) of this section, standing column geothermal systems are allowed provided that:
(1) No additive is added to the re-circulated groundwater;
(2) The heat exchange medium in the system is R-410A or a different heat exchange medium approved by the Secretary;
(3) The system has a low pressure safety cutout circuit that will turn off the system when there is a pressure leak in the heat exchange medium containment vessel;
(4) All electrical components of the system are properly grounded to prevent potential electrolysis of metals: and
(5) In the event that the heat exchange unit is disconnected as a heating or cooling source, all piping associated with the unit shall either be capped and labeled or removed.
(c) For the purposes of this section, a standing column geothermal system is one where groundwater is taken from a Public water system well for heating and/or cooling purposes and re-circulated back into the same well below the estimated low water elevation of the well
11.8.3.8.3 Interconnections

Drains from the fire hydrants, air relief pits and blow off valve pits shall not connect directly to sewer lines or discharge at a points which will permit possible back-siphonage conditions.

11.8.3.9 Water Services and Plumbing
11.8.3.9.1 Plumbing

Water services and plumbing shall conform to the state plumbing code.

11.8.3.10 Water Loading Stations

Water loading stations present special problems since the fill line may be used for filling both potable water vessels and other tanks or contaminated vessels. To prevent contamination of both the water system and potable water vessels being filled, the following principles shall be met in the design of water loading stations:

(a) there shall be no backflow to the water system;
(b) the piping arrangement shall prevent contaminant being transferred from a hauling vessel to others subsequently using the station;
(c) hoses shall not be contaminated by contact with the ground.
Part 12 CONSTRUCTION AND ISOLATION STANDARDS FOR WELLS
12.1 General
12.1.1 Pursuant to 10 V.S.A. Section 1395a(b), this subpart sets forth certain minimum construction standards, which apply to any person engaged in, the business of well drilling ("well driller" as used in this part) for Public water systems unless explicitly stated otherwise.
12.2 Construction Standards for Monitoring Wells, Public Non-Transient Non- Community water systems and Public Transient Non-Community water systems
12.2.1 Drilling - General
12.2.1.1 Damage to Site

The well driller shall not cause undue soil erosion or water pollution; or pollute the site with fuels, lubricants, solvents, or other contaminants used in the construction or repair of the well. The well driller must obtain approval from the Secretary before allowing or causing the discharge of water or other substances to waters of the State. The well driller should make preparations in advance to contain and promptly remove any contaminants which are accidentally spilled.

12.2.1.2 Drilling fluids and cuttings

The well driller shall not use materials and procedures which may adversely affect the public health, the drill site, or groundwater. The use of drilling fluids, additives, cements or other materials that may adversely affect the public health or the environment is prohibited. All drilling fluids shall be disposed of properly upon completion of their use. Contaminated drill cuttings, samples or liquids shall be disposed of as approved by the Secretary.

All water used in drilling or servicing water wells shall be potable water (see definition in Subchapter 21-2).

All wells shall be sufficiently developed to remove all additives and well development fluids (such as hydrofracturing water) and provide reasonably clear water.

12.2.1.3 Contaminated Equipment

When constructing or repairing a well for potable water, the well driller shall not use or reuse casing, tools, or drilling fluids which may have become contaminated. All drilling equipment which may have become contaminated during a drilling operation shall be thoroughly cleaned and decontaminated before reuse.

12.2.1.4 Disinfection

All potable water wells shall be adequately chlorinated promptly upon completion of well construction, servicing, or repair or installation of pumps, and may include circulation of the chlorinated solution as necessary to ensure adequate disinfection of the entire well.

12.2.1.5 Heat Pump Wells

Only non toxic fluids shall be used in closed loop heat pump well installations.

12.2.2 Casing and Liner
12.2.2.1 The casing and liner material used on all wells shall be of such strength and composition as to prevent the movement of water or contaminants into or out of the well in the interval cased. The casing or liner shall not distort, collapse, crack, or disintegrate during placement or under normal conditions. The casing and liner shall be adequate to provide for the installation, removal, and maintenance as appropriate of caps, pitless adapters, screens, pumps, pipes, wires or other devices which may be used. Any casing which is driven shall be protected with a firmly attached drive shoe or equivalent. All steel casing shall have full circumferential welds or threaded coupling joints.
12.2.2.2 The well driller shall perform the following, unless the Department grants an exemption:
(a) Bedrock Wells

All bedrock wells shall be constructed with not fewer than 20 feet of water tight casing. The casing shall be securely set into competent bedrock. The casing shall prevent sediment or fluids from above the bottom of the casing from entering the well.

(b) Gravel Wells

All gravel wells shall be constructed with not less than 20 feet of water tight casing.

(c) Lining Wells

When a liner is set to control hole stability within the uncased hole it shall be terminated with a packer or otherwise secured to the bore hole. It may be slotted, screened or perforated to permit the movement or storage of water. When a liner is set to control water movement or contamination, it shall be adequately grouted and water tight.

(d) Monitoring Wells

Monitoring wells are exempt from minimum casing length requirements, however, they shall be designed and constructed to prevent any migration of contaminants into uncontaminated zones.

(e) Closed Loop Heat Pump Wells

Heat pump wells in which a closed loop is to be installed shall be exempt from the casing length requirements of this subpart. A temporary casing may be used but shall be adequately set to prevent contamination. The full depth of the loop shall be grouted in place. The temporary casing may be removed at the time of grouting. Closed loop heat pump wells may require an underground injection control (UIC) permit (contact the UIC program for more information).

12.2.3 Annular Space
12.2.3.1 Annular space shall be grouted unless the native materials such as drill cuttings can achieve the following:
(a) when placed are at least as impervious, competent and compact as the surrounding materials;
(b) completely fill the annular space from the bottom of the casing to land surface;
(c) do not allow the accumulation of water around the well or artesian flow in the annular space; and
(d) securely support the casing so that it cannot be moved by manual means.
12.2.3.2 In cases where contamination occurs and impermeable natural materials cannot be adequately placed and compacted as required in Appendix A Subpart 12.3.3.1 or where geologic conditions or the isolation distance may not be adequate as required in Appendix A Subpart 12.2.2, the annular space shall be grouted for the full length of the unscreened portion of the casing, or the portion thereof below the frost line or pitless adaptor, so that no fluids may move in the zone needing to be grouted. Grouting procedures and materials set forth in Appendix A Subpart 12.3.4 shall be followed.
12.2.3.3 Under most conditions, driven steel casing shall be considered to have no annular space provided no pilot hole larger than the casing has been drilled below the depth of the pitless adaptor or the frost line.
12.2.4 Grouting
12.2.4.1 Grouting or the use of a grout mixture is recommended or required under the following conditions:
(a) Filling the annular space as required in Appendix A Subpart 12.3.3;
(b) Providing additional protection when isolation distances are less than that required in Appendix A Subpart 12.2.1.1;
(c) Plugging abandoned wells, and closed loop heat pump wells; and
(d) As needed in the construction or closure of monitoring wells.
12.2.4.2 A grouting material or mixture shall:
(a) Allow negligible movement of all fluids in the annular space;
(b) Support and secure the casing; and
(c) Provide negligible shrinkage, breakage, or deterioration of the grout after placement.
12.2.4.3 The grout shall be placed in a continuous operation to ensure against any voids, mixing with or diluting contaminated fluids, or damaging the casing or borehole. Fluid based grouts shall be placed from the bottom to the top of the annular space under positive pressure. The amount of water utilized in mixing any grout shall be carefully limited to only the amount needed to properly hydrate and place the grout mixture.
12.2.4.4 The full depth of all closed loop heat pump installations shall be grouted in place.
12.2.5 Closure of Abandoned Wells
12.2.5.1 All abandoned wells shall be closed to prevent the contamination of ground or surface water resources, the migration of fluids, and risks to the health and safety of the public.
12.2.5.2 Prior to closing, all wells or holes shall be cleared of any pumps, wires, piping, or other materials which may interfere with effective closing.
12.2.5.3 An abandoned well or hole shall be completely filled with a grout or other material to render the bore hole at least as impervious as the surrounding native material. Contaminated wells shall be closed with grout material for the full depth of the well or at least the zone shown to be contaminated. If a flowing well is to be abandoned, it shall be closed to prevent fluids from flowing out of the well.
12.2.5.4 All abandoned monitoring wells shall be closed. Wells located where contaminants are present shall be completely filled with grout material to prevent migration of fluids in the bore hole. Contaminated materials shall be transported and disposed of in accordance with the Secretary's requirements.
12.2.6 Well Finish
12.2.6.1 Each well shall be finished to prevent damage to the well and minimize the potential for contamination.
12.2.6.2 The well casing shall extend not less than 18 inches above existing grade, or at least 12 inches above the pump house floor or concrete apron surface, except as permitted in Appendix A Subpart 12.3.6.4.

The well shall be covered with a temporary or permanent tight fitting cap or protective structure which cannot be removed or opened without the use of tools, a key, or a combination.

12.2.6.3 Any well located in the 100 year frequency floodplain or floodway shall be floodproofed to prevent flood water from entering the well.
12.2.6.4 No well shall be located in a well pit, underground enclosure, or in a hazardous location unless specifically requested by the owner. If an underground enclosure is used it shall prevent intrusion by persons or animals and shall be passively drained to prevent any ponding of water in the enclosure. The well shall be capped with a water tight cap meeting the Standard for Watertight Well Caps (PAS-97) adopted by the Water Systems Council, Chicago, IL. A sanitary seal shall not be used. Any well which is buried in a well pit, or underground enclosure shall be separately vented. The wiring for the pump shall either be sealed for water tightness where it enters the cap or be contained in a watertight conduit system.

Wells permitted under Appendix A Subparts 12.4.2(c) and (d) may only be buried when approved by the Secretary.

12.2.6.5 No well shall be finished, vented or capped in a manner which has any similarity to any oil or gas filling pipe unless specifically and permanently labeled to prevent confusion.
12.2.7 Pump Installation for Water Wells
12.2.7.1 If a pump house is placed over a well, it shall be passively drained. The casing shall extend at least 12 inches above the floor. The well shall be capped as required in Appendix A Subpart 12.3.6.2 or shall otherwise be suitably covered to prevent foreign material from entering the well.
12.2.7.2 If a pitless unit is used it shall be constructed of durable water tight materials. The pitless unit shall be at least the same size as the well casing and securely attached by welding, cementing or threading.
12.2.7.3 If a pitless adapter is used it shall be of durable construction and of sufficient strength and size for the pump and pipe to be attached to it. The attachment hole through the well casing must be properly sized, smooth and without burrs. The pitless adapter must be securely connected to the well casing and must be watertight.
12.2.7.4 All wells should be properly vented at the well head or by adequate size pipe into a protected structure. The vent opening shall be covered with a very fine mesh screen. Wells which have special construction (e.g., flowing wells) need not be vented.
12.2.7.5 All wells shall be finished as required in 12.3.6 and shall be disinfected upon completion of work as required in Appendix A Subpart 12.3.1(e).
12.2.7.6 All wiring in the well shall conform to all applicable standards and shall be done under the license of a licensed electrician where appropriate and required.
12.2.7.7 All wiring outside of the casing shall be contained in a suitable conduit or pipe from the well cap to at least 2 feet below land surface. Connection to the well cap assembly shall be tight fitting.
12.2.7.8 All pumps, piping, and fittings shall be of durable construction suitable for use in water systems and shall not contain any hazardous materials. All in-well pumps should have a check valve to prevent backflow. Torque arresters, taping of electrical lines, and piping and other appropriate means shall be used to properly support and prevent excessive movement of the pumping system in the well or damage to the well.
12.2.7.9 Due to the inherent health risks associated with inadequate pump installations, the Department recommends that all final pump installations be performed by a licensed water well driller or a licensed plumber.
12.2.8 Flowing Wells
12.2.8.1 Flowing wells should be constructed and finished in a manner to prevent unreasonable depletion of the aquifer, loss of artesian pressure, and erosion of the aquifer confining materials or the land surface.
12.2.9 Well Tag Identification
12.2.9.1 Each new water well or untagged water well which is deepened or serviced shall be identified with a permanently attached identification tag. The tag shall identify the well driller's license number and a unique number which shall be used on the Well Completion Report. When deepening or servicing a previously tagged well, the complete previous tag number shall be recorded on the Well Completion Report. Identification tags will be supplied by the Secretary. Each driller will be provided with a supply of tags upon request. Each water well shall be tagged within 30 days of completion.
12.2.9.2 Each monitoring well shall be adequately and permanently identified with a unique identification (usually supplied by the owner's consultant) and noted on the Monitoring Well Report and on any site plan. This identification shall not be subsequently removed but may be added to. Where feasible, the same tag used by water well drillers shall be used on monitoring wells. All monitoring wells shall be tagged or permanently identified within 30 days of construction.
12.2.10 Inspection of Wells
12.2.10.1 The Secretary may observe the construction of wells to assure compliance with this chapter. Upon request of the Secretary, the well driller shall provide details of material, equipment, and methods used and other information that the Secretary may require.
12.2.10.2 The Secretary may inspect, with permission of the well owner, any well as it deems necessary or desirable. The Secretary may inspect any well which is the subject of any formal complaint filed with the Secretary.
12.2.10.3 The Secretary shall notify the well owner, and other parties if appropriate, of the time and date of the inspection.
12.3 Construction and Isolation Standards for Wells Requiring Permits
12.3.1 Purpose and Scope
12.3.1.1 Vermont's Water Supply Rule (Chapter 21) require permits for wells drilled under these jurisdictions. The well driller shall request of the landowner whether a state permit is required or not for the construction of the proposed well. If a state permit is required, the well driller shall construct the well in accordance with these Construction and Isolation Standards.
12.3.2 Wells Serving Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems and Public Transient NonCommunity water systems

A well for a Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems or Public Transient Non- Community water systems requiring permits means any well which requires a permit from the Wastewater Management Division. These permits are required by 10 V.S.A. Section1973, and cover water sources for:

(a) Public Transient Non-Community water systems (TNC), which serve 25 or more people more than 60 days per year.
(b) Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems (NTNC), which are Public water systems that are not Public Community water systems and that regularly serve at least 25 of the same persons over six months per year.
12.3.3 Construction Standards For Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems and Public Transient Non-Community water systems
12.3.3.1 Well construction for Public Non-Transient Non-Community water systems and Public Transient Non-Community water systems must at minimum follow those standards outlined in Subpart 12.3 unless stated otherwise.
12.3.4 Isolation Distances
12.3.4.1 The proposed site of the water source for the building or project shall be approved by the Secretary before the source is developed. Adequate isolation distances between wells and potential sources of contamination are required. The distances are listed in Subpart 11.4 of this Appendix.
12.3.5 (Reserved)
12.3.6 Wells Requiring Source Permits under the Water Supply Rule
12.3.6.1 Public Community water system wells require a permit from the Secretary as do wells for bulk and bottled water. They are as follows:
(a) Wells for Public Community water systems are those which serve at least fifteen (15) service connections used by year-round residents or regularly serve at least 25 year round residents.
(b) Wells for bulk water facilities (bulk water is water delivered to consumers or water surveyors by means other than pipeline or bottled water); and
(c) Wells for Bottled Water Facilities (bottled water is non-carbonated, non-flavored water placed in a sealed container for sale or distribution to the public with the express or implied intent of providing water for human consumption).
12.3.7 Construction Standards from the Water Supply Rule
12.3.7.1 The following standards are in addition to those in Appendix A Subpart 12.3. Water used in drilling must be potable and all fluids, muds, additives must be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved and listed. Every well shall be tested for plumbness and alignment in accordance with American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards.
12.3.8 Minimum Protected Depths
12.3.8.1 Drilled wells shall provide watertight construction to such depths as may be required by the Secretary, to:
(a) exclude surface contamination, and
(b) seal off formations that are contaminated or yield undesirable water.
12.3.8.2 Drilled bedrock wells shall have casing installed a minimum of 10 feet into unweathered competent bedrock. A minimum of 20 feet of casing shall be installed in all bedrock wells.
12.3.9 Temporary Steel Casing
12.3.9.1 Temporary steel casing used for construction shall be capable of withstanding the structural load imposed during its installation and removal.
12.3.10 Permanent Steel Casing Pipe
12.3.10.1 Steel pipe used for permanent casing in permitted water wells shall be new pipe meeting AWWA, ASTM, or API specifications for water well construction,
12.3.10.2 Have minimum weights and thickness as indicated in the table below.

Click to view image

12.3.10.3 When additional thickness and weight is necessary to assure reasonable life expectancy of a well, the casing shall:
(a) be capable of withstanding forces to which it is subjected,
(b) be equipped with a drive shoe when driven, and
(c) have full circumferential welds or threaded coupling joints.
12.3.11 Nonferrous Casing Materials
12.3.11.1 The use of any nonferrous material as well casing shall be approved by the Secretary prior to submission of plans and specifications; and
12.3.11.2 Nonferrous material proposed as a well casing shall be resistant to the corrosiveness of the water and to the stresses to which it will be subjected during installation, grouting and operation.
12.3.12 Packers
12.3.12.1 Packers shall be of material that will not impart taste, odor, toxic substance or bacterial contamination to the well water.
12.3.13 Screens
12.3.13.1 Screens shall be constructed of materials capable of withstanding the structural loads imposed and resistant to damage by chemical action of groundwater or cleaning operations, and shall
(a) have size of openings based on sieve analysis of formation and/or gravel pack materials;
(b) have sufficient diameter to provide adequate specific capacity and low aperture entrance velocity. The entrance velocity should not exceed 0.1 feet per second;
(c) be installed so that the pumping water level remains above the screen under all operating conditions;
(d) where applicable, be designed and installed to permit removal or replacement without adversely affecting watertight construction of the well;
(e) be provided with a bottom plate or washdown bottom fitting of the same material as the screen; and
(f) be reviewed and approved by the Secretary before installation.
12.3.14 Grouting Requirements
12.3.14.1 All permanent well casing, including the couplings, (except driven Schedule 40 steel casing with the approval of the Secretary), shall be surrounded by a minimum of 1 1/2 inches of grout to the required depth. All temporary construction casings should be removed, but shall be withdrawn at least ten feet to insure grout contact with the native formation.

Deviation from the grouting standards contained herein may be allowed after review under the provisions of Section 3.7 in Subchapter 21-3.

12.3.14.2 Neat cement grout
(a) Cement conforming to ASTM standard C150, with not more than 5 gallons of water per 94 pound sack of cement, shall be used for 1 1/2 inch or larger annular openings.
(b) Additives may be used to increase fluidity subject to approval by the Secretary.
12.3.14.3 Concrete grout
(a) Equal parts of cement conforming to ASTM Standard C150, and sand, with not more than 5 gallons of water per 94 pound sack of cement may be used for annular openings larger than 1 1/2 inches.
(b) Where an annular opening larger than 4 inches is available, gravel not larger than 1/2 inch in size may be added.
12.3.14.4 Clay Seal/Bentonite

Where an annular opening greater than 6 inches is available, a clay seal of clean local clay mixed with at least 10 percent swelling bentonite may be used when approved by the Secretary.

12.3.14.5 Application
(a) Sufficient annular opening shall be provided to permit a minimum of 1 1/2 inches of grout around permanent casings, including couplings.
(b) When the annular opening is less than 4", grout shall be installed under pressure by means of a grout pump from the bottom of the annular opening upward in one continuous operation until the annular opening is filled.
(c) When the annular opening is four or more inches and less than 100' in depth, and concrete grout is used, it may be placed by gravity through a grout pipe installed to the bottom of the annular opening in one continuous operation until the annular opening is filled.
(d) When the annular opening exceeds six inches, is less than 100' in depth, and a clay seal is used, it may be placed by gravity.
(e) After cement grouting is applied, work on the well shall be discontinued until the cement or concrete grout has properly set.
(f) If clay or hard pan is encountered above the water bearing formation, the permanent casing and grout shall extend through such materials, or
(g) If a sand or gravel aquifer is overlain only by permeable soils, the permanent casing and grout shall extend to at least 18.5 feet below original or final ground elevation, whichever is lower.
(h) If a temporary outer casing is used, it shall be completely withdrawn as grout is applied.
(i) Alternate methods of installing grout in rock wells follow. All examples include drilling a hole 3" in diameter greater than the casing (including couplings) at least 10' into unweathered bedrock. A minimum of 20 feet of casing is required.
(1) Place grout in open hole and insert plugged casing to displace grout upward and into the natural materials.
(2) Fill hole with grout, set open casing, let grout set, drill grout out; note that grout may be removed before the cement is set as long as the wet cement seal is not broken. Regrouting may be required in the event of a failure of the grout.
(3) Set casing near bottom of hole with tremie pipe fitting on end of casing, pump grout into bottom of pipe until it rises to the surface outside of the casing, set casing, remove tremie pipe, and drill out fittings.
(4) Other methods may be approved after review by the Secretary.
12.3.14.6 Guides

The casing shall be provided with sufficient guides welded to the casing to permit unobstructed flow and uniform thickness of grout.

12.3.15 Well Construction
12.3.15.1 Permanent casing for all groundwater sources shall project at least 12 inches above the pump house floor or concrete apron surface and at least 18 inches above final ground surface.
12.3.15.2 Where a well house is constructed, the floor surface shall be at least 6 inches above the final ground elevation.
12.3.15.3 Sites subject to flooding shall be provided with an earth mound surrounding the casing and terminating at an elevation at least 2 feet above the 100 year flood elevation, or other suitable protection as determined by the Secretary.
12.3.15.4 The top of the well casing at sites subject to flooding shall terminate at least 3 feet above the 100 year flood elevation.
12.3.16 Development
12.3.16.1 Every well shall be developed to remove the native silts and clays, drilling mud and/or finer fraction of the gravel pack or rock fracture.
12.3.16.2 Development shall continue until the maximum specific capacity is documented from the completed well.
12.3.16.3 Where chemical conditioning is required, the specification shall include provisions for the method, equipment, chemicals, testing for residual chemicals, and disposal of waste and inhibitors.
12.3.16.4 Where blasting procedures may be used, the specifications shall include the provisions for blasting and cleaning.
12.3.16.5 Other development procedures including hydrofracturing may be approved by the Secretary.
12.3.17 Capping Requirements
12.3.17.1 A water-tight, non-corrodible vented cap must be installed on each well. Each cap must have a screened 40 mesh vent designed to shed water and snow.
12.3.17.2 At all times during the progress of work, the contractor shall provide protection to prevent tampering with the well or entrance of foreign materials.
12.3.17.3 Caps for testing flowing wells shall include a pressure gauge sensitive enough to calculate static water level to the nearest tenth of a foot.
12.3.18 Closure of Abandoned Wells
12.3.18.1 Test wells and groundwater sources which are not in use or planned for use shall be sealed by such methods as necessary to restore the controlling geological conditions which existed prior to construction, or as directed by the Secretary.
12.3.18.2 Wells to be abandoned shall:
(a) be sealed to prevent undesirable exchange of water from one aquifer to another;
(b) preferably be filled with neat cement grout;
(c) have fill materials other than cement grout or concrete approved by the Secretary;
(d) when filled with cement grout or concrete, these materials shall be applied to the well hole through a pipe, tremie, or bailer; and
(e) be disinfected and free from foreign materials.
12.3.18.3 Well abandonment shall be performed only by a Vermont licensed water well driller or monitoring well driller for her or his respective class and in conformance with all Department regulations.
12.3.19 Aquifer Types and Construction Methods - Special Conditions
12.3.19.1 Gravel Pack Wells
(a) Gravel pack shall be well rounded particles, 95% siliceous material, that are smooth and uniform, free of foreign material, properly sized, washed and then disinfected immediately prior to or during placement.
(b) Gravel pack shall be placed in one uniform continuous operation.
(c) Gravel refill pipes, when used, shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe incorporated within the pump foundation and terminated with screwed or welded caps at least 12 inches above the pump house floor or concrete apron.
(d) Gravel refill pipes located in the grouted annular opening shall be surrounded by a minimum of 1 1/2 inches of grout.
(e) Protection from leakage of grout or fine grained formation materials into the gravel pack or screen shall be provided for.
(f) Permanent casings shall meet requirements of Subpart 12.4.10.
(g) Minimum casing and grouted depth shall be acceptable to the Secretary.
12.3.19.2 Naturally Flowing Wells
(a) Flow shall be controlled.
(b) Permanent casing and grout shall be provided.
(c) If erosion of the confining bed appears likely, special protective construction may be required by the Secretary.
(d) Capping shall be in accordance with Subpart 12.3.6.2.
12.3.20 Well Pumps, Discharge Piping and Appurtenances
12.3.20.1 Line Shaft Pumps

Wells equipped with line shaft pumps shall:

(a) have the casing firmly connected to the pump structure or have the casing inserted into a recess extending at least one half inch into the pump base, and
(b) have the pump foundation and base designed to prevent water from coming into contact with the joint.
12.3.20.2 Submersible Pumps

Where a submersible pump is used:

(a) the top of the casing shall be effectively sealed against the entrance of water under all conditions of vibration or movement of conductors or cables, and
(b) the electrical cable shall be firmly attached to the riser pipe at 20 foot intervals or less.
12.3.20.3 Discharge Piping
(a) The discharge piping shall:
(1) be designed so that the friction loss will be low,
(2) have control valves and appurtenances located above the pump house floor when an above ground discharge is provided,
(3) be protected against the entrance of contamination,
(4) be equipped with a check valve, a shut off valve, a pressure gauge, a means of measuring flow, and a smooth nosed sampling tap located at a point where positive pressure is maintained,
(5) where applicable, be equipped with an air release vacuum relief valve located upstream from the check valve, with exhaust/relief piping terminating in a down- turned position at least 18 inches above the floor and covered with a 24 mesh corrosion resistant screen,
(6) be valved to permit test pumping and control of each well,
(7) have all exposed piping, valves and appurtenances protected against physical damage and freezing,
(8) be properly anchored to prevent movement, and
(9) be protected against surge or water hammer.
(b) The discharge piping should be provided with a means of pumping to waste, but shall not be directly connected to a sewer.
12.3.20.4 Pitless Well Units
(a) The Secretary must be contacted for approval of specific applications of pitless units.
(b) Pitless units shall:
(1) be threaded or welded to the well casing,
(2) be of watertight construction throughout,
(3) be of materials and weight at least equivalent and compatible to the casing,
(4) have field connection to the lateral discharge from the pitless unit of threaded, flanged or mechanical joint connection, and
(5) have the wellhead terminate at least 18 inches above final ground elevation or 3 feet above highest known flood elevation or as the Secretary directs.
(c) The design of the pitless unit shall make provision for:
(1) access to disinfect the well,
(2) facilities to measure water levels in the well
(3) a cover at the upper terminal of the well that will prevent the entrance of contamination,
(4) a contamination-proof entrance connection for electrical cable,
(5) an inside diameter as great as that of the well casing, up to and including casing diameters of 12 inches, to facilitate work and repair on the well, pump, or well screen, and
(6) at least 1 check valve within the well casing or in compliance with requirements of the Secretary.
12.3.20.5 Casing Vent

Provisions shall be made for venting the well casing to atmosphere. The vent shall terminate in a downturned position, at or above the top of the casing or pitless unit in a minimum 1 1/2 inch diameter opening covered with a 24 mesh, corrosion resistant screen. The pipe connecting the casing to the vent shall be of adequate size to provide rapid venting of the casing.

Appendix B Long Range Plan Requirements.

The Long Range Plan required in Subsections 4.2.2 and 5.5(e) of this Rule shall include the following elements where applicable:

1. Existing ownership of the system.
(a) Entity (Individual, Corporation, Association, Fire District, etc.) and formal name.
(b) Owner's contact information
(c) Address for receipt of official mail
(d) Telephone number(s) for owner and operator(s)
2. For new system proposals, specify the final ownership structure.
(a) Describe in narrative form the proposed or existing ownership structure and its legal basis.
(b) Describe in narrative form any anticipated ownership changes (e.g., from developer to a homeowners association), and provide a summary of the mechanism that will trigger the ownership change (e.g., 70% of lots sold). If no changes are anticipated, so state.
(c) Provide an organizational chart of the ownership and operational structure, which identifies the major water system responsibilities of each position listed on the chart.
(d) Provide descriptions of the experience and expertise of all proposed management and operational personnel for the system.
(e) Provide a copy or draft copy of proposed by-laws, policies, procedures, etc., for water system responsibilities, customer responsibilities, customer complaint procedures, etc., including fiscal management and controls.
3. Costs of Operation and Maintenance of System
(a) Budget projections for five years.
(i) Provide a line item budget for all costs of operation and maintenance (Oamp;M). Include operator salaries/benefits, training, chemical costs, electric and other utilities for each of the next five years.
(ii) Indicate how the budget items for maintenance were derived.
(b) Capital fund reserve
(i) List the major project elements in table form, showing their useful lives, current age, and replacement cost.
(ii) For each of these, determine the funds needed annually for a reserve fund to pay for replacement of the major project elements at the end of their useful lives.
4. Revenues for Operation and Maintenance.
(a) Describe any fees to be collected to begin operation (new system).
(b) State the number of users on the system, and calculate the annual user charges for the next five years to fund the costs identified in 3 above.
(c) Describe in narrative form the method(s) to be used to fund the reserve for capital equipment.
(d) Provide an analysis of the reliability of the anticipated revenues (i.e., relate user charges to median household income, property values, or projected sales).
5. Alternatives and Plans for Growth or Modernization.
(a) Describe the scope of the plan in narrative form; include a Vermont Orthophoto Base Map with the existing and future service areas clearly marked.
(b) Provide the information outlined in Subparts 1.2.2 and 1.2.3 of Appendix A.
(c) Address the impact of feasible and appropriate water conservation measures on each of the alternatives and plans.
6. Water Conservation Planning

Development of a water conservation plan that, at a minimum, addresses the following:

(a) evaluation of system water use efficiency, including evaluation of extent of unaccounted-for water, water accounting, and loss control;
(b) universal metering;
(c) a water rate system to promote water conservation;
(d) public education and information on water conservation;
(e) opportunities for water recycling or reuse by large commercial and industrial water users; and
(f) promoting the installation of water saving fixtures and devices in new and existing residences and facilities.

NOTE: A plan adopted under Title 24, Chapter 117, Capital Budget Program, may be submitted for review to fulfill this long range plan requirement for existing systems. For new systems, the long range plan requirements may be incorporated in the Engineer's Report required for new systems. The Engineer's Report requirements are detailed in Appendix A, Subpart 1.2.

Appendix C Bacteriological Monitoring Requirements.

Table C1-1 -BACTERIOLOGICAL MONITORING REQUIREMENTS

Minimum Number of Population Served

Samples per Calendar Month

25 to 1,000

1

1,001 to 2,500

2

2,501 to 3,300

3

3,301 to 4,100

4

4,101 to 4,900

5

4,901 to 5,800

6

5,801 to 6,700

7

6,701 to 7,600

8

7,601 to 8,500

9

8,501 to 12,900

10

12,901 to 17,200

15

17,201 to 21,500

20

21,501 to 25,000

25

25,001 to 33,000

30

33,001 to 41,000

40

41,001 to 50,000

50

50,001 to 59,000

60

59,001 to 70,000

70

70,001 to 83,000

80

83,001 to 96,000

90

96,001 to 130,000

100

(Truncated for Vermont)

Appendix D Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

O&M Manuals should meet the following two parameters of usefulness when prepared and completed:

1) Useful as a stand alone document to allow daily routine and trouble shooting operation by a properly trained operator, including testing and monitoring requirements necessary for the particular system.
2) Useful in conjunction with "as-built" system prints for full system maintenance to insure adequate quality water supply to the residents served.

The O&M Manual must reflect actual installation, actual equipment and actual control functions "as-built", not as proposed. For example, statements such as "use pump XYZ or equivalent" should not be used, rather the manual should read: "Pump installed is an XYZ, Model B."

The following elements shall be contained in all O&M Manuals:

1. General System Description
(a) Approved source(s)
(b) Raw water storage (if any)
(c) Raw water treatment (will vary with system size)
(d) Finished water storage
(e) Distribution system
(f) System pressure maintenance (gravity, hydropneumatic, booster pumps)
(g) Source protection area (SPA) map, source protection plan.
2. System Schematic
(a) Major elements identified
(b) All system valves identified
(c) List of equipment and valves. Brief description of each and their system function (use 2(a) and 2(b) for reference).
3. Start-up Procedure
(a) Initial flushing and disinfection
(b) Sequenced system start-up
4. Normal Operation
(a) Periodic system checks required
(b) Chemical tanks to be filled; periodic system backwashing, recharging, etc.
(c) Routine tests to be performed.
(d) Routine samples and forms to be sent to Vermont Department of Health (in-plant Quality Control for larger systems).
(e) Periodic system maintenance required (add oil, check for leaks, clean injectors, exercise valves, etc.)
(f) Provide for calibration and standardization of test equipment (turbidimeter, pH meter, etc.)
(g) Routine inspection and recording of sources of contamination in the source protection area and any associated sampling or monitoring.
(h) Procedures for replacement/ regeneration of carbon media, if applicable.
(i) Process flow diagram and valve alignments of expected treatment system conditions.
(j) Procedures to be followed in response to breakthrough of a carbon unit, if granular activated carbon is applied.
5. Safety
(a) List of all system operational hazards including all chemicals to be used and their Material Safety Data Sheet(s).
(b) Reinforce the need for the routine use of personal protective equipment.
(c) Outline possible unsafe conditions caused by poor system operation.
(1) No disinfectant
(2) Elevated levels of treatment
(3) Low water pressure
(4) Cross connections (primarily in water plant facility)
6. Contingency Plan
(a) Required notification.
(b) Alternate water supply made available
(c) Sequenced system shut down
(d) Emergency procedure for non-scheduled shut down including emergency source(s)
(e) Posting of any notice required for use of the emergency source.
7. Trouble Shooting Operation Problems
(a) List typical causes of system problems
(1) Low water-pump shut off, line break, etc.
(2) Low disinfectant-chemical tank empty, etc.

NOTE: On a day to day basis, this section coupled with section 6 are the most important and critical; appropriate thought and time should be given to preparation of these sections.

8. Distribution
(a) Key shut off points identified along with major line sizes.
(b) System flushing:
(1) Method
(2) Frequency
(c) Special features (air relief valves, pressure reduction, backflow preventers, blow offs, etc.)
(d) Fire protection (rated flow/hydrant, number of hydrants, pumper capacity, etc.)
9. Maintenance Program
(a) Equipment list with recommended maintenance frequency.
(b) Equipment/valve/control panel specifications sheets.
(c) Tank information
(d) Maintenance log procedure
(e) Reference to "as-built" plans as needed.
10. Vendor List
(a) Source of required chemicals.
(b) Source of all mechanical equipment and valves.
11. Source Protection Plan

See requirements in Subchapter 16 (Source Water Protection) of this Rule.

12. Record Maintenance Procedures and Customer Notification

The manual shall identify the location of the records, identify the various files to be kept and the length of time to retain the records. Customer notification procedures for Consumer Confidence Reports and water quality data shall also be included.

13. Customer Complaint Procedures

The manual shall include a detailed procedure for addressing customer concerns, including identification of an appeal process if the customer does not obtain satisfaction from the operator. The procedure shall include the name and telephone number for the water system owner and operator, the Drinking Water and Groundwater Protection Division, Department of Health, and for privately owned systems, the number for the Consumer Affairs and Public Information Division in the Department of Public Service.

14. Water Conservation Program

The manual shall include a description of the system's water conservation measures, including where appropriate, public education, leak detection and repair, and metering.

15. Vermont Department of Environmental Conservation

The manual shall include a copy of this Water Supply Rule (Chapter 21). The copy of the manual submitted to the Secretary for approval does not need to contain a copy of the rule.

Notes

12-003 Code Vt. R. 12-030-003-X
EFFECTIVE DATE:
September 24, 1992 Secretary of State Rule Log # 92-47
AMENDED:
July 8, 1996 Secretary of State Rule Log # 96-38; July 15, 1996 Secretary of State Rule Log # 96-45; August 1, 1999 Secretary of State Rule Log # 99-32; December 29, 2000 Secretary of State Rule Log # 00-68; August 2001 [Not an amendment, replace corrected pages]; January 30, 2002 Secretary of State Rule Log # 02-04; June 19, 2003 Secretary of State Rule Log # 03-15 [Administrative correction to Appendix E]; April 25, 2005 Secretary of State Rule Log # 05-11; December 1, 2010 Secretary of State Rule Log #10-042; April 12, 2019 Secretary of State Rule Log #19-017; March 17, 2020 Secretary of State Rule Log #20-020; 2/24/2024 Secretary of State Rule Log #24-007

STATUTORY AUTHORITY:

3 V.S.A. § 2822; 10 V.S.A. Chs. 48, 56, 61; 18 V.S.A. §§ 501b, 503, 1218; 24 V.S.A. Ch. 120, 1672

State regulations are updated quarterly; we currently have two versions available. Below is a comparison between our most recent version and the prior quarterly release. More comparison features will be added as we have more versions to compare.


No prior version found.